Skip to main content

AI assistant

Sign in to chat with this filing

The assistant answers questions, extracts KPIs, and summarises risk factors directly from the filing text.

HEADLAM GROUP PLC Annual Report 2025

Apr 9, 2026

4695_10-k_2026-04-09_23dc15b3-3167-4979-add8-823f59ce3d48.html

Annual Report

Open in viewer

Opens in your device viewer

Headlam Group plc

Annual Report and Accounts

for the year ended 2025

Headlam Group PLC

Company number: 00460129

Headlam is the UK’s leading

floor covering distributor,

operating for over 30 years.

The Group works with suppliers across the globe

manufacturing the broadest range of products, and gives

them a highly effective route to market, selling their products

into the large and diverse customer base in the UK.

Headlam provides its customers with a market-leading service

through the largest product range, in-depth knowledge,

ecommerce and marketing support, and nationwide delivery

service. Headlam offers unrivalled convenience, through

nationwide delivery plus multiple collection points. These

collection points offer the ability for independent retailers

and contractors with limited storage space to collect their

product and take it directly to their customer’s location for

fitting. Headlam also has a growing number of take-back

schemes at its collection points, enabling customers bring

back the used and unwanted flooring that has been lifted

out of their customer’s premises.

The key features of Headlam’s

proposition include:

• Product availability and prompt delivery

• Customer service and strong relationships with fast

response to queries

• Reliable quality

• New product launches and promotions

• Point-of-sale materials to showcase options to

end-consumer

• Digital ordering and stock checking

• Ability to check stock and order out of hours

33

Years operating

c.2,200

People (2025 average)

£499m

Revenue (2025)

OUR BUSINESS AT A GLANCE

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

01

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

Overview

Financial Highlights

Contents

Overview

Our Business at a Glance IFC

Interim Executive Chair’s Review 02

Strategic Report

Market Overview 08

Our Business Model 10

Strategy 12

Key Performance Indicators (‘KPIs’) 14

Stakeholder Engagement 18

Financial Review 22

Sustainability Report 26

Environmental 28

Social 32

Governance 36

Task Force on Climate-Related

Financial Disclosures (‘TCFD’) 38

Streamlined Energy and Carbon

Reporting (‘SECR’) 43

Risk Management 46

Principal Risks 49

Viability Statement 51

Non-Financial and Sustainability

Information Statement 53

Governance

Compliance Statement 56

Chair’s Introduction 58

Board of Directors 60

How the Board Embeds Culture 62

Board Leadership and Company

Purpose 64

Division of Responsibilities 72

Composition, Succession and

Evaluation 77

Audit Committee Report 78

Nomination Committee Report 86

Directors’ Remuneration Report 92

Directors’ Report

118

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

123

Financial Statements

Independent Auditors’ Report 126

Consolidated Income Statement 134

Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income 135

Statements of Financial Position 136

Statement of Changes in Equity

– Group 137

Statement of Changes in Equity

– Company 138

Cash Flow Statements 139

Notes to the Financial Statements 140

Alternative Performance Measures 189

Financial Record 193

Additional Information 195

Revenue

Statutory basic

(loss)/earnings per share

£498.7m (5.1)% (102.0)p (226.9)%

(2024: £525.7m) (2024: (31.2)p)

202520242023

£498.7m

£525.7m

£577.3m

202520242023

(102.0)p

(31.2)p

9.6p

Underlying operating (loss)/profit Underlying (loss)/profit before tax

£(33.4)m (34.1)% £(39.5)m (24.6)%

(2024: £(24.9)m) (2024: £(31.7)m)

202520242023

£(33.4)m

£(24.9)m

£15.9m

202520242023

£(39.5)m

£(31.7)m

£11.0m

Net cash/(debt) Statutory (loss)/profit before tax

£(31.4)m (388.1)% £(69.6)m (82.7)%

(2024: £10.9m) (2024: £(38.1)m)

202520242023

£(31.4)m

£10.9m

£(29.6)m

202520242023

£(69.6)m

£(38.1)m

£7.2m

02

“ Our new core customer

strategy, combined with

the ongoing benefits

of our transformation

programme, provides a clear

road map to profitability

in 2027 and beyond.”

Introduction and market update

Headlam is the largest flooring distributor in the UK, with

unrivalled scale and well-established national reach. Our

network of distribution centres provide an excellent service

to independent retailers and contractors, with customers

enjoying access to the broadest product range, including our

own exclusive brands.

Over the course of the year performance was impacted by

a trading environment that has remained challenging. To

compensate, we launched a revised transformation plan

designed to considerably reduce losses in 2026 and return the

Group to profitability in 2027, even if market conditions remain

subdued.

To complement the transformation programme, we have

initiated a new ‘core customer’ focused strategy which

enables significant additional network and infrastructure cost

savings as the Group consolidates its operations on serving

independent retailers and contractors.

These measures, combined with the Group’s market position,

provides a platform for a return to sustainable profitable

growth. Despite the timing of a market recovery remaining

uncertain, we enter 2026 with a clear plan to create

meaningful value over the medium term.

Financial performance 2025

Revenue declined 4.6% in 2025 on a same working day basis,

reflecting both persistently challenging market conditions

and the deliberate decision, taken in November 2025, to exit

low-margin revenue that was diluting profitability. Revenue

from larger customers grew in the year overall but declined

in the last few weeks, largely reflecting the revised strategy,

published in November, to reduce low-margin revenue.

Gross margin of 29.5% was broadly flat year-on-year.

Operating costs of £180.7 million were also flat year-on-year

with cost inflation and trade counter investments offset by

benefits from the transformation plan. The underlying loss

before tax increased from £31.7 million to £39.5 million.

The Group had Net Debt of £31.4 million at the end of the

year and owned property in the UK valued at £75.3 million. In

January 2026 the Group agreed a new borrowing facility for

three years (with the option to extend).

The financial performance is set out in more detail in the

Financial Review.

Transformation plan progress in 2025

Despite the market environment, the application of the

transformation plan launched in 2024 has ensured good

operational progress over the year.

Key highlights include:

• Network optimisation in the South East, including the

opening of a new distribution centre in Rayleigh and the

closure of the Ipswich site. The review of our South East

network continues as we optimise our footprint to match

our revised customer base

• Rollout of innovative new display stands, supporting our

independent retailer customers. Strong feedback from

independent retailer customers

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

INTERIM EXECUTIVE CHAIR’S REVIEW

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

03

Overview

• Consolidation of operations in the Midlands, with

Nottingham transferred into other sites

• Launch of fully centralised buying and supply chain,

already yielding significant benefits in stock levels and

stock turn. From early October 2025 to February 2026,

stock levels in the UK reduced by c.£30 million with further

opportunity

• Preparation for sale of the Group’s businesses in France

and Netherlands

Headlam’s 2026 – 2028

‘core customer’ strategy

The medium-term objective for Headlam is to be a profitable,

cash generative business positioned for sustainable growth.

From a profit perspective, this translates to our expectations

that our transformation plan will create a return to

profitability in 2027 and then a return to historic midsingle-

digit operating profit margin levels thereafter from the

annualised positive benefit of these initiatives.

To fund the strategy and build balance sheet resilience, cash

is expected to be generated from property disposals and

working capital optimisation. We therefore expect to have

significantly reduced Net Debt by the end of 2027 with further

improvement thereafter.

The new strategy, specifically focused on profit generation,

alters the preceding narrative which was focused on revenue

growth. In seeking to fill excess capacity with increased

volumes from larger customers and through trade counter

expansion, we moved away from our core independent

retailers and contractors, the customers on which the strength

of this business depends. Those customers were increasingly of

the view that the Group was competing against them rather

than supporting them. As a result, we lost share.

The larger customer business that we won, whilst providing

positive contribution to the fixed cost base, required us to

maintain a higher level of infrastructure than would have

otherwise been the case and therefore hindered the ability

to implement significant reductions in the fixed cost base.

Furthermore, although the Group secured additional low-

margin revenue, we lost more profitable residential revenue

from our core customer base.

Our core customer strategy refocuses the business on

independent retailers and contractors whilst adjusting the

cost base of the business accordingly. We firmly believe

that this will be to the benefit of all stakeholders and create

shareholder value.

The strategy has the following core components:

1. Reduce low-margin revenue - refocus on independent

retailers and contractors, whilst eliminating low-margin

revenue that ties up fixed costs

2. Reduce costs - as low-margin business is exited, we will

take out the variable costs associated with it, as well as

reducing structural, fixed costs that previously had to be

maintained in order to service that low-margin business

3. Enhance customer service –we are already rapidly

improving customer service to our independent retailer

and contractor customer base. Our measure of delivery

success is substantially improved year-on-year for

the first two months of this year. This is starting to be

recognised in feedback from customers.

4. Simplify ranges and consolidate supply base – put simply,

we have had too many ranges and too many suppliers,

with volumes spread too thinly across the supply base.

There is opportunity to reduce range duplication, whilst

maintaining a broad product offering, and also to

consolidate our supply base to strengthen relationships

with key strategic sourcing partners

5. Optimise cash – a smaller business means less cash

needs to be tied up in working capital and there are also

opportunities to dispose of surplus assets

Taking each in turn:

1. Reduce low-margin revenue

We will refocus and grow with independent retailers and

contractors, whist eliminating low-margin revenue elsewhere.

The focus on fixing or exiting insufficiently profitable business

falls into four categories.

A. Reduction in low-margin large customer business

The Group will ensure that all resources are fully utilised

to serve profitable revenue. As a result, large low margin

customers that serve to increase utilisation of existing

capacity, but contribute little to profits and require us to

maintain a higher fixed cost base, are no longer desirable.

B. Exit Continental European business

The sale of our businesses in France and the Netherlands

continues to progress. By focusing solely on the UK, losses

are reduced and focus increased on our core customers.

Collectively, those businesses made an underlying loss before

tax of £3.7 million in 2025, and are presented as a discontinued

operation.

C. Category mix

Within our product categories, there is a wide range of gross

margin. Certain products, particularly in the contract element

of the market, can be at relatively low gross margin and, when

central costs are fully allocated, the profit contribution is

marginal.

By focusing on the more profitable categories and actively

deprioritising low gross margin categories, our fixed costs

and infrastructure requirements, such as distribution centres

and vehicles, naturally reduce, benefiting overall Group

profitability albeit at the expense of revenue.

In addition, we are proactively re-energising our higher-

margin consumer brands which are highly valued by

independents enabling them to generate strong margins and

compete against national chains.

04

D. Trade counters

As at the end of 2025 we had 80 trade counters. However, a

collection of our trade counters, notably those in the South

East, are exposed to relatively high rent costs which reduces

the viability of a collection point rather than servicing those

areas with delivery only. Given higher costs, and a product

range typically focused on lower gross margin categories, the

plan is to reduce our trade counter network whilst migrating

some profitable category sales to adjacent trade counters or

switching this revenue from ‘collection sales’ to ‘delivered sales’.

This initiative significantly reduces fixed costs and whilst revenue

also reduces, this is skewed to the lower margin categories.

Furthermore, we have already repositioned the role and

organisational structure of the trade counters. Specifically:

Previously they were a separate business unit with their own

management team. We have now moved the management

of the trade counters into our Mercado independent retailer

and contractor sales team. Our trade counter sites have now

been turned into collection points.

We have reclarified our approach to which customers we will

trade with; specifically, that we will only service customers in

the flooring trade. Previously, the trade counter business, whilst

only ever servicing trade customers, did sell a small amount to

adjacent non-flooring trades. These non-flooring accounts

were closed in February 2026.

• Furthermore, we are repositioning the ranges available

in the trade counter sites, in order to provide our

independent retailer and contract customers with access

to certain ranges that are not available to smaller trade

customers of our trade counter collection points.

In total, the above initiatives are anticipated to cumulatively

reduce revenue whilst significantly increasing the gross and

operating margins of the business when associated costs are

removed.

2. Reduce costs

In line with a substantial reduction in unprofitable revenue

there is the opportunity to reduce both direct and indirect

costs significantly. Direct overheads include warehouse,

transport, energy, rent and rates.

As part of the core customer strategy our network footprint

will be significantly reduced. In June 2024, prior to embarking

on the transformation programme, we had 1.5 million

square foot of warehousing space in our distribution centres

(excluding cross-dock facilities). This has been reduced to

1.3 million to date and will reduce further.

3. Substantially enhance customer

service to our independent and

contractor customer base

Headlam has taken immense pride in its service levels over

the years, but in the last year these have not met our high

standards. Deliveries have not been consistent enough and

availability of some ranges has not been strong enough. The

root cause of much of these issues is from a fragmented,

decentralised business model that has taken time to

centralise. This has meant that we have not had stock in

the right places and have had to internally move too much

product around our network, putting pressure on costs and

on-time delivery, as well as stock availability.

In recent weeks we have made strong progress in addressing

delivery consistency. Our measure of delivery success is

substantially improved year-on-year for the first two months

of this year. This is starting to be recognised in feedback from

customers.

We are addressing stock availability through better inventory

management and our newly centralised buying function.

4. Simplify our range and

consolidate our supply base

In late 2024, we launched a single go-to-market proposition,

under our Mercado brand, consolidating 32 trading

businesses. Earlier this year we also consolidated six different

own product brand businesses into the Mercado sales team.

We are also reducing SKUs to focus on the products that

matter most to our core customers. We have already reduced

our ‘live’ product range from 27k to 16k SKUs with further

reduction potential as we focus on profitable category mix.

As the UK’s largest purchaser of flooring, we have the chance

to create long-term, mutually beneficial supplier partnerships

as we consolidate our purchases. Supplier benefits secured

in 2025 will take effect and fully annualise in 2026 with good

visibility on further opportunities for increased collaboration

benefiting 2026 and 2027.

In addition, there are opportunities to optimise our approach

to pricing and discounting. Having consolidated 32 trading

businesses, with 32 price lists and different approaches

to discounting, there is now an opportunity to implement

consistency and optimisation, which we expect to yield gross

margin benefits.

5. Optimise cash

The core customer strategy and transformation plan requires

cash to cover the trading losses until the Group becomes

sustainably cash-generative and to fund the cost of

transformation. The Group has a clear and well progressed

plan in place to generate cash inflows through the disposal

of assets, albeit these are not solely in our control, and a

reduction in working capital requirements. The cash inflows

from these are intended to more than cover the cash

requirements, leaving the Group with significantly reduced

Net Debt at the end of 2027.

The Group has several options for realising cash from property

assets, including: outright sale, sale and leaseback, or through

utilising the assets for further borrowings. There are currently

three properties on the market for disposal and more will

become available for sale over the next 18 months. Any further

transactions, if realised, would accelerate our reduction in Net

Debt and further increase the Group’s liquidity.

Since implementing fully centralised buying we have already

significantly reduced stock levels and improved stock turn. In

2023 the stock turn was 3.2x, improving to 3.5x in 2024 and 3.8x

in 2025, with recent run rate above 4x. Over the medium term

we expect to sustain a stock turn of at least 5.0x, which will

generate further significant cash benefits whilst still providing

the Group with substantially higher levels of stock than its

competitors in the UK.

INTERIM EXECUTIVE CHAIR’S REVIEW CONTINUED

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

05

Overview

Progress to date

Since the initiation of the core customer strategy in November

2025, and reflecting our determination to proceed at pace,

we have achieved the following:

• Over £10 million of annualised payroll savings achieved by

end of December 2025

• Increased pricing with a low margin large customer, which

is expected to cease to be a customer in the coming

months which reduces pressure on the network, improving

service levels to independent retailers and enabling us to

reduce fixed costs

• Service delivery substantially improved year-on-year for

the first two months of 2026

• Agreement of a new borrowing facility

Reflecting the amount, and pace, of change in the business,

we have decided to pause the implementation of the new

ERP. The development work performed to date has been

“mothballed” in readiness for the project recommencing at

the appropriate time.

Highly valued colleagues

Across the UK, France and the Netherlands Headlam Group

PLC employed an average c.2,200 people in 2025. To maximise

the success of the core customer strategy, it is essential that our

colleagues recognise their importance and the weight placed

on continually striving to make Headlam a great place to work.

We recognise that implementing significant change can be

unsettling for colleagues and a number of colleagues did

leave the Group prior to the end of 2025 as part of collective

consultation processes. I would like to thank those colleagues

for their hard work over the years and throughout the

consultation processes, and I wish them all the best for the

future. I also wish to recognise the colleagues who remain with

the Group and who continue to work hard to implement the

changes to the business.

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

25 March 2026

Outlook

• The new core customer strategy will see a material

planned reduction in revenue over 2026 and 2027.

• Once fully implemented, and, assuming a stable

market, this is expected to result in a smaller base

revenue on continuing operations but with a

significant enhancement to quality of earnings

through enhanced gross margin.

• With cost saving initiatives also on track, overall

future net operating margins expected to return to

mid-single digit once the transformation plan fully

executed.

• Property disposal programme and a reduction in

working capital expected to materially reduce Net

Debt by the end of 2026 with further improvement

anticipated in 2027.

• In the near term, trading conditions remain

challenging: consumer spending on home

improvements continues to decline and the conflict

in the Middle East, whilst hard to predict, has

already created cost pressures for the wider UK

flooring industry with significant price increases in

polypropylene and fuel.

• Over the medium term, with a clear and granular

transformation strategy now in place and beginning

to have a positive impact despite continuing

challenging trading conditions, the Board believes

that the outlook for Headlam is positive reflecting

the benefits of its market leading position, inherent

strengths and renewed focus on core independent

retailers and contractors.

• The Board therefore continues to have confidence in

a return to profitability in 2027 as previously guided.

06

STRATEGIC

REPORT

Market Overview

08

Our Business Model

10

Strategy

11

Key Performance Indicators (‘KPIs’)

14

Stakeholder Engagement

18

Financial Review

22

Sustainability Report

26

Environmental

28

Social

32

Governance

36

Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures

(‘TCFD’)

38

Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (‘SECR’)

43

Risk Management

46

Principal Risks

49

Viability Statement

51

Non-Financial and Sustainability

Information Statement

53

Strategic Report

07

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

The flooring market in the UK is worth

around £2.5 billion at distributor selling

prices and has experienced an exceptionally

challenging period over the past few years.

Approximately two-thirds of the UK market is residential,

making it heavily dependent on consumer spending on home

improvements. As a high-value, discretionary purchase,

flooring has been one of the weakest areas of consumer

expenditure, experiencing a significant decline. This partly

reflects the impact of the cost-of-living crisis on disposable

incomes, a sharp reduction in housing transactions (down

20% in 2023 and a further 8% in Q1 2024, before improving

thereafter), and subdued consumer confidence. As a result,

market volumes have declined consistently over the past four

years.

This market decline has resulted in a number of large retailers,

contractors and distributors ceasing to be viable over the last

few years, most notably Carpetright and Homebase in 2024.

Conversely, the independent retailer and contractor market

has proved to be relatively resilient.

There are varying estimates of the scale of decline in volume

in the flooring market in recent years. Using external data

points we estimate it to be around 25%. In our view, some of this

could be a permanent reduction and we should not expect it

to come back, at least not in the short to medium term. This

‘structural’ element relates to replacement cycles, with flooring

products lasting longer and a gradual change in the mix from

soft flooring to hard flooring, which can be more durable.

However, an element of the decline in recent years is expected

to be cyclical and reflects consumers holding back on spending

decisions. This points to a positive outlook for demand for

flooring in the coming years, albeit the timing is uncertain.

A notable feature of the flooring market from 2023 through

to 2025 has been the absence of manufacturer-led price

increases. Historically, manufacturers typically implemented

annual inflationary price rises, which flowed through the

supply chain to distributors and retailers, and were ultimately

passed on to consumers. Whilst such price inflation was

neutral to margin percentages, it increased absolute gross

profit for distributors, helping to offset rising overhead

costs. However, due to exceptionally weak market volumes,

price increases in 2023, 2024 and 2025 have been minimal

as manufacturers compete for volume to maintain factory

utilisation. We are starting to see signs of a return to more

normal levels of price inflation in the sector in 2026, albeit this

remains uncertain.

The long-term outlook for the flooring market is positive,

supported by a degree of cyclical recovery plus population

growth and more stable macroeconomic conditions. As the

clear market leader in the UK, supported by over 30 years

of industry expertise, a large customer base, long-standing

supplier relationships and the most extensive delivery and

collection network nationwide, Headlam is well positioned to

capture long-term opportunities.

“ The flooring market has

experienced an exceptionally

challenging period over

the past four years, but the

long-term outlook is positive.”

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

08

MARKET OVERVIEW

Market Indicators

0

Jan-24

Feb-24

Mar-24

Apr-24

May-24

Jun-24

Jul-24

Aug-24

Sep-24

Oct-24

Nov-24

Dec-24

Feb-25

Jan-25

Mar-25

Apr-25

May-25

Jun-25

Jul-25

Aug-25

Sep-25

Oct-25

Nov-25

Dec-25

Overall index Major purchase index

-5

-10

-15

-25

-20

-30

-40

-35

Consumer confidence in major purchases has

remained negative but improving

Housing transactions declined 20% in 2023,

growing thereafter

Consumer spending on home improvements

has continued to decline

Jan-24

Feb-24

Mar-24

Apr-24

May-24

Jun-24

Jul-24

Aug-24

Sep-24

Oct-24

Nov-24

Dec-24

Jan-25

Feb-25

Mar-25

Apr-25

May-25

Jun-25

Jul-25

Aug-25

Sep-25

Oct-25

Nov-25

Dec-25

50%

25%

10%

5%

20%

0%

-5%

-10%

-15%

-20%

-25%

-30%

Jan-24

Feb-24

Mar-24

Apr-24

May-24

Jun-24

Jul-24

Aug-24

Sep-24

Oct-24

Nov-24

Dec-24

Jan-25

Feb-25

Mar-25

Apr-25

May-25

Jun-25

Jul-25

Aug-25

Sep-25

Oct-25

Nov-25

Dec-26

Jan-26

0%

-5%

-10%

-15%

-20%

Sources:

• UK market size: estimates by LEK, Northwest Strategy Associates, MTW Research.

• Consumer confidence: NIQ GfK.

• Housing transactions: www.gov.uk/government/statistics/monthly-property-transactions-completed-in-the-uk-with-value-40000-

or-above.

• Consumer spending on home improvements: www.barclayscorporate.com/insights/industry-expertise/uk-consumer-spending-report.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

09

We create value by

leveraging our key

relationships, supply chain

expertise, and innovative

approach to deliver

products that are both

sustainable and fit for

purpose.

Our people

Attracting and retaining the best

people to provide the highest

levels of customer service, and

working together to deliver

success.

Our culture

A shared group of values, including

to ensure a business of integrity

with robust controls and ethical

conduct.

Our expertise

Ensuring we retain and build upon

our market leading expertise

through ongoing investment in

people and the business.

Our sustainable mindset

Ensuring the long-term success

of the business through a focus

on a sustainable business model

and working closely with all

stakeholders.

Our relationships

Actively engaging with all stakeholders, including people,

customers and suppliers, to support each other and deliver

success together.

Working closely with our suppliers across the globe to launch innovative and

successful products into the marketplace, sharing data and ensuring an

efficient and ethical supply chain.

What differentiates us

Our customer-led

approach

Broadest product

offering; nationwide

delivery and collection;

industry-leading App;

improved B2B website.

Our comprehensive

The broadest offering

encompassing a

portfolio of own brands

as well as leading

third-party brands, with

opportunity for future

growth by leveraging

our scale and reach.

Our material handling

and processing

capabilities

Largest inventory

holding amongst peers.

Able to process a high

volume of orders for fast

delivery.

Our extensive

distribution network

The largest delivery

and collection network

in the UK.

Our product

knowledge and

ranging

Unrivalled product

knowledge and

expertise. Able to

provide valuable

insight to both

customers and

suppliers.

Our disciplined

capital allocation

strategy

Balancing investment

with shareholder

returns.

What we rely on

Supporting our suppliers

What differentiates us

10

OUR BUSINESS MODEL

Purchasing

Sourcing and purchasing leading,

innovative and exclusive products

from a wide range of suppliers/

manufacturers from across

the globe.

Customer service

Providing our customer base with

the widest range of products

and comprehensive service

propositions tailored to their

specific needs.

Solutions

Offering an array of solutions

across the value chain, including

stockholding and storage

solutions, product insight and

knowledge, curated exclusive

ranges, and sales support.

Delivery & Collection

Providing a truly nationwide

delivery service, along with the

convenience of c.80 collection

points.

We work alongside our suppliers to launch innovative and successful

products into the marketplace, sharing data and ensuring an efficient

and ethical supply chain.

Providing access to a broad range of flooring products, through strong

supplier relationships, underpinned by nationwide distribution, specialist sales

expertise and digital tools that help customers operate efficiently.

Our Colleagues

Providing an inclusive and

collaborative working environment

where people are supported, and

can develop and succeed.

Our Customers

Helping our customers grow their

businesses through an outstanding

service, and giving them

competitive advantages.

Our Suppliers

Providing a highly effective and

efficient route to market for their

products and access to a large and

fragmented customer base.

Our Shareholders

A focus on ensuring the long-term

success of the businesses, and

improving financial performance

to ensure increasing shareholder

returns.

Our Communities

and the Environment

Supporting local communities

through employment and

engagement activities, and

reducing our impact on the

environment through our

sustainability strategy.

The value we create

Our customer-led

approach

Broadest product

offering; nationwide

delivery and collection;

industry-leading App;

improved B2B website.

Our comprehensive

The broadest offering

encompassing a

portfolio of own brands

as well as leading

third-party brands, with

opportunity for future

growth by leveraging

our scale and reach.

Our material handling

and processing

capabilities

Largest inventory

holding amongst peers.

Able to process a high

volume of orders for fast

delivery.

Our extensive

distribution network

The largest delivery

and collection network

in the UK.

Our product

knowledge and

ranging

Unrivalled product

knowledge and

expertise. Able to

provide valuable

insight to both

customers and

suppliers.

Our disciplined

capital allocation

strategy

Balancing investment

with shareholder

returns.

What we do The value we create

What differentiates us

Supporting our customers

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

11

“ Our revised strategy

refocuses the business

on independent

retailers and

contractors whilst right

sizing the business.

We firmly believe

that this will be to

the benefit of all

stakeholders and

create shareholder

value.”

The medium-term objective for Headlam is to be

a profitable, cash generative business positioned

for sustainable growth.

From a profit perspective, this translates to the Group substantially

reducing operating losses in 2026, before low single-digit operating

profit margin in 2027. As cost initiatives implemented in 2027 annualise,

we expect to generate a mid single-digit operating profit margin in

2028. Significantly increased profit generation is the fundamental

driver of the strategy, with a detailed plan in place to achieve it.

To fund the strategy and build balance sheet resilience, cash will be

generated from property disposals and working capital optimisation.

We expect to have little to no net debt by the end of 2027.

The new strategy, specifically focused on profit generation, alters the

preceding narrative which was focused on revenue growth. Although

market conditions over the past three years in particular have been

challenging, the Group’s pursuit of growth to fulfil this objective,

although sound in theory, has proven counter-productive.

An attempt to fill the excess capacity in our network and fully

utilise the Group’s infrastructure with increased volumes from larger

customers and through the trade counter expansion, alienated our

core independent retailers and contractors. These highly valued

customers, on which the strength of the business depends, were

increasingly of the view that the Group was competing against them

rather than providing support and a high quality of service. As a result,

we lost share.

The larger customer business that we won, whilst providing positive

contribution to the fixed cost base, required us to maintain a higher

level of infrastructure than if we did not have that business and

therefore hindered the ability to implement significant reductions

in the fixed cost base. Furthermore, although the Group secured

additional low-margin revenue, we lost more profitable residential

revenue from our core customer base.

Our revised strategy refocuses the business on independent retailers

and contractors whilst right sizing the business. We firmly believe that

this will be to the benefit of all stakeholders and create shareholder

value.

The enhanced transformation plan itself has the following core

components:

1. Reduce low-margin revenue - refocus on independent retailers

and contractors, whilst eliminating low-margin revenue that ties

up fixed costs

2. Reduce costs - as low-margin business is exited, we will take out

the variable costs associated with it, as well as reducing structural,

fixed costs that previously had to be maintained in order to

service that low-margin business

3. Enhance customer service – our service levels have been below

our high standards over the last year and we are already rapidly

improving customer service to our independent retailer and

contractor customer base

4. Simplify ranges and consolidate supply base – put simply, we’ve

had too many range and too many suppliers, with volumes

spread too thinly across the supply base. There is opportunity to

reduce range duplication, whilst maintaining a broad product

offering, and also to consolidate our supply base to strengthen

relationships with key strategic sourcing partners

5. Optimise cash – a smaller business means less cash needs to be

tied up in working capital and there are also opportunities to

dispose of surplus assets

12

OUR STRATEGY

Medium-term

objective

Strategic

focus

Key

initiatives

Behaviours

Reduce

low-margin

revenue

Simplify

ranges and

consolidate

supply base

Optimise

cash

Reduce

costs

Enhance

customer

service

Simplicity

Ownership

CareCommitment

Teamwork

A profitable, cash generative business

positioned for sustainable growth

Refocusing on independent

retailers and contractors, whilst

right-sizing the business

1

4 5

2 3

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

13

202520242023

(4.6)

(10.2)

(2.8)

202520242023

29.5

29.7

31.7

202520242023

36.2

34.4

29.2

CBA

Financial KPIs

Like-for-like

1

revenue growth (%)

APM

Underlying gross

profit margin (%)

Underlying

2

operating

cost ratio (%)

APM

Measurement

Year-on-year revenue growth,

expressed as a percentage and

adjusted to normalise currency

and for consistent working days,

for businesses making a full year’s

contribution.

Why it’s important and relevant

Allows a consistent measure of

year-on-year performance.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Organic revenue growth is a key

strategic objective with specific

projects to support its delivery.

Link to Strategy

1

3

Measurement

Measured as a percentage of

revenue.

Why it’s important and relevant

Shows the effectiveness of gross

profit generation from revenue.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Ongoing pricing discipline, and

product ranging.

Link to Strategy

1

4

Measurement

Measured as a percentage of

revenue.

Why it’s important and relevant

Shows how effective the

Company is at converting gross

profit into operating profit.

Underlying² is used to show

the underlying performance

of the business without non-

underlying items.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Focus on operating efficiencies

including simplifying our network

and our operations under the

Transformation Plan.

Link to Strategy

1

2

The Board believes these Key Performance Indicators (‘KPIs’) provide a comprehensive and relevant list of measurements

with which to assess the Group’s financial, operational, and social performance towards the achievement of its strategy.

Commentary on the Group’s use of Alternative Performance Measures (‘APMs’) alongside International Financial Reporting

Standards (‘IFRS’) Measures is given within the Financial Review on pages 22 to 25, and below.

1

Like-for-like revenue is calculated based on constant currency from activities and businesses that made a full contribution in both the 2025 and the comparator

year(s), and is adjusted for any variances in working days.

2

To supplement IFRS reporting, we also present our results on an underlying basis to show the performance of the business before Non-Underlying Items. These items

are detailed in note 3 and principally comprise: amortisation of acquired intangibles and other acquisition-related costs; impairment of assets; business restructuring

and change-related costs; profit on sale of property, plant and equipment; ERP system development; and insurance proceeds. These underlying measures, along with

other alternative financial measures including debt and cash flow metrics, form the Group’s Alternative Performance Measures (‘APMs’) that are used internally by

management as key measures to assess performance. Further explanation in relation to these measures can be found in the glossary of APMs.

14

KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

202520242023

(6.7)

(4.7)

2.5

202520242023

(102.0)

(31.2)

9.6

202520242023

(25.4)

(13.2)

7.6

D E F

Underlying

2

operating

profit /(loss) margin (%)

APM

Statutory basic earnings/(loss)

per share (‘EPS’) (p)

Underlying return on capital

employed (‘ROCE’) (%)

APM

Measurement

Measured as a percentage of

revenue.

Why it’s important and relevant

Shows the effectiveness of

sustainable operating profit

generation from revenue.

Underlying² is used to show

the underlying performance

of the business prior to non-

underlying items.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Existing strategy of maximising

sales, complemented by the

Transformation Plan to simplify our

customer offer, together with the

operating efficiencies described

in KPI 3.

Link to Strategy

1

2 4

Measurement

Profit after tax divided by average

basic weighted number of shares.

Why it’s important and relevant

Shows the level of profit per share

attributable to shareholders.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

In line with statutory profit

performance.

Link to Strategy

1

2 4

Measurement

Measured as underlying²

operating profit as a percentage

capital employed.

Why it’s important and relevant

Demonstrates the relative level

of underlying profit generated by

the capital employed. Underlying²

is used to show the underlying

performance of the business

without non-underlying items.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Focus on efficient use of capital.

May be offset in the short term

by a period of upfront investment

and maturity, e.g. trade counter

roll-out.

Link to Strategy

5

For more information on our

strategy see pages 12 to 13

Key to strategic links

1

Reduce low-

margin revenue

2

Reduce

costs

5

Optimise

cash

3

Enhance

customer service

4

Simplify ranges and

consolidate supply base

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

15

202520242023

3.8

3.5

3.2

202520242023

84

81

86

202520242023

14

17

25

HG

I

Non-Financial KPIs

Inventory turn Employee retention (%) Reportable incidents

(‘RIDDOR Reports’)

Measurement

Annual ratio measured by

comparing underlying cost of

goods sold during the financial

period with the average annual

inventory level (using averaged

data points at 1 January, 30 June

and 31 December).

Why it’s important and relevant

A higher inventory turn is an

indicator of efficient revenue

generation, and more effective

utilisation of distribution centre

capacity.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Centralised buying and stock

control team, maintaining a

unified national product file.

Link to Strategy

5

Measurement

Retention measures the ability

to retain employees in the

current year compared with

previous years. It is measured

as a percentage of employees

retained in the Company between

1 January and 31 December.

*The figures have been restated

to exclude the impact of

redundancies.

Why it’s important and relevant

Shows the effectiveness of

colleague engagement initiatives.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Focus on people and culture,

including investing in people

through training and review of

rewards and benefits.

Link to Strategy

2 3

Measurement

Reporting of Injuries, Diseases

and Dangerous Occurrences

Regulations 2013 (‘RIDDORs’).

These regulations require

employers, the self-employed

and those in control of premises

to report specified workplace

incidents.

Why it’s important and relevant

By measuring reportable injuries,

it is possible to identify any

deficiencies in the Company’s

processes, allowing continuous

improvement in health and safety

standards.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Change in the National Safety

Team structure to deliver effective

support to the Group.

Link to Strategy

2 3

Key to strategic links

1

Reduce low-

margin revenue

2

Reduce

costs

5

Optimise

cash

3

Enhance

customer service

4

Simplify ranges and

consolidate supply base

16

KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS CONTINUED

202520242023

13

1414

202520242023

51

43

47

J K

Deliveries per

commercial vehicle

UK Scope 1 and 2 emission

reduction (%)

Measurement

Average deliveries per commercial

vehicle per day in area following

Transport Integration (delivery

consolidation) project. Prior to the

project, in 2019 it was 12.

Why it’s important and relevant

The Transport Integration

project results in more deliveries

per commercial vehicle, which

reduces the Company’s impact

on the environment through

a reduced number of vehicles

needed to serve local areas.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Transformation Plan simplifying

our network.

Link to Strategy

2

Measurement

Percentage reduction in UK Scope

1 and 2 emissions (tCO

2

e) against

a baseline year set at 2019 on a

location basis.

Why it’s important and relevant

Need to meet the reduction

pathway required to achieve

the interim target of a 46%

reduction by 2030, and reduce

the Company’s contribution to

climate change.

Initiatives and actions

for improvement

Actively engaged in transition

planning, with the main

decarbonisation actions currently

being pursued detailed in the

Sustainability Report on page 26.

Link to Strategy

1

2 3

For more information on our

strategy see pages 12 to 13

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

17

Acting in the interests of stakeholders is vital in delivering our purpose

The Board has responsibility for managing the business to promote its success, and having regard to how its

decisions and events impact its stakeholders, engaging with and supporting them appropriately.

Our Colleagues Our Customers Our Suppliers Our Shareholders

Relationship to Headlam

Colleagues are at the heart of our business, and are

our greatest asset. There are approximately 2,200

colleagues within the Headlam group within a variety of

departments, including warehousing, transport, sales, and

administration.

How we support

We continue to focus on making Headlam a great place

to work, and ensure colleagues share in the Group’s long-

term success.

How we engage

The CEO/Executive Chair, CFO, Executive Team, and

non-executive members of the Board all have frequent

interaction with colleagues, including site visits and both

formal and informal meetings and forums (inclusive of the

Employee Forum).

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

We launched a transformation plan in September 2024,

which we updated in November 2025, with the target

of returning the business to profitability in 2027. This has

had a significant impact on some of our colleagues. A

number of colleagues have left the business through

2024 and 2025, which we recognise has been difficult

and unsettling. We have carefully communicated and

engaged with our colleagues throughout.

We have made further investments in a strong health and

safety culture.

We conducted our third colleague engagement survey,

providing valuable insight into what is working well and

what can be done to better engage our colleagues.

Took the decision to again tier our cost-of-living increases

to ensure lowest-paid colleagues got the greatest

increase.

Relationship to Headlam

Imperative to our success and the growth of the

Company.

We have an extensive customer base across the

fragmented flooring market, with a renewed focus in

particular on independent retailers and contractors.

How we support

We provide our customers with a market-leading service

through the largest product range, in-depth knowledge

ecommerce and marketing support, and nationwide fast

delivery service.

We help our customers grow their businesses through

providing them with competitive advantages.

How we engage

Frequent interaction through sales representatives,

dedicated service teams, and communications channels.

Customer surveys, and feedback mechanisms. Focus

groups, including on new product launches.

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

As announced in November 2025 we made the decision

to refocus on the independent retailer and contractor

market. The trade counter network has been repositioned

to be collection points for our core customers, providing

unrivalled convenience.

Considerable investment and progress in optimising the

network to increase the level of service to all customers.

Relationship to Headlam

Key to ensuring we can supply the best product at a

competitive price in a timely manner to customers/end-

consumers.

We work with suppliers across the globe manufacturing

the broadest range of products, and give them a

highly effective route to market into the fragmented

customer base.

How we support

Helping and supporting manufacturers with selling their

products into our large and diverse trade customer base.

How we engage

Frequent visits to suppliers’ sites and premises. Annual

Supplier Conference held to share our insights and

strategy with them, and how we can more effectively

work together.

Sharing of sales data, and insight into customer and end-

consumer buying.

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

During the previous year we launched a transformation

plan to simplify the business and its processes. This makes

Headlam easier to do business with, which is beneficial for

our suppliers.

During 2025 we centralised the buying function, resulting

in central coordination of ranges and buying decisions.

This has been accompanied by a supplier sourcing

strategy to reduce the number of suppliers and give

more volume to a smaller number of suppliers, to bring

efficiencies to the suppliers and to Headlam.

Continued to work closely on sharing data, and ensuring

an efficient and ethical supply chain.

Relationship to Headlam

The owners of the Company. It is important that the

Board is aware of and solicits their views, and then

evaluates these views in relation to the strategic and

corporate objectives of the Company.

Key joint focus on the long-term success and

sustainability of the Company.

How we support

Focus on delivering a long-term sustainable business that

operates with the highest level of governance.

How we engage

Frequent regulatory announcements with appropriate

levels of disclosure.

In-person presentations and meetings, including offering

meetings at the Company’s sites. Use of webinars and

recordings to allow all shareholders to hear and view

materials.

Solicitation and consideration of feedback, including on

strategy and its oversight.

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

The views of stakeholders, including shareholders were

considered as we shaped and implemented both our

existing strategic priorities and the transformation plan.

Efficiency and mitigating actions to help support

margins and better align costs with the weak market

backdrop. Ongoing scrutiny of operational performance,

efficiencies, and the cost base.

The Board carefully considered the impact on

shareholders of a cessation in the dividend whilst the

transformation plan is executed.

18

STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT

Our Colleagues Our Customers Our Suppliers Our Shareholders

Relationship to Headlam

Colleagues are at the heart of our business, and are

our greatest asset. There are approximately 2,200

colleagues within the Headlam group within a variety of

departments, including warehousing, transport, sales, and

administration.

How we support

We continue to focus on making Headlam a great place

to work, and ensure colleagues share in the Group’s long-

term success.

How we engage

The CEO/Executive Chair, CFO, Executive Team, and

non-executive members of the Board all have frequent

interaction with colleagues, including site visits and both

formal and informal meetings and forums (inclusive of the

Employee Forum).

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

We launched a transformation plan in September 2024,

which we updated in November 2025, with the target

of returning the business to profitability in 2027. This has

had a significant impact on some of our colleagues. A

number of colleagues have left the business through

2024 and 2025, which we recognise has been difficult

and unsettling. We have carefully communicated and

engaged with our colleagues throughout.

We have made further investments in a strong health and

safety culture.

We conducted our third colleague engagement survey,

providing valuable insight into what is working well and

what can be done to better engage our colleagues.

Took the decision to again tier our cost-of-living increases

to ensure lowest-paid colleagues got the greatest

increase.

Relationship to Headlam

Imperative to our success and the growth of the

Company.

We have an extensive customer base across the

fragmented flooring market, with a renewed focus in

particular on independent retailers and contractors.

How we support

We provide our customers with a market-leading service

through the largest product range, in-depth knowledge

ecommerce and marketing support, and nationwide fast

delivery service.

We help our customers grow their businesses through

providing them with competitive advantages.

How we engage

Frequent interaction through sales representatives,

dedicated service teams, and communications channels.

Customer surveys, and feedback mechanisms. Focus

groups, including on new product launches.

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

As announced in November 2025 we made the decision

to refocus on the independent retailer and contractor

market. The trade counter network has been repositioned

to be collection points for our core customers, providing

unrivalled convenience.

Considerable investment and progress in optimising the

network to increase the level of service to all customers.

Relationship to Headlam

Key to ensuring we can supply the best product at a

competitive price in a timely manner to customers/end-

consumers.

We work with suppliers across the globe manufacturing

the broadest range of products, and give them a

highly effective route to market into the fragmented

customer base.

How we support

Helping and supporting manufacturers with selling their

products into our large and diverse trade customer base.

How we engage

Frequent visits to suppliers’ sites and premises. Annual

Supplier Conference held to share our insights and

strategy with them, and how we can more effectively

work together.

Sharing of sales data, and insight into customer and end-

consumer buying.

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

During the previous year we launched a transformation

plan to simplify the business and its processes. This makes

Headlam easier to do business with, which is beneficial for

our suppliers.

During 2025 we centralised the buying function, resulting

in central coordination of ranges and buying decisions.

This has been accompanied by a supplier sourcing

strategy to reduce the number of suppliers and give

more volume to a smaller number of suppliers, to bring

efficiencies to the suppliers and to Headlam.

Continued to work closely on sharing data, and ensuring

an efficient and ethical supply chain.

Relationship to Headlam

The owners of the Company. It is important that the

Board is aware of and solicits their views, and then

evaluates these views in relation to the strategic and

corporate objectives of the Company.

Key joint focus on the long-term success and

sustainability of the Company.

How we support

Focus on delivering a long-term sustainable business that

operates with the highest level of governance.

How we engage

Frequent regulatory announcements with appropriate

levels of disclosure.

In-person presentations and meetings, including offering

meetings at the Company’s sites. Use of webinars and

recordings to allow all shareholders to hear and view

materials.

Solicitation and consideration of feedback, including on

strategy and its oversight.

Effect on decision making, outcome, and benefits to

stakeholders

The views of stakeholders, including shareholders were

considered as we shaped and implemented both our

existing strategic priorities and the transformation plan.

Efficiency and mitigating actions to help support

margins and better align costs with the weak market

backdrop. Ongoing scrutiny of operational performance,

efficiencies, and the cost base.

The Board carefully considered the impact on

shareholders of a cessation in the dividend whilst the

transformation plan is executed.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

19

Acting in the interests of stakeholders is vital in delivering our purpose

The Board has responsibility for managing the business to promote its success, and having regard to how its

decisions and events impact its stakeholders, engaging with and supporting them appropriately.

Our Communities and the Environment

Relationship to Headlam

Key to supporting the success of the Company’s regional

and national businesses.

We actively recruit people from local communities,

so very important to the ongoing success of the

Company by attracting great people.

Minimising environmental impact is critical to managing

climate change, and the knock-on impact on communities.

How we support

Supporting communities through employment and

engagement activities, and also by reducing our impact

on the environment through out sustainability strategy.

How we engage

Engagement with colleagues to ensure aware of local

causes and events.

Actively advertise job vacancies through word of mouth

and locally.

Locally focused Communities Programme, which gives

colleagues the opportunity to both volunteer and donate

to projects and charities in their local community.

Effect on decision making, outcome and

benefits to stakeholders

Through engaging with our communities and other

stakeholders we identified a need for developing new

trained fitters; we subsequently implemented fitter

training programme, supported by our suppliers and also

by our customers, who will employ our trainees at the end

of their training programme.

The Directors of the Company are required by

Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 to act in a

way that promotes the success of the Company for

the benefit of stakeholders as a whole and in doing

so, they must also have regard to wider expectations

of responsible business behaviour, specifically:

• the likely consequences of any decision in the

long term;

• the interests of the Company’s people;

• the need to foster the Company’s business

relationships with suppliers, customers and others;

• the impact of the Company’s operations on the

community and the environment;

• the desirability of the Company maintaining

a reputation for high standards of business

conduct; and

• the need to act fairly between members of the

Company.

The Board understands the importance of

engagement with its key stakeholders as only in this

way can it truly understand their needs and concerns

to support its decision making, and the likely impact

of those decisions on each stakeholder group. The

Company uses a variety of methods to engage, both

formally and informally, believing that much can be

gained from personal interaction.

The Board acknowledges that situations may arise

where stakeholder groups have conflicting priorities of

achieving its strategic objectives and the long-term

sustainable success of the business.

Following consideration of the information contained

within Stakeholders and Engagement, and all

other activities and undertakings detailed in this

Annual Report, the Board considers it has fulfilled

its duty in respect of Section 172, both individually

and collectively, and that it has acted in the way it

considers would be most likely to promote the success

of the Company for the benefit of its members as a

whole (having regard to the stakeholders and matters

set out in s172(1) (a) to (f) of the Act) in the decisions

taken during the year ended 31 December 2025.

Stephen Bird,

Interim Executive Chair

Signed on behalf of the Board 25 March 2026

Our s.172 statement

20

STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT CONTINUED

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

21

Summary income statement

Underlying

2

result

2025

£m

Non-

Underlying

Items

2025

£m

Total

2025

£m

Re-presented

Underlying

2

result

2024

£m

Non-

Underlying

Items

2024

£m

Total

2024

£m

Revenue 498.7 – 498.7 525.7 – 525.7

Cost of sales (351.4) (3.6) (355.0) (369.7) (10.6) (380.3)

Gross profit 147.3 (3.6) 143.7 156.0 (10.6) 145.4

Operating costs (180.7) (26.5) (207.2) (180.9) 4.2 (176.7)

Operating loss (33.4) (30.1) (63.5) (24.9) (6.4) (31.3)

Net finance costs (6.1) – (6.1) (6.8) – (6.8)

Loss before tax (39.5) (30.1) (69.6) (31.7) (6.4) (38.1)

Tax 4.1 0.7 4.8 6.8 10.2 17.0

Loss from continuing operations (35.4) (29.4) (64.8) (24.9) 3.8 (21.1)

Loss from discontinued operations (4.4) (12.7) (17.1) (3.2) (0.7) (3.9)

Loss for the period (39.8) (42.1) (81.9) (28.1) 3.1 (25.0)

Revenue

Total revenue in the Period decreased by 4.6% on a same

working day basis to £498.7 million (2024: £525.7 million). This

excludes revenue in Continental Europe which has been

presented as a discontinued operation

1

.

UK

In the UK, we previously reported revenues through three main

sales channels: Regional Distribution, Trade Counters and

Larger Customers. Over the last 18 months, the simplification

of the Group, integration of sales teams, and the launch

of customer initiatives such as ‘order anywhere, collect

anywhere’, increased the crossover of revenues between

these sales channels, particularly Regional Distribution and

Trade Counters. This has been further accelerated through

the consolidation of the previously separate Trade Counters

business into the main sales organisation. These trade counter

sites now operate as collection points under the control of

our Regional Sales Managers for independent retailers and

contractors. Accordingly, we show UK revenue in total rather

than split into channels.

Overall revenue in the second half of the year was similar, on a

year-on-year basis, to the first half, but this actually reflected

a lower rate of decline in revenue from independent retailers

and contractors offset by lower growth in revenue from larger

customers.

Continental Europe

Revenue declined 0.8% in Continental Europe; the net

of growth in the Netherlands, reflecting new distribution

agreements for exclusive supply of certain branded ranges,

and decline in France due to ongoing market weakness. The

revenue performance in France improved in the second half

compared to the first six months, albeit remained in decline.

Gross Margin

Gross margin in the year was 29.5%, broadly unchanged

from the 29.7% achieved in the previous year. This reflected

the adverse impact of customer mix (with growth in lower-

margin larger customer sales) offset by early benefits from the

integrated supplier sourcing strategy and centralised buying

function.

Costs

Underlying operating costs of £180.7 million (2024:

£180.9 million) were flat year on year. Cost inflation has

remained elevated, albeit to a lower extent than previous

years, driven by the 6.7% increase in the national minimum

wage and the increase in employer’s National Insurance

contributions. In addition, the final stage of the roll out of

new trade counter collection points added c. £4.8 million

of additional operating costs. The cost inflation and trade

counter investment costs were all offset by benefits from the

transformation plan. These benefits accelerate in 2026 and,

at the same time, we expect cost inflation to be lower and

will also no longer have additional trade counter investment

costs, following the cessation of that rollout programme.

1

The results for the year ended 31 December 2024 have been re-presented to refer the presentation of the Continental European businesses as discontinued

(see note 25 for further information).

2

To supplement IFRS reporting, we also present our results on an underlying basis to show the performance of the business before Non-Underlying Items.

These items are detailed in note 3 and principally comprise: amortisation of acquired intangibles, impairment of assets, business restructuring and change-

related costs, profit on sale of property, ERP system development, and provision relating to legal claim.

22

FINANCIAL REVIEW

Underlying Profit/Loss

Underlying loss before tax of £39.5 million compared to a loss of £31.7 million in 2024. The table below breaks down the year-on-

year movement:

Underlying Loss

Before Tax

£m

2024 (31.7)

Revenue (7.7)

Trade Counter investment (2.3)

Cost inflation (4.7)

Mitigating actions 6.2

Interest costs 0.7

2025 (39.5)

The decline in revenue contributed to a £7.7 million reduction in profit year-on-year.

The roll out of new trade counter collection points contributed to a £2.3 million reduction in profit, reflecting the net of additional

operating costs partially offset by the incremental revenue from new sites.

Cost inflation was a £4.7 million headwind reflecting the factors explained above. This cost inflation impact was lower than the

previous two years (2024: £7.6 million; 2023: £10.2 million) reflecting an easing in inflationary pressure. Mitigating actions, through

the implementation of the transformation plan, provided £6.2 million of benefit in the year through cost saving initiatives.

Net interest costs of £6.1 million (2024: £6.8 million) were slightly lower year-on-year, partly reflecting lower average borrowings,

offset by the interest component of the incremental lease cost of trade counter collection points and distribution centres.

Non-Underlying Items

Non-underlying items before tax in the year, relating to continuing operations, totalled a £30.1 million expense (2024: £6.4 million

expense) as set out in the table below. The net cash impact of these non-underlying items in 2025 was a £4.2 million cash

outflow.

2025

Cash

£m

2025

Non-cash

£m

2025

Total

£m

2024

Total

£m

Amortisation of intangibles – (1.1) (1.1) (1.2)

Impairment of assets – (4.8) (4.8) (4.0)

Business restructuring and change-related costs (19.8) (3.4) (23.2) (19.7)

Profit on sale of property 21.2 (15.0) 6.2 21.1

ERP system development (5.6) – (5.6) (2.6)

Provision relating to legal claim – (1.6) (1.6) –

Non-underlying income/(expense) before tax (4.2) (25.9) (30.1) (6.4)

Consistent with previous periods, the amortisation of acquired intangibles arising upon consolidation were categorised as non-

underlying and amounted to £1.1 million (2024: £1.2 million).

Impairment of assets was a £4.8 million (2024: £4.0 million) non-cash expense and relates to the impairment of goodwill and

other intangible assets associated with Melrose cash generating unit.

Business restructuring and change-related costs are in respect of the transformation plan. The cash items principally comprised

severance, recruitment, retention and other people-related costs; the one-off cost of investment in new point-of-sale materials

to accompany the Mercado consolidation; and advisory costs. The non-cash expense of £3.4 million principally relates to stock

provisions, reflecting the write-down of legacy stock holdings in preparation for network optimisation initiatives and the range

rationalisation activities undertaken following the centralisation of the buying function.

The cost of developing the new ERP system is expensed rather than capitalised due to it being a cloud-based solution and, as

previously guided, the development cost is being treated as a non-underlying expense, of which £5.6 million was incurred in the

year (2024: £2.6 million). At the end of the year, the decision was taken to temporarily pause the ERP replacement programme

whilst the business focuses on the transformation plan.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

23

A £1.6m provision has been recorded in respect of a health

and safety offence relating to an accident at one of the

Group’s sites in 2022.

EPS and Dividend

Total basic loss per share on an underlying basis was a loss

of 44.1 pence per share (2024: a loss of 31.0 pence per share),

reflecting the factors set out above.

No interim or final ordinary dividend has been declared in

respect of the current or prior year. Whilst we have opted not

to declare a dividend, our long-term commitment remains

focused on delivering shareholder value. The Board will

continue to review how the business is performing, taking

into account the market conditions and the implementation

of the transformation plan, in assessing when it may be

appropriate to reinstate dividend payments.

Tax

The Group’s consolidated underlying effective tax rate for

continuing operation for the Period was 10.4% (2024: 21.5%).

This is lower than the standard rate of corporation tax in the

UK primarily due to the partial recognition of a deferred tax

assets relating to losses.

Cash Flow and Net Debt

2025

£m

2024

£m

Underlying operating loss (33.4) (24.9)

Depreciation and amortisation 20.9 19.9

EBITDA (12.5) (5.0)

Change in inventories 10.6 16.8

Change in receivables 16.9 2.0

Change in payables (34.3) 12.2

Other 0.7 1.0

Underlying Operating

Cash Flow (18.6) 27.0

Interest and Tax 1.4 (4.7)

Lease payments (15.8) (13.7)

Capital expenditure (4.4) (10.5)

Non-underlying items (4.2) 48.5

Dividends – (4.8)

Discontinued operations (0.8) (1.2)

Net cash flow before

movement in borrowings (42.4) 40.6

Movement in borrowings 59.0 (50.0)

Net cash flows 16.6 (9.4)

Underlying Operating Cash Flow in the year was an outflow

of £18.6 million compared to an inflow of £27.0 million in 2024.

The outflow in 2025 included a £10.8 million payment of VAT

in January, that had been collected on the property sales in

December 2024. Excluding this timing item, the Underlying

Operating Cash Flow in the year was an outflow of £7.8 million

(and the prior year would have been an inflow of £16.2 million),

which comprised of an EBITDA loss of £12.5 million, partially

offset by working capital and other inflows (after adjusting for

the £10.8 million VAT timing) of £4.7 million.

Inventories continue to be well-controlled and, in the latter

few months of the year and the first two months of 2026,

reduced significantly following the implementation of the

centralised buying and supply chain processes. The reduction

in inventory towards the end of the year was initially principally

offset within working capital by a reduction in payables; the

efficiencies in inventory levels turn into cash benefit as the

working capital cycles through and hence is more of a 2026

cash benefit. Inventories have continued to decline following

the year-end. Inventory turn improved from a year-round

average of 3.2x in 2023 to 3.5x in 2024 and again to 3.8x in

2025. In the last few months it has averaged over 4x. There

remains further opportunity here; we target at least 5.0x (and

this would remain below other flooring distributors).

Over the last two years the Group has averaged a net positive

working capital balance of over £70 million; this means that

the Group has had £70 million of cash tied up in funding

its working capital. As the Group streamlines its focus and

actively reduces low margin revenue, it will require (all else

equal) less working capital to be invested in the business.

This, combined with the further opportunity for inventory

efficiency, means that we anticipate a substantial working

capital inflow over 2026 and 2027.

A net £1.4 million cash was received in the year (2024:

£4.7 million outflow) in respect of interest and tax, reflecting a

refund of corporation tax payments on account made in 2024.

Lease payments were a £15.8 million cash outflow (2024:

£13.7 million); the increase reflects the additional trade

counter and distribution centre leases. Capital expenditure

was £4.4 million (2024: £10.5 million) and included £1.8 million

for fitting out new or refurbished trade counters.

There was a £4.2 million outflow (2024: £48.5 million inflow)

in respect of non-underlying items, comprising £19.8 million

business restructuring and change-related costs, and

£5.6 million ERP system development costs, partially offset by

£21.2 million proceeds from property disposal.

24

FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED

Net Debt excluding lease liabilities was £31.4 million at the

end of the year. This compares to Net Cash of £10.9 million at

31 December 2024. The prior year Net Cash position included

a temporary timing difference on property VAT; £10.8 million

of VAT was collected on property sales in December 2024 and

paid over to HMRC in January 2025. Excluding this, the prior

year position was Net Cash of £0.1 million. The movement

since this normalised Net Cash position of £0.1 million to the

Net Debt of £31.4 million at the end of 2025 principally reflects

the EBITDA loss of £12.5 million, lease payments of £15.8 million,

capital expenditure of £4.4 million and non-underlying items

of £4.2 million.

At the end of the year, the Group had total banking facilities

available of £72.5 million (31 December 2024: £100.4 million),

of which £61.0 million (31 December 2024: £81.5 million) was

committed. The committed facility comprised a revolving

credit facility (‘RCF’) with three lenders that was due to expire

in October 2027. In January 2026 this facility was replaced with

an asset-based lending facility (‘ABL’) of up to £85.0 million.

This also replaced a £7.5 million uncommitted overdraft.

The available amount of the ABL depends on the amount

of relevant assets (property, receivables and inventory)

against which the Group can borrow and is also subject to a

requirement to hold a minimum amount of headroom on the

facility, by way of a liquidity headroom covenant.

The RCF was subject to covenants on liquidity headroom and

quarterly EBITDA. All such covenants were met during the

year. The ABL also has covenants on liquidity headroom and

quarterly EBITDA, as well as operational covenants such as

inventory days and debtor days.

The Group continues to have strong asset backing; as at

31 December 2025, the Group owned UK property with a market

valuation of £75 million. Three of those properties are currently

under offer, with sale processes expected to complete in the

coming months. We anticipate further properties will become

surplus to requirements over the next 18 months.

Principal risks and uncertainties

The Group is exposed to a number of principal risks which

may affect its business model, future performance, solvency

or liquidity. The group has a well-established framework for

reviewing and assessing these risks on a regular basis; and has

put in place appropriate processes, procedures and actions

to mitigate them. However, no system of control or series of

mitigations can completely eliminate all risks. The principal

risks and uncertainties that may affect the group were last

reported on within the 2024 Annual Report and Accounts

and have been considered and updated for the 2025 Annual

Report and Accounts.

No new principal risks have been identified. The risk ratings of

a number of the principal risks have been amended slightly;

however, the scope of the principal risks remain broadly

unchanged since last reported.

Adam Phillips

Chief Financial Officer

25 March 2026

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

25

Sustainable by design

As we execute our refocused strategy, ESG remains a

fundamental enabler of long-term value creation and

resilience across our business. It is embedded in our

operating model and will become a key differentiator of

our proposition for customers over the medium term.

A clear demonstration of this approach is the successful

take-back trial completed at our Northampton

site. The trial has delivered actionable insight into

expected material volumes, operating economics,

and the most effective partnership model with our

waste management provider. Importantly, it has also

confirmed the commercial and service value this

offering creates for our customers.

In 2025, we extended the trial and we are now

evaluating what a full scale nationwide take-back

scheme across our Trade Counter network would

look like.

This initiative supports our strategic priorities by

strengthening customer loyalty, enhancing sustainability

credentials, and creating a scalable platform that

improves recycling accessibility for our most valued

independent customers.

We have also partnered with a number of key suppliers

to launch our Trainee Flooring Fitter programme. This

six-month training programme addresses structural skills

shortages within the industry, supports long-term sector

sustainability, and reinforces our differentiated value

proposition to independent customers. As our refocused

strategy prioritises share growth in this segment,

developing industry capability will remain a strategic

priority.

As outlined in this report, we have delivered further

progress across our ESG agenda during the year. This

includes deeper engagement with our supply base

through our annual supplier conference, enhancements

to waste management processes, a 10% decrease in

colleague engagement, strengthened development

pathways, and continued improvements to our

governance and control framework. We believe these

outcomes reflect disciplined execution and confirm that

ESG is fully integrated into our refocused strategy that

will return the business to profitability and ensure that

our independent flooring retailers and contractors are

at the heart of our business.

Environmental

E

Priorities

a. Product design

b. Service design

c. Building design

Why we have chosen them

a. To deliver our long-term circularity ambition, we are acting

now to engineer products with increased recycled content

and improved end-of-life recyclability, reducing future

regulatory risk and supporting sustainable margin delivery.

b. Scaling a national take-back scheme strengthens our

customer proposition, drives loyalty among independent

customers, and provides a practical pathway to increased

material recovery and waste reduction.

c. As we reduce our footprint, we will embed energy efficiency

and low-carbon design standards from the outset into

any new or relocated sites, supporting cost efficiency and

disciplined carbon reduction.

Progress made

a. Strengthened supplier collaboration through joint product

development plans, whilst actively contributing via Carpets

Recycling UK to the development of an industry-wide

Sustainability Pledge - supporting innovation, resilience, and

improved ESG standards across the value chain.

b. Successfully extended a take-back trial across four Trade

Counters, validating operational feasibility, customer

demand, and the potential to scale this capability across the

network.

c. Embedded environmental considerations into site

development, with facilities planners fully integrated

into the process to address waste management, energy

efficiency, biodiversity, and broader environmental

performance from the design stage.

Outlook

a. Upskill the central buying team, under the leadership of

the Chief Buying Officer, continue to embed sustainability

into product development decisions and accelerate the

delivery of more sustainable, commercially viable ranges.

b. Evaluate the trial of the Take Back scheme, building on

proven success to test scalability, operational consistency,

and customer adoption ahead of wider roll out.

c. Partner with operations and property teams to develop a

standardised building blueprint, optimising sustainability

performance across energy efficiency, carbon reduction,

and whole-life cost as the estate expands.

26

SUSTAINABILITY AT HEADLAM

Social

S

Priorities

a. Engagement plans to create the right environment to

attract and retain the best colleagues.

b. We want to attract and retain colleagues with the right

skills, behaviours and expertise. We truly believe that

engaged and motivated colleagues provide the best

service and apply their knowledge and expertise to their

fullest.

Progress made

a. We have launched a new set of behaviours to support the

success of our colleagues and Headlam overall to better

navigate the changes in the market and those we have

internally. There will be a culture programme launched

through leaders in the Leadership population during 2026.

b. We are continually reviewing our benefits to remain

competitive and an attractive place to work.

Governance

G

Priorities

a. Buying process review (supplier and product selection).

b. Systems and reporting requirements.

Why we have chosen them

a. Fully centralised UK Distribution buying and supply chain

teams now enable consistent, group-wide processes

and improved governance. The establishment of Scope 3

emissions targets provides a clear framework for focused

planning, supplier engagement, and measurable progress.

b. The ERP implementation programme, whilst temporarily

paused, creates an opportunity to rationalise systems and

embed improved ESG data capture and reporting across

the business, strengthening decision-making, transparency,

and long-term control.

Progress made

a. ESG standards and assurance requirements are embedded

within the new product introduction process for own-

brand products, ensuring sustainability considerations are

integrated at the point of design. Scope 3 emissions targets

have been formally set and agreed, providing a clear

framework for delivery and accountability.

b. The ESG Director has actively contributed to ERP

requirements workshops, ensuring ESG data, controls,

and reporting needs are incorporated into system design,

supporting future compliance, transparency, and decision

making.

Outlook

a. Defined Scope 3 action plans in 2025, providing a

structured pathway to delivery, whilst continuing to

educate buying and supply teams on responsible sourcing

best practice to support measurable emissions reduction

across the value chain.

b. Review and enhancement of ESG data and reporting

capabilities to deliver a harmonised ESG dashboard and

clearly define requirements for integration into the new

ERP programme, strengthening transparency, consistency,

and management oversight.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

27

Environmental

E

We remain committed to protecting the planet and have

set a clear ambition to achieve net zero emissions by 2040.

Our strategy is focused on designing products that can be

renewed, repurposed, and readily recycled, enabling greater

reuse within the products we supply.

In parallel, we are building a more

circular supply chain and taking

greater responsibility for the recovery

of materials placed onto the market.

This approach supports regulatory

readiness, improves resource efficiency,

and underpins sustainable long-term

value creation.

Reducing our

Carbon Emissions

Throughout 2025, we will continue

to deliver against our carbon

reduction roadmap and advance

the implementation of our Scope

3 strategy. The Company follows a

‘true’ Net Zero approach, prioritising

real decarbonisation with offsetting

applied only to residual emissions

of approximately 10%. Our targets

are science based, with Scope 1 and

2 aligned to Scope 3 timelines, and

measured against consistent baselines

- Scope 1 and 2 versus 2019, and Scope

3 versus 2023.

Key focus areas for 2025 included

sustainable product development,

improving efficiencies in our

non-commercial fleet, and promoting

energy-conscious behaviours across

our workforce, ensuring measurable

progress toward our long-term Net

Zero ambitions.

Transport Efficiencies

In 2023, we implemented Webfleet, a

vehicle telematics system, to enhance

driver safety, operational efficiency,

and fuel performance. In 2025 we have

achieved a further 39% reduction in

heavy braking events.

Energy Intensity

In 2024, we completed solar panel

installations across 12 distribution

centres, which continue to contribute

towards each site’s energy needs.

We remain committed to investing in

renewable solutions and identifying

further opportunities to improve energy

efficiency and cost performance.

Key achievements

in 2025

• Aligned and formally set

Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions

targets, with a clear ambition

to achieve net zero by 2040,

providing a consistent and

accountable decarbonisation

pathway.

• Delivered a 51% reduction

in Scope 1 and 2 emissions

against a 2019 baseline,

demonstrating tangible

progress and disciplined

execution.

• Implemented comprehensive

waste monitoring and

reporting across all major

distribution centres,

strengthening data quality,

oversight, and operational

control.

• Extended our recycling centres

service in our trade counter

collection points, enhancing

the customer proposition

whilst supporting circularity

ambitions.

• Gave our first ESG Initiative of

the year award to one of our

key strategic suppliers at our

annual supplier conference.

• Established partnerships with

waste management providers

and recyclers to ensure end-

of-life materials are recovered

and regenerated, reducing

landfill dependency and

supporting resource efficiency.

• Maintained ISO 14001

certification across our

national distribution centres,

reinforcing environmental

management standards and

external assurance.

28

SUSTAINABILITY AT HEADLAM CONTINUED

Net Zero Emissions Timeline

Key Achievements and Targets

2023

• Solar panels installed across 11 sites.

• ISO 14001 environmental certification at key sites.

• Over 85% of UK non-commercial fleet electric/low emission.

• Good Energy and Recycling Behaviours workshops held at 11

largest sites.

• Continued trial of low emission commercial vehicles.

• Transport integration completed.

2024

• Final solar panel installation, taking the total to 12 sites.

• Telematics used to improve driver behaviour and reduce emissions.

• Reviewed waste management across UK distribution sites.

• Scope 3 strategy and targets developed.

• Continued trial of low emission commercial fleet vehicles.

• Trial of Trade Counter take-back and recycling scheme in

Northampton.

• Launched EV salary sacrifice scheme.

2025

• Assessment of the take-back recycling scheme trial.

• Scope 3 targets implemented.

• Carbon workshops commenced with buying team;

further planned throughout 2025.

2030

• Interim target: 46% reduction against 2019 baseline (Scope 1 & 2).

• Roll-out of low carbon commercial vehicles.

• Potential heating electrification to reduce gas consumption.

2032

• Interim target of 42% reduction of Scope 3 emissions against

2023 baseline

2040

• Net Zero emissions target (Scope 1, 2 and 3).

UK and Continental Europe

Scope 1 and 2 emissions

2025 Full Year Data

94%

6%

Scope 1: 94% (13.0ktCO

2

e)

Scope 2: 6% (0.9ktCO

2

e)

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

29

Sustainable

by design

Sales

Takeback/

Recovery

Distribution

Material

Processing

Manufacturing

Recycled

material

Environmental

E

Scope 3 Emissions

2025 Full Year Data

Purchased goods

80.5% (628,655 tCO

2

e)

Capital goods

0.6% (4,616 tCO

2

e)

Fuel-related

0.4% (3,427 tCO

2

e)

Upstream transportation

0.4% (3,398tCO

2

e)

Waste generated

0.1% (958 tCO

2

e)

Business travel

0.1% (336 tCO

2

e)

Employee commuting

0.3% (2,179 tCO

2

e)

End of life treatment

15.8% (123,835 tCO

2

e)

Total Scope 1, 2 and 3

Emissions: 815,119 tCO

2

e

2025 Full Year Data

Scope 1

1.7% (12,967 tCO

2

e)

Scope 2 (location-based)

0.1% (947 tCO

2

e)

Scope 3

98.2% (767,404 tCO

2

e)

In 2025, we continued to evaluate sustainability across the full

product lifecycle through our Sustainable by Design programme.

We have invested in take-back

trials, providing end-of-life product

management and ensuring recovered

materials are returned to raw material

form for reuse through partnerships with

recyclers and manufacturers.

Our Florprotec brand continues to

offer a collection service for end-of-life

products, with materials reintegrated

into new products. Additionally, we

collaborate with leading UK and

European manufacturers to design

broadloom and vinyl ranges that are

easily recyclable, reducing reliance on

specialist recyclers and improving the

quality of recycled materials.

Take-back Scheme

The take-back and recycling

trial, launched in May 2024 at the

Northampton Trade Counter, continued

through 2025. Customers can return

post-consumer and post-industrial

flooring, underlay, vinyl, LVT, laminate,

packaging, and general waste. The

service remains free during the trial,

encouraging adoption and providing

valuable insights to support potential

national roll out.

Sustainable product development

30

SUSTAINABILITY AT HEADLAM CONTINUED

Partnerships

• Biffa: collects, sorts, and recycles

flooring by material type.

• Recofloor: facilitates vinyl and LVT

collection on behalf of Polyfloor

and Altro.

Water

We are a low water-use business,

primarily for cleaning vehicles, and

continue to minimise usage wherever

possible.

Waste

In 2026, we aim to maintain or improve

our operational waste diversion from

landfill, with waste recycled from UK

Distribution Centres. Recycling bins are

provided at all major centres, and stock

repurposing continues through Melrose

Interiors. Packaging is recovered

wherever possible and recycled when

reuse is not feasible, supporting

both sustainability and operational

efficiency.

Raw Materials

We prioritise renewable materials

wherever possible, particularly within

our flagship Crucial Trading brand. All

timber is sourced from verified, legal

suppliers with fully traceable supply

chains via Track Record Global. Where

non-renewable materials are used,

recycled content is incorporated

wherever feasible, and products are

designed for end-of-life recyclability,

supporting circularity and sustainable

value creation.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

31

Making Headlam a great place to work with a

positive impact on communities.

Our Colleagues

Across the UK, France, and the

Netherlands, Headlam Group PLC

employed approximately 2,200 people

on average in 2025. Colleagues remain

at the heart of our business and are our

greatest asset. We continually focus

on making Headlam a great place to

work and ensure colleagues share in the

Group’s long-term success.

Whether colleagues work in warehouses,

transport, sales and trade counters,

support offices, or corporate functions,

a range of working arrangements

are available to attract and retain

colleagues who live our values:

We avoid

overcomplication by

keeping things simple

We create a trusted

environment where

people are empowered

to act and can learn

and improve

We uphold high standards

and confidently challenge

wrong behaviours

We create an inclusive

environment where

people celebrate

success together

We ensure that every

individual feels valued,

supported and safe

And always, do the right thing

The behaviours underpin and

demonstrate our commitment to

integrity. Our Colleague Code of

Ethics, The Headlam Way, covers

topics including safety, behaviours

towards each other, conflicts of interest,

sustainability, bribery and corruption,

fair competition, confidentiality, and

more. It complements our Speak

Up policy, enabling colleagues to

confidentially raise concerns directly

to the Audit Committee Chair. All new

colleagues familiarise themselves with

these policies during online induction,

and updates are communicated

through monthly leadership calls and

manager briefings.

In the UK, Headlam employs salaried

colleagues exclusively, with no zero-hour

contracts. Colleagues are entitled to

employment benefits from day one,

including company sick pay and the

right to request flexible working. Just

over 5% of colleagues currently have

flexible working arrangements. In 2025,

most colleagues remain permanent,

with temporary workers averaging

approximately 6% of the workforce,

primarily in operation to manage peaks,

cover long-term absences, or support

business change.

We continue to showcase career

opportunities through internal

communications, highlighting

colleagues who have progressed

through the business. This, coupled with

colleagues’ commitment to supporting

customers and each other, contributes

to Headlam’s strong tenure.

Social

S

Key achievements

in 2025

• Colleague Engagement

dropped by 10ptts, however

2025 has been a significant

year of changes and only

remains 11ptts behind the

industry benchmark.

• Reduction in RIDDORs by 29%

year on year.

• Safety culture training roll out

continues.

• Gender pay gap reduced year

on year.

• Strategic approach to

community support continued

in Leeds through the Trainee

Fitter programme, helping

bridge the skills gap in

the industry and improve

employability in the area.

32

SUSTAINABILITY AT HEADLAM CONTINUED

Length of Service

0-3 mths

1.75%

5+ yrs

47.27%

2-5 yrs

23.39%

4 mths-2 yrs

27.59%

Our long-serving colleagues, with their in-depth knowledge

of customers, services, products, processes, and systems,

remain a foundation of our success. We focus on retention

through Reward, Learning and Development and Colleague

Engagement. Uncontrolled labour turnover, along with

attendance and engagement, are key People KPIs, with

actions implemented throughout 2025 to improve all three.

We also target recruitment to diversify skills and experience,

bringing in expertise from other industries, talent banking

core skills, and working with recruitment partners to provide

candidates with clear insights into opportunities at Headlam.

Improving attraction and selection methods remains a priority

in 2026.

Keeping Each Other Safe

and Well, Every Day

2025 was a very productive year for the National Safety

Team. Over a period of nine months a new Safety Platform

was delivered to 98 sites in the group. This was met with

overwhelming success with over 35,000 inspections

completed on the new system. This has seen a significant

increase in engagement with all employees using the platform

and allowed the National Safety Team to focus on any

concerns identified through the analytical reports generated

once the platform was populated.

We have now significant increase in reporting Near Misses and

reduced LTIs by over 50% throughout the Network.

We have maintained our ISO 45001 accreditation after

external audits of 6 sites.

The RIDDOR incident frequency rate per 1,000,000

hours worked was 3.98 in 2025, compared to the HSE

recommendation of 3.77.

Type of RIDDOR

Incident 2024 2025

Slip, trips, and fall 2 4

Struck by moving vehicle 3 2

Contact with machinery 2 0

Hit by moving/falling,

flying object

1 0

Handling, lifting,

carrying 4 3

Fall from height 3 2

Other 2 3

Total 17 14

Supporting Colleagues Through Change

There continued to be several changes across the business in

2025 as part of the acceleration of our plans to turnaround

Headlam.

In 2025 our cost challenges remained and from opportunities

identified, we re-established a better year end position on

headcount and 130 colleagues left the business through

redundancy. Our continued review of footprint, efficiency

and effectiveness will result in ongoing re-design to create a

stable position for reset and growth.

We have adopted a way of working that includes a Top 30

cohort of Leaders to manage change and challenge what we

do here at Headlam.

Colleague Engagement

We conducted our first colleague engagement survey in 2023.

We maintained the engagement score in 2024 and in 2025 it

reduced 10ppts, reflecting the intense change occurring in the

business.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

33

Learning and Development

Our learning management system, Eloomi provides colleagues

with access to over 600 elearning modules, the ability to book

on to face-to-face training, the creation of playlists, reporting

capability and a user-friendly way to develop bespoke

elearning content. Since launching the platform over 1,300

colleagues have used it to access learning,

We also started to deliver our new leadership programme,

Lead the Way, consisting of two levels of leadership

development delivered face to face. Feedback from

managers was positive across all modules and in our

engagement survey 89% of our managers said that they know

what is expected of them to manage their direct reports

well, which was an improvement of 3ppts year on year. More

importantly we saw a strong score of 86% on the leadership

question ‘My Manager and I have a good working relationship’.

Managers and leaders continued to benefit from Health &

Safety training throughout the year with DSS+ delivering Felt

Leadership training for our senior leaders which covers the

importance of creating a Safety culture, and See it, Say it

training for our management teams.

We invested in training for our sales teams by providing our

Area Sales Managers (‘ASMs’) with Driving Sales Growth

training, a programme designed to help them to hone their

selling skills. Our Regional Sales Managers attended Delivering

Sales Performance to help their ASMs embed their training,

provide guidance on field observation and feedback and

to support their coaching skills for 121s, appraisals and team

meetings.

As part of the acceleration of our strategy through the

implementation of our sales transformation and network

rationalisation we provided impacted leaders with training to

help them to lead through the change process. This not only

explored their potential reactions to change but also how

their teams may react and the support they can provide to

help colleagues to adapt.

To complement our existing Driver, Warehouse and Supervisor

and Manager apprenticeships we successfully launched our

first bespoke Headlam apprenticeship for our Trade Counter

teams, Sales through Service, a level 2 Customer Service

Apprenticeship. This provides our Trade Counter Assistants

with an opportunity to further develop their skills to support

their career development ambitions. To help bring careers at

Headlam to life for all our colleagues we have commenced

a series of articles on our internal communication channel,

myHub, highlighting career stories of a selection of colleagues

as well as ‘Day In The Life Of’ articles.

Reward

In 2025, we implemented the Real Living Wage increase to

£12.60 for all colleagues, reinforcing our commitment to fair

and competitive pay across the business. This ensure that all

roles within the organisation meet or exceed the updated Real

Living Wage benchmark, supporting our objective to remain

an employer of choice within the industry.

Building on the benchmarking process introduced in 2024, we

applied a robust pay review methodology during the January

2025 cycle to ensure equal pay across all roles. This process

ensured that no colleague fell below 20% of the median pay

for their specific job role, supporting pay consistency, reducing

risk of pay inequity, and aligning with our principles of fairness

and transparency.

Additionally, we introduced a holiday purchase scheme in

2025, providing colleagues with greater flexibility in managing

their work-life balance. Engagement with the scheme was

strong, with 272 colleagues participating in its first year.

Together, these initiatives demonstrate our ongoing focus on

delivering a fair, transparent, and competitive reward offering

that supports our retention and engagement objectives,

whilst aligning with our values and people strategy.

Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion

We know that diversity brings fresh ideas, different ways of

thinking and better represents the huge array of customers

we support and so we remain committed to attracting and

retaining a diverse workforce by creating an inclusive place

to work.

Diversity in gender

Women represent 26.4% of Headlam’s overall workforce,

an increase of 2.4% from last year. During 2025, 33% of the

Executive Committee were female, and women make up

27.3% of our management population, within an industry

that is overwhelmingly male dominated. We continue to take

proactive steps to improve gender diversity by working closely

with out recruitment agencies to ensure balanced longlists,

encouraging women to apply for internal opportunities, and

supporting their development by providing access to learning

and progression pathways. We also actively showcase the

successful careers that women can and do have within

Headlam.

Through these initiatives, we aim to continue growing the

number of women across all levels of the business. For further

information on the actions, we have taken and continue to

take to support gender diversity, please refer to our Gender

Pay Gap Report. This reports a Headlam UK mean gender

pay gap of -7.5% and a median gender pay gap of -9.2%,

available on our corporate website.

Social

S

34

SUSTAINABILITY AT HEADLAM CONTINUED

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

35

Governance

G

Commitment to ESG and

Workplace Excellence

Annual targets were set to drive continuous improvement,

and governance was embedded across our ways of working,

including reporting, standard meetings, and leadership

oversight.

Colleagues were supported to understand expectations

through:

• The Colleague Code of Ethics, workplace policies, and

standard operating procedures

• Monthly leadership briefings, management

communications, team meetings, and toolbox talks

• Objective-setting and check-ins to review progress

Formal oversight included:

• Board meetings

• Executive Performance Reviews

• Commercial Performance Reviews

• Audit and ESG Committee meetings

ESG Committee

The ESG Committee provides oversight of Headlam’s ESG

strategy and is chaired by the CEO. Members include a Non-

Executive Director, the Chief People Officer, the Chief Buying

Officer, and senior leaders.

In 2025, the Committee met three times, reviewing:

• Health & Safety, decarbonisation, and waste

management

• Take-back scheme and sustainable product development

• Ethical sourcing audits and raw material traceability

• Fleet innovation, colleague inclusion, engagement, and

wellbeing

• Policy updates, regulatory horizon scanning, and

packaging

Executive Accountability

• ESG targets are incorporated into Annual Bonus Schemes

and the Performance Share Plan for Executive Directors

and Executive Team members.

• Progress is reported through the ESG Committee and

reviewed at monthly Executive Performance Review

meetings and Commercial Review Progress meetings.

Responsible Sourcing

Headlam maintains a robust responsible sourcing programme:

Supplier onboarding requires:

• Completion of a due diligence assessment

• Agreement to our Supplier Code of Conduct and

Sustainability Charter

• Any risks related to human rights, health & safety,

environment, or business ethics must be addressed before

awarding contracts.

• SEDEX membership ensures Headlam brand suppliers

undergo independent audits every two years using the

SMETA format.

• In 2026, we aim to strengthen circular supply chains,

increase material recovery, and implement innovative

environmental solutions.

• Timber sourcing remains critical:

– Domus continues FSC certification

– All suppliers must provide certified timber, ensuring no

deforestation or degradation

Quality and Supplier Management

• All Headlam-branded products must comply with UK and

EU regulations and meet agreed quality standards.

• Customer feedback is continually reviewed, and any

supplier or product that falls below the Acceptable Quality

Limits (‘AQL’) triggers an immediate quality review with

corrective action.

Operations

• Focus in 2025 was on delivering orders on time, in full, and

damage-free.

• Improvements were implemented in collaboration with the

customer support team, based on customer feedback.

Speak Up (Whistleblowing)

Headlam provides confidential mechanisms for colleagues

to raise concerns if Code of Ethics policies are not being

followed:

• Channels: Speak Up email or third-party confidential

reporting service

• Investigations are overseen by the Chief People Officer,

Company Secretary, Director of Group Finance, Head of

Internal Audit, and the Audit Chair

• Outcomes are reported to the Board

36

SUSTAINABILITY AT HEADLAM CONTINUED

Improved Colleague Support

Key improvements implemented in 2025:

• Embed usage of our new learning management system

(Eloomi)

• The launch of the Safety Culture system

Policies and Processes

The following ESG and People policies were updated in 2025

and are available on the corporate website:

• Attendance at work

Project and Programme Governance

In 2025 we had two major programmes running at the same

time:

• Transformation plan, to return the business to profit.

• ERP system implementation.

At the end of the year the decision was taken to pause the ERP

project in order to prioritise the transformation plan.

Both programmes had ESG oversight through:

• Steering committee membership by the Chief People and

Sustainability Officer

• ESG Director engagement through workshops and weekly

updates

• Opportunities to advance ESG initiatives via new buildings,

processes, reporting, and supplier/customer collaboration

Stakeholder Engagement

• Continued industry engagement through Carpets

Recycling UK, suppliers, and industry bodies

• Supplier conference (September 2025) showcased Take-

Back trial progress and recyclable product sourcing

• Regular supplier meetings to discuss product innovation

and Take-back initiatives

• Colleague engagement through:

– Employee Forums, ASM forums, and Quality

Improvement Forums

– Sharing best practices in Health & Safety,

engagement, and quality improvements

• Customer surveys indicated:

– Increased perception of Headlam as environmentally

responsible

– Top enquiries related to recycled materials, sustainable

products, and recyclability

• Shareholder reporting: Progress on sustainability is

included in the Annual Report and Accounts and

monitored by ESG rating agencies

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

37

The table below and continuing on pages 39 to 42 details the Group’s responses consistent with the TCFD recommendations

and pillars.

The Group has considered and taken into account the TCFD all-sector guidance and supplemental guidance for financial and

non-financial companies and believes it to be consistent with them.

This TCFD disclosure forms part of the Group’s overall Sustainability Report on pages 26 to 36. It should be read as part of the

full report which includes the Group’s key decarbonisation actions to reach Net Zero and reduce its contribution to climate

change, together with KPIs and targets to measure progress.

Governance Disclosure

The Board’s oversight of

climate-related risks and

opportunities

The Board has primary oversight and ultimate responsibility for ESG strategy and

performance, which includes the approach and actions in relation to climate-related

issues. ESG is considered regularly as part of the Board programme of business, with

ESG policy and strategy considered in depth on an annual basis. An Executive ESG

Committee assists the Board with the more detailed aspects of its ESG agenda and holds

management to account on the implementation of the ESG strategy approved by the

Board. The Committee’s terms of reference are publicly available on the Group’s website.

Whilst ultimate responsibility for risk governance sits with the Board, the Audit Committee

assists in risk oversight (as described within Risk Management on page 46. The Group’s

most material ESG issues are included in the Group’s Risk Register. During 2025, these

material issues were reported to the Audit Committee by the Executive Risk Committee

(detailed below) and discussed at each of their quarterly meetings, with management’s

approach to mitigating risk and capturing opportunity challenged appropriately.

Management’s role in

assessing and managing

climate-related risks and

opportunities

As above, the Group has an Executive ESG Committee, which, as part of its remit, focuses

on decarbonisation actions and reducing the Group’s contribution to climate change.

The ESG Committee reviews and tracks the outputs from major decarbonisation projects,

which may both mitigate climate risk and capture opportunities.

The Group also has an established Executive Risk Committee, which meets quarterly and

comprises the Chief Financial Officer, members of the Executive Team, senior managers

and heads of department (including from operations and finance). Its role is to review

identified risks, including the likelihood and potential impact of each risk, establishing and

monitoring the effectiveness of mitigating and opportunistic actions, and considering

emerging risk. The Group’s most material ESG issues per the Materiality Assessment Map

published on the Group’s website are included in the Group’s Risk Register, which forms the

basis for Committee discussions. Materiality for climate-related risks and opportunities

is assessed with reference to that used for mainstream reporting but also considers the

key risks being assessed by management to inform current and future strategy along with

internal feedback.

The organisation’s processes

for identifying and assessing

climate-related risks

The Group’s risk governance and management processes are detailed within Risk

Management on page 46 of the Annual Report and Accounts. Its preparation includes

a quantitative assessment of ESG risks, inclusive of climate-related, on the composite

bases of likelihood and potential impact of ‘raw’ risk. Risks considered include Transition

Risks, such as market, policy and legal (both existing and emerging), technology, and

reputation, and Physical Risks (both acute and chronic). This process has allowed the

Group to both identify climate-related risks and opportunities and determine their

relative significance to the business.

38

TASK FORCE ON CLIMATERELATED

FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES ‘TCFD’

Governance Disclosure

How processes for identifying,

assessing and managing

climate-related risks

are integrated into the

organisation’s overall risk

management

Climate-related risks are considered as part of the ESG Strategy and ‘Environmental’

Principal Risk and, therefore, integrated into the Group’s overall risk management process.

Additionally, through preparation of the Group’s annually reviewed and publicly disclosed

Environmental Policy and TCFD disclosure, the Group gives full consideration and

commentary on climate-related factors.

The climate-related risks and

opportunities the organisation

has identified over the short,

medium and long term

The impact of climate-related

risks and opportunities on the

organisation’s business(es),

strategy and financial

planning

The organisation’s processes

for managing climate-related

risks

The Group has identified its climate-related risks and opportunities, and assessed

strategy resilience, through quantitative scenario analysis. The range of possible risks

and opportunities were analysed under two future climate forecasts. Both Physical and

Transition Risks were considered, modelled around the widely recognised Representative

Concentration Pathways (‘RCPs’) and Shared Socio-economic Pathways (‘SSPs’). The

scenarios chosen were: global warming of 2ºC (RCP 3.4), considered the most likely

scenario; and global warming of 4ºC (RCP 8.5), considered a resilience scenario. Time

horizons have been chosen that best reflect the Group’s business plan, strategy, and

various financial accounting policies. The total time horizon considered is up to 2050,

split into short term (three years, 2026–2028), medium term (2029–2035) and long term

(2036–2050). The assumptions used in the scenario analysis, with reference to Extended

Producer Responsibility impact and the transition to a more sustainable fleet, are also

discussed in note 10 to the Financial Statements.

Factors Middle of the road Fossil-fuelled growth

RCP 3.4 8.5

SSP 2 5

Temperature rise 2ºC 4ºC

Likelihood High Moderate

Societal response Proactive, Disorderly Reactive

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

39

The quantitative assessment below considered the likelihood and estimated financial impact of each climate-related risk.

Average potential financial impact on

annual profit £m

Category Risk Key assumptions

Short term

(2026–2028)

Medium term

(2029–2035)

Long term

(2036–2050) Strategic response and resilience

Scenario 1 (Transition): Average global temperatures rising by 2ºC above pre-industrial levels by 2100

Policy and

Legal:

Financial

impact of

potential new

legislation/

regulation

(including

product

legislation)

Risk: Increased operating

costs through Extended

Producer Responsibility

(‘EPR’) for bulky

The EPR (bulky waste) legislation is assumed to come into effect in 2028-2029,

which essentially introduces an extra tax on the sale of residential floorcoverings

for companies considered to be manufacturer or first point of contact in the UK for

imported items. The rates used in the scenario modelling are best estimates, before

the legislation is enacted.

The scenario modelling assumes that the take-back scheme, currently in an

extended trial, is rolled out across the network and that the materials collected are

then transferred to recycling centres.

It is assumed that the take-back tonnages are at least the same level as the

materials sold by the Group which would attract the EPR fees. The net EPR fees are

therefore expected to be £nil.

It is assumed that the transport costs incurred in transferring the materials to the

recycling centres will be broadly offset by revenues generated from both the take-

back centres and recycling centres.

– –

– Collaborate with suppliers on new sustainable product launches.

Roll-out the take-back scheme to avoid materials entering into the waste

stream to offset EPR fees.

It is likely that any residual costs arising (either from take-back tonnages

not fully offsetting EPR fees or recycling revenues not offsetting transport

costs) could be passed on to customers, reducing the potential financial

impact to an immaterial amount.

Market:

Transitioning

to more

sustainable

business and

operating

practices

Risk: Increased costs of

operating a sustainable

fleet with low-carbon

technologies

The technology for zero-emission heavy goods vehicles (‘HGVs’) continues to be

developed. The total cost of ownership for a short-range zero-emission HGV fleet is

becoming more comparable to that of a diesel HGV fleet.

The Group is monitoring the developments in the powertrain and energy storage

technologies, which are leading to improvements in the range of zero-emission

HGVs.

There is a degree of uncertainty in the cost estimates for a zero-emission long-

range HGV fleet (as operated by the Group), including the investment required in

charging infrastructure.

It has been assumed, for this scenario modelling, that the cost of operating a zero-

emission HGV fleet is in line with that of operating a diesel fleet.

There is a large global market for HGVs, providing a commercial incentive for

companies to develop a viable, cost-effective zero-emission solution for long range

HGVs.

– – – Ongoing trials of zero-emission commercial vehicles.

Scenario 2 (Physical): Average global temperatures rising by 4ºC above pre-industrial levels by 2100

Acute: Asset

damage

Risk: Business interruption

and loss of revenue following

damage to distribution

network as a result of

extreme weather event;

consequential impairment

of assets and increased

insurance premiums

A weather event, likely to be a flooding event, is assumed to occur in the long term.

Only a small number of the geographically dispersed sites are considered to have

a high risk of flooding. There are no sites, which if affected, would give rise to a

material profit impact.

– – – The Group’s assets are not expected to be exposed to high physical

climate-related risk due to the geographies in which it operates.

Operations are disaggregated with business continuity plans in place if

specific sites are affected by isolated events.

Chronic

and Acute:

Supply chain

disruption

Risk: Potential raw material

shortages and knock-

on impact on product

availability from supply

chain disruption leading to

loss of revenue

The scenario modelling assumes there is no loss of revenue from this risk due to the

comprehensive inventory and homogeneous products held and sold by the Group.

– – – Market-leading position and strategic partnerships with suppliers should

enable the Group to preserve levels of availability.

Comprehensive inventory levels maintained at any one time providing

strong availability, also helped by the Group’s strategy to increase its

focus on holding and selling fast-moving lines.

40

TASK FORCE ON CLIMATERELATED

FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES

‘TCFD’ CONTINUED

The quantitative assessment below considered the likelihood and estimated financial impact of each climate-related risk.

Average potential financial impact on

annual profit £m

Category Risk Key assumptions

Short term

(2026–2028)

Medium term

(2029–2035)

Long term

(2036–2050) Strategic response and resilience

Scenario 1 (Transition): Average global temperatures rising by 2ºC above pre-industrial levels by 2100

Policy and

Legal:

Financial

impact of

potential new

legislation/

regulation

(including

product

legislation)

Risk: Increased operating

costs through Extended

Producer Responsibility

(‘EPR’) for bulky

The EPR (bulky waste) legislation is assumed to come into effect in 2028-2029,

which essentially introduces an extra tax on the sale of residential floorcoverings

for companies considered to be manufacturer or first point of contact in the UK for

imported items. The rates used in the scenario modelling are best estimates, before

the legislation is enacted.

The scenario modelling assumes that the take-back scheme, currently in an

extended trial, is rolled out across the network and that the materials collected are

then transferred to recycling centres.

It is assumed that the take-back tonnages are at least the same level as the

materials sold by the Group which would attract the EPR fees. The net EPR fees are

therefore expected to be £nil.

It is assumed that the transport costs incurred in transferring the materials to the

recycling centres will be broadly offset by revenues generated from both the take-

back centres and recycling centres.

– –

– Collaborate with suppliers on new sustainable product launches.

Roll-out the take-back scheme to avoid materials entering into the waste

stream to offset EPR fees.

It is likely that any residual costs arising (either from take-back tonnages

not fully offsetting EPR fees or recycling revenues not offsetting transport

costs) could be passed on to customers, reducing the potential financial

impact to an immaterial amount.

Market:

Transitioning

to more

sustainable

business and

operating

practices

Risk: Increased costs of

operating a sustainable

fleet with low-carbon

technologies

The technology for zero-emission heavy goods vehicles (‘HGVs’) continues to be

developed. The total cost of ownership for a short-range zero-emission HGV fleet is

becoming more comparable to that of a diesel HGV fleet.

The Group is monitoring the developments in the powertrain and energy storage

technologies, which are leading to improvements in the range of zero-emission

HGVs.

There is a degree of uncertainty in the cost estimates for a zero-emission long-

range HGV fleet (as operated by the Group), including the investment required in

charging infrastructure.

It has been assumed, for this scenario modelling, that the cost of operating a zero-

emission HGV fleet is in line with that of operating a diesel fleet.

There is a large global market for HGVs, providing a commercial incentive for

companies to develop a viable, cost-effective zero-emission solution for long range

HGVs.

– – – Ongoing trials of zero-emission commercial vehicles.

Scenario 2 (Physical): Average global temperatures rising by 4ºC above pre-industrial levels by 2100

Acute: Asset

damage

Risk: Business interruption

and loss of revenue following

damage to distribution

network as a result of

extreme weather event;

consequential impairment

of assets and increased

insurance premiums

A weather event, likely to be a flooding event, is assumed to occur in the long term.

Only a small number of the geographically dispersed sites are considered to have

a high risk of flooding. There are no sites, which if affected, would give rise to a

material profit impact.

– – – The Group’s assets are not expected to be exposed to high physical

climate-related risk due to the geographies in which it operates.

Operations are disaggregated with business continuity plans in place if

specific sites are affected by isolated events.

Chronic

and Acute:

Supply chain

disruption

Risk: Potential raw material

shortages and knock-

on impact on product

availability from supply

chain disruption leading to

loss of revenue

The scenario modelling assumes there is no loss of revenue from this risk due to the

comprehensive inventory and homogeneous products held and sold by the Group.

– – – Market-leading position and strategic partnerships with suppliers should

enable the Group to preserve levels of availability.

Comprehensive inventory levels maintained at any one time providing

strong availability, also helped by the Group’s strategy to increase its

focus on holding and selling fast-moving lines.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

41

Strategy and

Risk Management Disclosure

Resilience of the

organisation’s

strategy, taking

into consideration

different climate-

related scenarios

The analysis suggests that none of the risks identified above would have a material profit impact

to the Group in the transition scenario. This is on the basis that the take-back scheme offsets any

EPR fees and that any residual costs can be passed on to customers. As noted, there is a high

degree of uncertainty around the cost of transitioning to a zero emission HGV fleet.

In the physical scenario, the analysis suggests that there would not be a significant impact on the

business.

There are a number of strategic responses that the Group could and is already taking against

these risks, as noted above. When taking into account the judged severity of the potential risks,

time horizons and mitigating actions, the Group is currently considered to remain a resilient

business in both scenarios modelled above. Overall, the business model is deemed fit for purpose.

Metrics and Targets Disclosure

Metrics used by the

organisation to assess

climate-related risks

and opportunities

The Group uses the below KPIs and targets to both assess the risks and opportunities as well as its

progress in relation to its overall ESG Strategy.

KPI

• Energy usage (per SECR disclosure)

• Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions (year on year)

• Achieving reduction pathway required for Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions to achieve interim target

• Number of sustainable own brand product launches

• ESG rating agency scores

• Physical asset damaged related insurance claims/premiums

Target

• Interim emissions target (Scope 1, 2 and 3)

• Net Zero emissions target (Scope 1, 2 and 3)

An intensity metric is additionally given within the Group’s SECR Disclosure on page 44.

An ESG metric has been introduced into Executive Director and Executive Team

performance-related variable remuneration.

Link to Risks

9

Link to KPIs

J

K

Scope 1, Scope 2 and

Scope 3 greenhouse

(‘GHG’) emissions,

and the related risks

The Group’s Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions are summarised on pages 43 to 45 of the Sustainability

Report.

Targets used by

the organisation to

manage climate-

related risks and

opportunities and

performance against

targets

The Group’s Scope 1, 2 and 3 targets are aligned and set to be net zero by 2040.

The Group has an interim Scope 1 and 2 target for a 46% reduction against the 2019 baseline by 2030.

The Group also has an interim Scope 3 target for a 42% reduction against the 2023 baseline by 2032.

42

TASK FORCE ON CLIMATERELATED

FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES

‘TCFD’ CONTINUED

This SECR disclosure forms part of the Company’s overall

Sustainability Report on pages 26 to 36, and should be read as

part of the full report.

This disclosure along with the full report summarises the

Company’s energy usage, associated emissions, energy

efficiency actions being undertaken and energy performance

under the government policy Streamlined Energy and Carbon

Reporting (‘SECR’), as implemented by the Companies

(Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy

and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018.

This disclosure also summarises the methodologies utilised for

all calculations related to the elements reported under Energy

and Carbon, and includes intensity metrics. With the energy

efficiency actions detailed in the full report, this disclosure fully

complies with the reporting regulations under the new SECR

legislation.

This disclosure, and full supporting documentation, has been

prepared by Inspired Energy PLC in conjunction with members

of Headlam’s Executive Team for Headlam Group PLC by

means of interpreting the Companies (Directors’ Report) and

Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon Report)

Regulations 2018 as they apply to information supplied by

Headlam Group PLC and its energy suppliers.

The following figures demonstrate year-on-year changes

in consumption and resulting emissions for Headlam Group

PLC for 2025 and 2024. Headlam Group PLC has chosen to

disclose its consumption and emissions data for its global

operations, in addition to mandatory UK consumption and

emissions data.

Definitions of the Scopes used in this disclosure:

• Scope 1 consumption and emissions include direct

combustion of natural gas, and fuels utilised for

transportation, for example, company vehicle fleets.

• Scope 2 consumption and emissions cover indirect

emissions related to the consumption of purchased

electricity in day-to-day business operations, and

electricity consumed in vehicles such as EVs and PHEVs.

• Scope 3 consumption and emissions cover emissions

resulting from sources not directly owned by Headlam

Group PLC, which relates to grey fleet business travel

undertaken in employee-owned vehicles only.

Consumption (kWh) and Greenhouse Gas emissions (tCO

2

e) Totals

The following tables show the consumption and associated emissions for financial years ending December 2025 and December

2024 for all operations.

UK Totals

The total Energy Consumption (kWh) figures for reportable UK-based energy supplies are outlined below:

Utility and Scope

2025

Consumption

kWh

2024

Consumption

kWh

Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2) 4,503,458 5,330,844

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1) 3,565,851 4,270,355

Transportation (Scope 1) 46,737,273 56,919,467

Transportation (Scope 2) 116,234 126,675

Transportation (Scope 3) 341,486 343,438

Total 55,264,302 66,990,779

The total emission (tCO

2

e) figures for reportable UK-based energy supplies are outlined below.

Utility and Scope

2025

Consumption

tCO

2

e

2024

Consumption

tCO

2

e

Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2) 797.11 1,103.75

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1) 652.41 781.05

Transportation (Scope 1) 11,384.07 13,470.67

Transportation (Scope 2) 20.57 26.23

Transportation (Scope 3) 76.00 76.55

Total 12,930.16 15,458.25

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

43

STREAMLINED ENERGY AND

CARBON REPORTING ‘SECR’

UK Intensity Metric

An intensity metric of tCO

2

e per £m has been applied for our annual total emissions. The methodology of the intensity metric

calculations is detailed in the appendix, and the results of this analysis are as follows:

Intensity Metric

2025

Intensity

Metric

2024

Intensity

Metric

tCO

2

e/£m UK Revenue 25.93 29.41

Continental European Totals

Headlam Group PLC have sites that they are responsible for in France and in the Netherlands. The consumption and emission

figures for these are shown below:

France totals

Utility and Scope

2025

Consumption

kWh

2025

Consumption

tCO

2

e

Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2) 434,508 30.65

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1) 505,082 92.41

Transportation (Scope 1) 1,913,431 435.05

Total 2,853,021 558.11

Netherlands totals

Utility and Scope

2025

Consumption

kWh

2025

Consumption

tCO

2

e

Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2) 272,578 84.23

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1) 302,565 55.60

Transportation (Scope 2) 84,240 14.91

Transportation (Scope 1) 1,459,098 348.05

Total 2,118,481 502.79

UK and European totals

Utility and Scope

2025

Consumption

kWh

2025

Consumption

tCO

2

e

Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2) 5,210,544 912.00

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1) 4,373,498 800.41

Transportation (Scope 1) 50,109,802 12,167.17

Transportation (Scope 2) 200,474 35.48

Transportation (Scope 3) 341,486 76.00

Total 60,235,804 13,991.06

44

STREAMLINED ENERGY AND

CARBON REPORTING ‘SECR’

CONTINUED

UK and European Intensity Metric

An intensity metric of tCO

2

e per £m has been applied for our annual total emissions. The methodology of the intensity metric

calculations is detailed in the appendix, and the results of this analysis are as follows:

Intensity Metric

2025

Intensity

Metric

tCO

2

e/£m Group Revenue 24.74

Headlam is committed to year-on-year improvements in its

operational energy efficiency. A register of energy efficiency

measures has been compiled, with a view to implementing

these measures in the next five years.

Optimisation of Distribution Network

Headlam consolidated its operations into single sites from

multiple sites, streamlining the overall operational footprint.

This resulted in a reduction in unnecessary energy wastage

from a wider network of sites.

Good Energy Behaviour Training

In 2025, Headlam conducted company-wide training on

best practices to reduce energy consumption and the use

of energy efficiency measures. The training aimed to guide

employees in their day-to-day activities to be more conscious

of energy being consumed and mitigate some of this excess.

Measures to be Addressed in 2026

Company Car Fleet Electrification

Headlam continues to gradually phase out fossil-fuel vehicles

as it transitions to a fully electric fleet.

Staff Awareness and Behaviour Changes

Headlam will continue to raise staff awareness through

company-wide training on best practices to reduce energy

consumption, this ensures employees understand the

company’s sustainability objectives and follow guidance in

their day-to-day activities, thereby reducing unnecessary

energy use.

Energy Efficiency Upgrades

Headlam will assess the feasibility of implementing further

energy efficiency measures to optimise energy use and

reduce emissions.

Year-on-year changes

Gas and electricity emissions have reduced due to site

closures and implementation of energy efficiency measures.

Transport emissions have decreased by 15.42% compared

to 2024, primarily due to reduced fuel consumption in both

company cars and the commercial fleet.

The total intensity metric has decreased by 11.72% compared

to 2024 driven by a significant reduction in total emission

across all categories.

Total Group Revenue (£m) £565.6m

Total UK Revenue (£m) £498.7m

Total Continental Europe Revenue (£m) £66.9m

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

45

Overview

The table on pages 49 to 50 summarises the Principal Risks (in

no particular order), which the Board considers could have

a material impact on the Group’s reputation, operations or

financial performance. No new Principal Risks have been

identified.

The risk heat map on page 48 shows the Board’s assessment

of the level of risk for each of these Principal Risks as of the

date of this Annual Report and Accounts. The assessment

of the level of risk is first conducted by the Executive Risk

Committee and then reviewed and approved, following any

changes, by the Board.

Risk governance

Risk is encountered as part of the ordinary course of business

as well as through the implementation of the Group’s strategy

and transformation plan.

The Board has overall responsibility for the stewardship of

risk management and for ensuring that the Group exercises

an appropriate level of risk management to support the

achievement of its strategy. The Principal Risks faced by the

Group could have a material adverse effect on its business,

financial performance, or reputation, either alone or in

combination, so the management of such risks through

appropriate review, monitoring and control is important to

the Group’s long-term sustainable success. Changes to the

trading environment can also affect the likelihood and impact

of risks and may give rise to new risks.

The Board is supported in its risk management responsibilities

and in reviewing the effectiveness of the risk management

framework by the Audit Committee and the Executive Risk

Committee.

Risk appetite

The Board has considered the amount and type of risk

that the Group is willing to pursue or retain.

The Executive Risk Committee conducted an exercise to

determine risk appetite for each principal risk across a

fifteen-point scale, ranging from 1 (very risk averse) to 15

(very high risk appetite). The outcome of this was then

presented to, and discussed with, and challenged by, the

Audit Committee, and subsequently ratified by the Board.

The Executive Risk Committee is advised by an external

risk management specialist and meets quarterly to assess

the Group’s internal risk register, the adequacy of and

any changes in controls, and to undertake continuous

identification of emerging risks. The work of the Executive Risk

Committee is considered by the Audit Committee at each

of its four scheduled meetings during a year, and informs

the Audit Committee’s risk management discussions. The

Board carries out an assessment of the Group’s Principal Risks

and Uncertainties and identifies any emerging risks, at least

annually.

The Audit Committee, on behalf of the Board, also monitors

the Group’s system of risk management and internal control,

and conducts a review of its effectiveness at least once

a year, as well as overseeing the internal and third-party

assurance relating to the Principal Risks.

46

RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk monitoring structure

Board

The Board has overall responsibility for the Group's system of risk management and internal control.

Committees Risk Identification Risk Management

Independent assurance

Audit

Committee

Nomination

Committee

Remuneration

Committee

Assesses strategic risks

identified by management

capable of threatening

the business model, future

performance, solvency or

liquidity in the context of

the Company’s strategy

and the interests of

stakeholders and market

context.

Overall responsibility for corporate

governance, internal control and

risk management and for setting

risk appetite taking into account the

expectations of stakeholders and

feedback received from engagement

activities.

Audit Committee receives updates from

Executive Risk Committee on key risks

and assesses adequacy of controls and

risk classification and identification

processes.

Other Committees consider risk

management as it relates to their role

and priorities.

Executive Risk Committee Assesses risks and

mitigating controls using a

specified scoring system,

based on likelihood and

impact, and reports into

the Audit Committee.

Reviews operation and design of internal

controls to ensure risks remain within

appetite.

Senior Leadership Team

Group functions

Business management

Use knowledge of best

practice, business and

the market in which we

operate to assess changes

in key risks.

Applies local knowledge

to identify and assess

operational risk.

Responsible for ensuring that risk

management is embedded within the

business and appropriate actions are

taken to manage risk.

Applies local knowledge to identify and

assess operational risk.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

47

Key

1

Market (economy and competition)

2

Market (strategy)

3

IT (systems and infrastructure)

4

IT (cyber security)

5

People

6

Health and Safety

7

Supply chain

8

Legislation, regulation and reporting

9

Environmental and decarbonisation

10

Change and decision making

High

Impact

Low

HighLikelihood

Risk heat map

Emerging risks

Identification and review of emerging risks are integrated

into our risk review process. Emerging risks are risks that

are rapidly evolving, or arriving at pace, for which the

impact and likelihood have not yet been fully understood

and for which the appropriate mitigations have not yet

been fully identified.

We continue to monitor the uncertain macroeconomic

and geopolitical environment to assess impacts on

customers, suppliers and colleagues. Currently we monitor

this through the lens of our existing principal risks, but

with a view to separating out any elements if it were

considered to be a principal risk of its own.

There are no emerging risks assessed as being of

significance to disclose currently.

Our principal risks

The Group has identified ten principal risks. There have been

no additions or deletions to these principal risks during the

year. However, a number of changes have been made to the

risk ratings, taking into account the events of the year (both

macro and micro) and any specific relevant circumstances

for the Group, along with the mitigating actions and controls.

These changes are summarised below:

Increased risk:

• Risk 3 – IT (systems and infrastructure): During the year

we made the decision to pause the ERP replacement

project, in order to focus on the transformation plan. The

increasing age of the legacy system and the complexity

of maintaining ongoing developments on this system,

as well as adapting it to meet the requirements of the

transformation plan, increases the risk profile. There are

additional mitigating controls that we are implementing in

order to improve the resilience of the legacy system, which

soften the increase in inherent risk.

• Risk 4 – IT (Cyber security): We have increased the

likelihood of the risk, reflecting the increase in cyber attack

activity more generally and also directed at the Group

specifically. The impact has reduced slightly, reflecting the

progress made on improving controls and contingency

plans.

• Risk 5 – People: This risk has increased, both in terms of

likelihood and impact, reflecting the scale of change that

the business is undergoing through the transformation

plan, and also reflecting on the changes at board level.

Movement on heat map but similar overall risk profile:

• Risk 7 – Supply chain: Following discussion in the

Executive Risk Committee, which was then ratified by the

Audit Committee, the risk likelihood has been reduced

and impact increased. This change was not driven by

any specific factors within Headlam Group; it reflects an

updated view of the risk profile more generally.

48

RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED

Risk and description Mitigating actions Link to

Strategy

Risk change

1

Market (economy and competition)

Failure to sustain revenue

and profit performance

as a result of economic

backdrop, market

demand, service levels or

competitive dynamics

The Group closely monitors market activity on a daily basis at both an

individual business and Group level. This visibility allows the Group to take

prompt action in response, including enhanced sales activity, operational

efficiency, managing inventory levels, and cash management.

The Group maintains customer engagement and feedback activities to

gain insight into customer preferences to ensure its service proposition and

offering remains competitive.

In response to prolonged market weakness the Group has launched

a transformation plan designed to improve profitability and reduce

borrowings. Importantly, the transformation plan is intended to return the

Group to profitability without requiring improvement in market conditions

1

2

3

4

2

Market (strategy)

Failure to develop and

deliver on profit and

cash improvement

opportunities

The description of this risk has been amended from ‘Failure to develop and

deliver on revenue growth opportunities’ to ‘Failure to develop and deliver

on profit and cash improvement opportunities’. This reflects the revision to

the areas of strategic focus as announced in November 2025. The Group’s

strategic focus is on returning the Group to profitability through a number of

key initiatives.

The Board has direct oversight of the Group’s strategy, and its effective

implementation, with the performance of each key initiative monitored

against clear targets and objectives.

1

2

3

4

5

3

IT (systems and infrastructure)

Failure to develop and

maintain IT systems and

infrastructure that is

resilient, scalable, and

able to support the

strategy

During the year we made the decision to pause the ERP replacement

project, in order to focus on the transformation plan. There are additional

mitigations that we are implementing in order to improve the resilience of

the legacy system, given that we will be operating this system for a longer

period than previously expected. These mitigating actions include people

and hardware.

2

3

5

4

IT (cyber security)

Failure to develop and

maintain adequate or

effective security and

cyber controls

Targeted use of specialist external advice and support.

Regular employee cyber engagement programme.

In 2025 we have implemented new technology and processes including

a new vulnerability tool, a new ‘Manage, Detect and Response’ tool and

tighter conditional access control.

5

People

Failure to recruit and

retain the right people

with relevant skills, values

and behaviours

The Board continues to focus on making the Group a great place to work,

and ensure colleagues share in the Group’s long-term success.

For details on the developments in 2025, see pages 32 to 34.

2

3

Key

Increased

Unchanged

Decreased

Key to strategic links

1

Reduce low-

margin revenue

2

Reduce

costs

5

Optimise

cash

3

Enhance

customer service

4

Simplify ranges and

consolidate supply base

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

49

PRINCIPAL RISKS

Risk and description Mitigating actions Link to

Strategy

Risk change

6

Health and safety

Failure to provide a safe

place to work for our

people

Health and safety is a standing agenda item at all Board Meetings. The

Group has a dedicated in-house health and safety team, with a dedicated

Group Health & Safety Director.

The Group also engages external support, and is focused on having a strong

and embedded health and safety culture across the group. During the year

the Group rolled out Safety Culture, a new reporting and analysis platform.

7

Supply chain

Failure to maintain a

supply chain that provides

innovative, competitively

priced, environmentally

sound and legally

compliant products on a

reliable and ethical basis

Increased engagement with suppliers to help mitigate against any supply

chain risk. Including on: Sustainability Charter; Ethical Code of Conduct; and

Self-Assessment Questionnaire (delivered by a third-party leading social

audit business).

Working closely with certain suppliers to launch new competitive and

sustainable ranges.

We engage with suppliers regularly and hold an annual supplier conference.

4

8

Legislation, regulation and reporting

Failure to operate with high

standards of governance

supported by a sound

system of internal control

that ensures compliance

with laws and regulations,

including disclosure and

reporting requirements

The Group manages its obligations through a framework of policies and

procedures and, where appropriate, engages the services of specialist third-

party advisers.

The Group has an online compliance training portal with courses related

to Anti-Bribery, Modern Slavery and Human Trafficking, Cyber security and

Social Media Awareness being rolled out to appropriate staff members.

The Group has a Code of Conduct, setting out clear standards and

expectations for all employees (also see Supplier Ethical Code of Conduct

above).

9

Environmental and decarbonisation

Failure to reduce

environmental impact,

including failure to deliver

GHG reductions in line with

Net Zero commitments

and contribution to

climate change

The Group continues to develop and progress its overall ESG Strategy. For

full details on environmental-related actions, see the Sustainability Report

on pages 26 to 36, which includes the Group’s TCFD disclosure. This disclosure

details the climate-related risks the Group has identified, and how it is

specifically assessing and addressing them.

4

10

Change and decision making

Failure to successfully

drive the cultural and

operating model changes

necessary to deliver the

strategy

The Group’s strategy and strategic objectives continue to be embedded

through regular group-wide communications and engagement. Senior

Leadership meetings are held regularly to discuss overall progress and focus

on specific elements of the strategy.

The Board has direct oversight of strategy and its progress. The Board is

mindful of the impact of the market conditions on the financial performance,

resulting in a strategic focus on returning the business to profitability.

1

2

3

4

5

Key

Increased

Unchanged

Decreased

Key to strategic links

1

Reduce low-

margin revenue

2

Reduce

costs

5

Optimise

cash

3

Enhance

customer service

4

Simplify ranges and

consolidate supply base

50

PRINCIPAL RISKS CONTINUED

Background

The UK Corporate Governance Code 2024 requires the

Board to assess the risks to the sustainability of the business

model and delivery of strategy and whether these have

been considered and addressed. This statement sets out, in

overview, that assessment.

Consistent with previous years, a period of three years, to

31 December 2028, was chosen for the purpose of the viability

assessment. This period best aligns with the Group’s strategy.

It also aligns with the Group’s recently agreed new borrowing

facility, which expires just after 31 December 2028 (albeit the

Group has the option to extend).

The assumptions used in this longer-term viability assessment

are consistent with the assumptions used in the Directors’

assessment of going concern.

Sensitivity analysis

Reporting on the Group’s and Company’s viability and

assessing going concern requires the Board to consider those

principal risks that could impair the solvency and liquidity of

the Group and Company. In order to determine those risks, the

Board considered the Group-wide principal risks as set out in

the Risk Management and Principal Risks sections on pages

46 to 50.

In light of the Group’s competitive position, corporate

governance controls, mitigating actions and factors within

its control, it is the Board’s opinion that it is unlikely that

any of the individual risks other than market (economy and

competition) could compromise the Group’s viability in the

assessment period.

The identified principal risks include environmental

and decarbonisation risk. It is the Board’s opinion that

environmental risks are unlikely to compromise the Group’s

viability over the assessment period, including transition risks,

which are considered the most likely to occur. In particular,

any new potential legislation, regarding extended producer

responsibility for bulky household waste items, is unlikely to

significantly impact the Group’s viability after factoring in

the planned mitigating actions concerning the take-back

scheme.

In respect of ultimately transitioning to a sustainable fleet, it

has been assumed that such costs are broadly comparable

to those of operating a diesel fleet. There is a degree of

uncertainty in the cost estimates for a zero emission HGV

fleet. However, the assumption is on the basis that there

is a large global market for HGVs, providing commercial

incentives for companies to develop a viable, cost-effective

zero-emission solution for long-range HGVs. Climate-change

risks are discussed further in the TCFD quantitative analysis on

pages 38 to 43, including consideration of the impact of the

risks over time horizons longer than this assessment period.

In respect of market (economy and competition) risk, the key

risks relate to sustained periods of macroeconomic downturn

that create reduced consumer and business confidence and

the impact of competitive dynamics, which could result in a

significant reduction in demand for the Group’s products.

Market backdrop

There has been no recovery in the flooring market in

2025, which is estimated to be around 25% smaller than

it was in 2019. Whilst the lead indicators for the flooring

and home improvements markets continue to point to

improvement in the medium term, these indicators remain

volatile and sensitive to macroeconomic and geopolitical

factors. Furthermore, whilst demand in the flooring market

has reduced significantly in recent years, the amount of

distribution capacity in the market has increased, which has

further impacted revenue.

In setting the downside scenario to be modelled, the Board

recognises that, as the Group exited 2025, the market in which

the Group operates had already declined by a cumulative

around 25% over recent years. The downside scenario includes

an estimate of the further additional severe-but-plausible

decline in revenue that could occur.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

51

VIABILITY STATEMENT

Transformation plan

The viability assessment is set in the context of the Group’s

previously announced transformation plan to return the

Group to profit. This transformation plan is expected to be

net cash generative, resulting in lower Net Debt at the end

of 2026 and 2027 than at the end of 2025. The cash inflow

from the transformation plan represents the net impact

of a) cash inflows from property disposals, b) cash inflows

from a reduction in working capital, offset somewhat by; c)

the cash outflow impact of the losses in the business until

it returns to profit, and d) the cash costs of executing the

transformation plan.

Banking facilities

As at 31 December 2025, the Group had a net debt position

excluding lease liabilities of £31.4 million and had total

banking facilities available of £72.3 million (31 December 2024:

£99.3 million), of which £61.0 million (31 December 2024:

£81.5 million) was committed. The committed facility

comprised a revolving credit facility (‘RCF’) with three lenders

that was due to expire in October 2027. The Group also had

a £7.5 million uncommitted overdraft. In January 2026, the

RCF and the uncommitted overdraft were replaced by an

asset-based lending facility (‘ABL’) of up to £85.0 million

with two lenders. The available amount of the ABL depends

on the amount of relevant assets (property, receivables

and inventory) against which the Group can borrow. It is

also subject to a requirement to hold a minimum amount

of headroom on the facility, by way of liquidity headroom

covenants together with a quarterly EBITDA covenant and

operational covenants including inventory stock turn and

debtor days. The quarterly EBITDA covenant applies until

31 December 2027 after which it is superseded by a fixed

charge cover covenant.

Asset backing

As at 31 December 2025, the Group owned freehold and

long leasehold property in the UK valued at c.£75 million. Of

this, property valued at c.£54 million is included in the ABL.

The remaining properties (valued at c.£21 million) are outside

the ABL and unencumbered; three of these properties,

representing the significant majority of the value, are currently

on the market for sale, are under offer, and are expected

to complete in the next few months. Furthermore, the

Group anticipates further properties will become surplus to

requirements over the next 18 months as part of the Group’s

transformation plan. The Group has included the cash

proceeds from planned property disposals in the cash flow

projections used for the viability assessment.

Over the last two years the Group has averaged a net

positive working capital balance of over £70 million; this

means that the Group has had over £70 million of cash tied

up in funding its working capital. As the Group implements its

transformation plan it expects to be able to release working

capital and manage the re-shaped business with a lower

overall working capital requirement. This, combined with

further opportunity for inventory efficiency, means that the

Group anticipates a significant double-digit £million working

capital inflow over 2026 and 2027, which has been included in

the viability assessment.

Downside Scenario

This scenario is modelled on the basis that consumer

confidence for major purchases is depressed throughout 2026,

leading to market volumes continuing to decline. This decline

is applied in addition to the actions already assumed to be

taken by the Group to reduce low margin revenue and to

reduce fixed costs.

Market conditions are then assumed to recover over 2027

such that 2028 conditions are broadly similar to 2025 albeit

volumes remaining heavily depressed compared to 2019

levels. This compares to the base case which assumes a lesser

level of decline in 2026.

In the base case and downside scenario, the Group would

continue to operate within its banking facilities. In making

this assessment, the Group has assumed it can achieve the

cash inflows included in its projections, including the sale of

properties. These property disposals are not wholly in the

Group’s control, but the Group has a strong track record

of successfully completing such transactions over the last

two years.

Should a more severe scenario occur, for example a multi-

year macroeconomic downturn, the Group has a number of

mitigating actions available to it including: further working

capital optimisation; increasing the amount of borrowing

capacity in the ABL through meeting certain operational

KPIs; additional cost mitigations; additional property sales;

the sale and leaseback of properties; utilising unencumbered

properties for additional borrowing capacity; and faster

conversion of rebates into cash. However, the Group notes

that not all of these mitigating actions would be in the control

of the Group and/or are not contractually agreed at the time

of making the viability assessment.

Viability statement

Based on the results of the analysis, the Board has a

reasonable expectation that the Group will continue in

operation and be able to meet its liabilities as they fall due

over the three-year period of assessment.

52

VIABILITY STATEMENT CONTINUED

The table below sets out where stakeholders can find information in the Strategic Report (that relates to non-financial matters

detailed under Section 414CA and 414CB of the UK Companies Act 2006), and the Strategic Report taken together with the table

below, comprises the Company’s Non-Financial Information Statement.

Reporting

Requirement Relevant policies Additional Information

Matters

Environmental

matters

ESG Policy

Supplier Code of Conduct

Sustainability Report – pages 26 to 36.

SECR Disclosure – pages 43 to 45.

Corporate Governance Report – pages 55 to

124.

People Code of Ethics Stakeholder Engagement and Section 172

Statement – pages 18 to 20.

Sustainability Report – pages 26 to 36.

Corporate Governance Report – pages 55 to

124.

Social matters Equal Opportunities and Diversity Policy

Flexible Working Policy

Stakeholder Engagement and Section 172

Statement – pages 18 to 20.

Sustainability Report – pages 26 to 36.

Corporate Governance Report – pages 55 to

124.

Respect for Human

Rights

Health and Safety Policy

Modern Slavery Statement

Health and Safety – pages 33.

Modern Slavery – page 121.

Other Statutory Disclosures – pages 118 to 122.

Anti-Corruption and

Anti-Bribery matters

Anti-Corruption and Bribery Policy

Speak Up Policy

Expenses Policy

Corporate Governance Report – pages 55 to

123.

Audit Committee Report – pages 78 to 85.

Other Statutory Disclosures – pages 118 to 123.

Information disclosed in support of the matters

Business model Business Model – pages 10 to 11.

Principal risks,

impact and

mitigation

Risk Management, and Principal Risks and

Uncertainties – pages 46 to 50.

Non-financial

key performance

indicators

Key Performance Indicators – pages 14 to 17.

Sustainability Report – pages 26 to 36.

This Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 25 March 2026 and signed on its behalf by

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

53

NONFINANCIAL AND SUSTAINABILITY

INFORMATION STATEMENT

5454

GOVERNANCE

Compliance Statement 56

Chair’s Introduction 58

Board of Directors 60

How the Board Embeds Culture 62

Board Leadership and Company Purpose 64

Division of Responsibilities 72

Composition, Succession and Evaluation 77

Audit Committee Report 78

Nomination Committee Report 86

Directors’ Remuneration Report 92

Directors’ Report 118

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 123

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

55

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

55

It is the Board’s view that, throughout the financial year ended 31 December 2025, and as at

the date of this report, the Company complied with the relevant principles and provisions

set out in the UK Corporate Governance Code 2024 (the ‘Code’) with the exception from

3 October 2025 of the requirement that the roles of Chair and Chief Executive should not be

performed by the same person following Chris Payne stepping down from the Board when

Stephen Bird was appointed Interim Executive Chair whilst a search for successor

was undertaken.

This report complies with Rule 7 of the Disclosure Rules and Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority, with the

information required to be disclosed by sub-section 2.6 of Rule 7 being shown on pages 140 to 196. The Company has also

complied with the relevant requirements of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules, the Listing Rules, Directors’

Remuneration Reporting regulations and narrative reporting requirements.

The Corporate Governance section of this Annual Report and Accounts explains how the Code principles have been applied.

The 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code is available at www.frc.org.uk.

Composition, succession

and evaluation

Formal, rigorous and transparent

procedures are in place to support

Board appointments, led by the

Nomination Committee, which

considers the importance of diversity

in decision-making.

The Nomination Committee regularly

reviews composition of the Board and

Committees to ensure appropriate

combination of skills, experience

and knowledge and to plan for the

progressive refreshing of the Board.

Annual evaluation of the Board’s

composition, diversity and

effectiveness.

Nomination Committee report –

pages 86 to 90

Appointments to the Board –

page 86

Board Diversity Policy – page 87

Board composition – pages

88 to 90

Board evaluation – page 77

Board leadership

and Company purpose

The Board is responsible for:

• Promoting the long-term

sustainable success of the

Company and establishing the

Company’s purpose, values and

strategy (ensuring that its culture is

aligned).

• Ensuring the necessary resources

are in place to meet objectives

and measure performance against

them within a framework of

effective controls.

• Engaging with stakeholders to

inform decisions and ensuring that

workforce policies and practices

are consistent with the Company’s

values and support long-term

success.

Board of Directors – pages

60 to 61

Leadership and purpose – pages

64 to 68

Board activities during the year

– pages 64, 65, 74 and 75

Considering stakeholders in

decision making – pages 18 and 19

Division of

responsibilities

The Chair leads the Board and

is responsible for its overall

effectiveness in driving the Company.

There is clear division of responsibilities

between the leadership of the Board

and the executive leadership of the

business.

The Non-Executive Directors

dedicate sufficient time to meet their

responsibilities and provide constructive

challenge, strategic guidance, specialist

advice and hold management to

account.

Board policies and processes are

in place to ensure that the Board

functions effectively.

Board roles – page 71

Division of responsibilities – pages

70 to 76

Nomination Committee report –

pages 86 to 90

Dealing with Directors’ conflicts of

interest – page 73

Implementation of the Principles of the Code

5656

COMPLIANCE STATEMENT

Audit, risk and

internal control

The Board has established formal

and transparent policies and

procedures to ensure the integrity

of the independence of the Group’s

external audit, and to satisfy itself of

the integrity of the Group’s financial

statements and to confirm that

they represent a fair, balanced and

understandable assessment of the

Company’s position and prospects.

Procedures have been established

to manage risk, oversee the internal

control framework and determine the

nature and extent of the principal risks

the Company is willing to take in order

to achieve its long-term strategic

objectives.

Audit Committee report –

pages 78 to 85

Fair, balanced and

understandable statement –

page 85

Risk management and principal

risks – pages 46 to 52

Remuneration

The Board, through its Remuneration

Committee, determines Director and

senior management remuneration

policies and practices and ensures

they align to the Company’s purpose,

values, and promote the successful

delivery of the Company’s long-term

strategy.

Each element of performance-related

pay allows for the independent exercise

of judgement and discretion when

authorising remuneration outcomes.

Controls have been implemented to

ensure that no Director is involved in

deciding their own remuneration.

Remuneration Overview –

page 94

Directors’ Remuneration Policy –

pages 95 to 105

Directors’ Annual Report on

Remuneration – pages 106 to 117

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

57

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

57

Governance

“ The Board has overseen

a number of required

changes to the Company’s

strategy and executive

management team to

drive forward its revised

strategy and to accelerate

its transformation

programme.”

On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to

present the Governance report for the

financial year ended 31 December 2025.

This report sets out our approach to effective governance,

outlines the areas of focus for the Board and the key activities

undertaken. My role and that of the Board has been to guide

the business and the executive management to refocus the

Group on the profitable independent retailer and contractor

customer base through our revised strategy and ensure

it is supported by the right people. The last financial year

has been an important period and we have accelerated

the implementation of our transformation programme

and our revised strategy to create a structurally stronger,

more profitable business from which we can be rescale with

confidence.

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

Board changes and succession planning

Following Keith’s decision to step down from the Board, the

Nomination Committee and the Board implemented the

Chair succession plan, and after a successful handover I

became Chair on 27 February 2025. Jemima, Chair of the

Remuneration Committee, was also appointed our Senior

Independent Director at the same time. The composition of

the Board and its Committees was also reviewed, to ensure

that these remain appropriate with the right mix of expertise

and experience to support the Company in its strategic goals.

Chair and CEO succession

and Board composition

Sharper focus on our core customer strategy refocused

on independent retails and contractors required some

interim changes in 2025 where I stepped into the role

of Interim Executive Chair following Keith Edelman

stepping down as Chair in February (as part of the Chair

succession plan) and Chris Payne stepping down as

Chief Executive Officer in October. This enabled the

Board together with a strengthened interim executive

management team to oversee a further acceleration of

the execution of its transformation programme.

Following an extensive search, I’m very pleased on

behalf of the Board to welcome Rob Barclay as

our Chief Executive Officer Designate who will

become Chief Executive Officer and join the Board

on 27 April 2026 after a short handover (when I will

revert to Non-Executive Chair), and Richard Jones who

joined the Group as Interim CFO on 12th March 2026

and will replace Adam Phillips, CFO, on the Board on

26th March 2026. The Board would like to thank Adam

for all of his hard work and wish him well in his new role.

5858

CHAIR’S INTRODUCTION

Strategy and culture

The Board has made progress in many key areas throughout

the year, including the review of the Group’s strategy, and

governance and oversight of the transformation programme.

Karen Hubbard continues in her role of Non-Executive Director

responsible for employee engagement and she continues to

provide regular reports to the Board. This role and reporting,

together with other activity on how the Board monitors

the culture of the Group (see pages 62 and 63), creates an

appropriate cultural dashboard and continues to enhance

the quality of the information the Board receives from our

employees.

We held a further supplier conference in the year, which was

attended by our key suppliers and we held a sales conference

in September attended by our sales force colleagues. Our

supplier code of conduct and colleague code of conduct

continue to be in place.

Our on-going engagement work with all our stakeholders

helps shape how the Board takes their views into

consideration to support our decision-making and ensure

the culture of the business is developing in line with our stated

purpose and values. Information of our engagement with

stakeholders can be found on pages 18 to 20 and throughout

this Governance report.

This commitment to guiding and promoting a healthy culture

is underpinned by a significant ongoing work programme to

develop a strong safety culture. Please see page 33 for further

details.

Please see pages 62 and 63 on how the Board monitors

culture so that the Board continues to understand the

changes and trends within the business, which deepens our

ongoing relationships with all our stakeholders.

Environmental, social and

governance (‘ESG’) responsibilities

Our ESG strategy and work to deliver this has continued

throughout 2025 as a key work stream and embedded into

the business through the established ESG Committee which

is attended by Non-Executive Director Karen Hubbard. ESG

updates have been given to our stakeholders and Karen

Hubbard formally reports back to the Board on the ESG

Committee progress. The highlights from the year and our

progress in key areas are outlined in our Sustainability Report

on page 26.

We have made great strides forward during the course of the

year and as a Board we are focused on delivering tangible

progress in the year ahead.

Diversity

The Board recognises that diversity both on the Board and in

the wider organisation leads to healthy debate, which in turn

leads to better decisions and helps support the Company.

The Board reviews its diversity policy annually and it was a key

consideration when the Board considered who was going to

appointed as the Senior Independent Director in my place. In

making our appointments we have aimed to cultivate a broad

spectrum of attributes and characteristics in the Boardroom

and we continue to keep the position under review as we

move forward in all our succession planning activity. Diversity

across the organisation is summarised on page 34 and further

information on Board diversity can be found in the report of

the Nomination Committee on pages 78 to 85.

Board evaluation

An externally facilitated evaluation was carried out towards

the end of the year, and the results were pleasing and

confirmed that the Board and Committees are working well.

More information on the Board evaluation can be found on

page 77.

Our colleagues

It has been a busy year overseeing the of our revised strategy,

the transformation programme and the recruitment of a

number of highly skilled colleagues at all levels of the business

to drive us forward.

The Board recognises the significant contributions from all

our colleagues throughout the year and thanks them for their

hard work and dedication.

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

25 March 2026

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

59

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

59

The whole Board has oversight of the Company’s sustainability agenda and ESG Strategy, which incorporates

areas of focus including workforce engagement, health and safety, IT resilience, and DEI. Additional oversight

and individual accountability for specific focus areas is given through Board and Executive Team membership

of the ESG Committee, the Risk Committee, and the formal Employee Forum.

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

Jemima Bird

Senior Independent Director

Adam Phillips

Chief Financial Officer

Karen Hubbard

Independent Non-Executive Director

Robin Williams

Independent Non-Executive Director

Alison Hughes

General Counsel & Company Secretary

A

N

R A

N

R

D

Ri

A

E

F

N

R

A

N

R

D

E

Ri

Stephen was appointed our Non-

Executive Chair on 27 February 2025,

(previously he was Senior Independent

Director from 2022) and then appointed

as Interim Executive Chair on

3 October 2025. Stephen’s last executive

role was Group Chief Executive of

Videndum plc (formerly The Vitec

Group plc), the international provider of

premium branded hardware products

and software solutions to the growing

content creation market, having

held the position since 2009. He was

previously Senior Independent Director

of Dialight plc, the global leader in

sustainable LED lighting for industrial

applications, stepping down in 2021

after nearly nine years on the Board.

Stephen has extensive executive

experience developing successful,

customer-led growth strategies to help

businesses grow and adapt to changing

markets. Prior to joining Videndum

plc, Stephen was Divisional Managing

Director of Weir Oil & Gas, and held

senior roles at Danaher Corporation,

Black & Decker, and Technicolor Group.

He is a member of the English National

Ballet’s Finance and General Purposes

Committee.

Jemima was appointed our

Senior Independent Director on

27 February 2025 and is also our Chair

of the Remuneration Committee.

Jemima has over 20 years’ retail

experience working with many of the

UK’s leading high-street brands, and has

held numerous executive commercial,

marketing and operations positions. She

is currently a Non-Executive Director

and the Chair of the Remuneration

Committees at both Pinewood

Technologies Group plc and Creightons

plc and was previously a Non-Executive

Director at Carpetright plc, (a leading

floorcoverings and beds provider,

until it was taken private in 2020) and

previously the Senior Independent

Director and Chair of the Remuneration

Committee at the Revel Collective plc.

Previously, Jemima was the Senior

Trustee for the Football Foundation, the

UK’s largest sports charity.

Adam joined the Company as Chief

Financial Officer in March 2023.

He was previously Group Financial

Controller at Mobico Group plc, the

FTSE 250 multinational transport

provider. Prior to this Adam was at

Halfords Group plc, in a number of roles,

including Corporate Finance Director

and Group Strategy Director.

Adam is a qualified Chartered

Accountant having trained with

KPMG and is a Fellow of the Institute

of Chartered Accountants in England

and Wales. Adam is Chair of the Risk

Committee.

Karen was appointed a Non-Executive

Director in 2022. Karen has over 25

years’ experience in retail, at both

executive and Director levels across

various industries and markets. She

was previously Chief Executive Officer

of Card Factory plc, the UK’s leading

specialist retailer of greeting cards,

gifts, wrap and bags, where she

diversified their income from a UK

high-street business to a multi-channel,

international, wholesale and franchised

operation. Karen has also served as

Chief Operating Officer at B&M, on the

ASDA Stores Executive Board as Director

for Property, Multi-Channel and Format

Development, in addition to working for

BP Oil’s retail divisions.

Karen currently serves as Non-Executive

Chair in privately backed businesses

Custom Materials Limited and Fun

Brands Group. In addition, she is a Non-

Executive Director and Chair of ESG of

St Austell Brewery.

Karen is a member of the ESG

Committee and the Employee Forum,

and the Independent Director who has

oversight of workforce engagement.

Robin was appointed a Non-Executive

Director and Chair of the Audit

Committee in 2022. Robin has over 30

years’ experience with listed companies,

including as founder CEO and Executive

Director with FTSE 250 companies

within the packaging and the building

materials industries. He is currently Non-

Executive Chairman of Keystone Law

Group plc and of Churchill China plc and

was previously a Non-Executive Director

of The Manufacturing Technology

Centre Ltd.

Robin is a qualified Chartered Accountant

and brings experience of chairing audit

committees as well as insights from a

wide range of sectors as an Executive and

Non-Executive Board member of public

and private companies.

Alison was appointed in December

2023 and has over 20 years’ experience

across several business sectors,

including retail and hospitality and

extensive experience in corporate and

commercial legal matters, corporate

governance and compliance matters.

Previously she was the Director of

Group Legal & Company Secretariat

at Mitchells & Butlers plc, a FTSE 250

company within the hospitality industry.

Prior to that she worked at Boots

plc, and trained and qualified as a

solicitor with Wragge & Co LLP (now

Gowling WLG).

Alison is a qualified solicitor with over

20 years’ post qualification experience.

She is a member of the Disclosure

Committee, ESG Committee and the

Risk Committee.

6060

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Committee Membership key

A

Audit Committee

F

Employee Forum

Ri

Risk Committee

D

Disclosure Committee

N

Nomination Committee Committee Chair

E

ESG Committee

R

Remuneration Committee

Stephen Bird

Interim Executive Chair

Jemima Bird

Senior Independent Director

Adam Phillips

Chief Financial Officer

Karen Hubbard

Independent Non-Executive Director

Robin Williams

Independent Non-Executive Director

Alison Hughes

General Counsel & Company Secretary

A

N

R

A

N

R

D

Ri

A

E

F

N

R

A

N

R D

E

Ri

Stephen was appointed our Non-

Executive Chair on 27 February 2025,

(previously he was Senior Independent

Director from 2022) and then appointed

as Interim Executive Chair on

3 October 2025. Stephen’s last executive

role was Group Chief Executive of

Videndum plc (formerly The Vitec

Group plc), the international provider of

premium branded hardware products

and software solutions to the growing

content creation market, having

held the position since 2009. He was

previously Senior Independent Director

of Dialight plc, the global leader in

sustainable LED lighting for industrial

applications, stepping down in 2021

after nearly nine years on the Board.

Stephen has extensive executive

experience developing successful,

customer-led growth strategies to help

businesses grow and adapt to changing

markets. Prior to joining Videndum

plc, Stephen was Divisional Managing

Director of Weir Oil & Gas, and held

senior roles at Danaher Corporation,

Black & Decker, and Technicolor Group.

He is a member of the English National

Ballet’s Finance and General Purposes

Committee.

Jemima was appointed our

Senior Independent Director on

27 February 2025 and is also our Chair

of the Remuneration Committee.

Jemima has over 20 years’ retail

experience working with many of the

UK’s leading high-street brands, and has

held numerous executive commercial,

marketing and operations positions. She

is currently a Non-Executive Director

and the Chair of the Remuneration

Committees at both Pinewood

Technologies Group plc and Creightons

plc and was previously a Non-Executive

Director at Carpetright plc, (a leading

floorcoverings and beds provider,

until it was taken private in 2020) and

previously the Senior Independent

Director and Chair of the Remuneration

Committee at the Revel Collective plc.

Previously, Jemima was the Senior

Trustee for the Football Foundation, the

UK’s largest sports charity.

Adam joined the Company as Chief

Financial Officer in March 2023.

He was previously Group Financial

Controller at Mobico Group plc, the

FTSE 250 multinational transport

provider. Prior to this Adam was at

Halfords Group plc, in a number of roles,

including Corporate Finance Director

and Group Strategy Director.

Adam is a qualified Chartered

Accountant having trained with

KPMG and is a Fellow of the Institute

of Chartered Accountants in England

and Wales. Adam is Chair of the Risk

Committee.

Karen was appointed a Non-Executive

Director in 2022. Karen has over 25

years’ experience in retail, at both

executive and Director levels across

various industries and markets. She

was previously Chief Executive Officer

of Card Factory plc, the UK’s leading

specialist retailer of greeting cards,

gifts, wrap and bags, where she

diversified their income from a UK

high-street business to a multi-channel,

international, wholesale and franchised

operation. Karen has also served as

Chief Operating Officer at B&M, on the

ASDA Stores Executive Board as Director

for Property, Multi-Channel and Format

Development, in addition to working for

BP Oil’s retail divisions.

Karen currently serves as Non-Executive

Chair in privately backed businesses

Custom Materials Limited and Fun

Brands Group. In addition, she is a Non-

Executive Director and Chair of ESG of

St Austell Brewery.

Karen is a member of the ESG

Committee and the Employee Forum,

and the Independent Director who has

oversight of workforce engagement.

Robin was appointed a Non-Executive

Director and Chair of the Audit

Committee in 2022. Robin has over 30

years’ experience with listed companies,

including as founder CEO and Executive

Director with FTSE 250 companies

within the packaging and the building

materials industries. He is currently Non-

Executive Chairman of Keystone Law

Group plc and of Churchill China plc and

was previously a Non-Executive Director

of The Manufacturing Technology

Centre Ltd.

Robin is a qualified Chartered Accountant

and brings experience of chairing audit

committees as well as insights from a

wide range of sectors as an Executive and

Non-Executive Board member of public

and private companies.

Alison was appointed in December

2023 and has over 20 years’ experience

across several business sectors,

including retail and hospitality and

extensive experience in corporate and

commercial legal matters, corporate

governance and compliance matters.

Previously she was the Director of

Group Legal & Company Secretariat

at Mitchells & Butlers plc, a FTSE 250

company within the hospitality industry.

Prior to that she worked at Boots

plc, and trained and qualified as a

solicitor with Wragge & Co LLP (now

Gowling WLG).

Alison is a qualified solicitor with over

20 years’ post qualification experience.

She is a member of the Disclosure

Committee, ESG Committee and the

Risk Committee.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

61

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

61

The Board regularly reviews a number of measures throughout the year to monitor the culture of the

Company and how it is embedded through the values of the Company summarised below, please also

see pages 32 to 34 on culture and colleague engagement:

Care: We ensure that every individual feels respected, listened to and safe

• Review of health and safety (‘H&S’) metrics and information included in the regular Board H&S

reports.

• Review and approval of the Company’s H&S policy.

• Presentations by the Company’s Group H&S Director alongside visits to the site to see H&S measures

and processes in practice.

• Review of the feedback and scoring from the Company’s annual ‘Have your Say’ employee survey

which includes specific feedback from employees on their perspective and rating of safety of

physical work environments, employee behaviours in respect of health and safety and wellbeing

all scores for these this year were improved from the prior year and where there was an applicable

industry benchmark scores were higher than the industry benchmark.

• Review and approval of the Company’s whistleblowing policy, the ‘Speak Up’ Policy and its

processes.

• Oversight and visibility of whistleblowing cases during the year and the whistleblowing procedures

in place mean any cases, (including those that may relate to H&S) are immediately visible to the

Audit Chair (who is the designated Board Director with oversight of the Company’s review and

investigation process for all whistleblowing cases).

• Board Directors regularly take the opportunity to seek colleagues’ feedback on a number of issues

when they are out in the businesses during the year.

• Employees have access to training to be able to do their best work, and develop and progress their

careers.

• Employees have access to various wellbeing facilities.

• The Company regularly celebrates and recognises employees when they do a great job.

• Listening forums such as Employee Forums where employees have the opportunity to raise their

questions, ideas and questions whilst having the opportunity to discuss these directly with Executive

Committee members and Board Directors.

Teamwork: We create an inclusive environment where people celebrate success together

• Review of the updates from the Company on its diversity and inclusion plans, including changes to

recruitment processes and other inclusion initiatives.

• Review of regular updates on colleague turnover through the regular Chief People Officer reports

across all areas and departments of the Company, and which also includes commentary relating to

any particular trends for the Board to consider and if required investigate further.

• Review of the annual colleague engagement survey, (which includes colleagues’ feedback, for

example on the Company’s work environment and if everyone feels included, regardless of gender,

background, ethnicity, sexual orientation, age etc, feedback on line managers ability to manage

changes which affect their teams, ability to be themselves at work).

• Review of the annual Gender Pay Gap report.

• Review of reports from each of the Employee Forums by Karen Hubbard (who is the designated

Non-Executive Director for workplace engagement).

• Board Directors have, and regularly take, the opportunity to seek colleagues feedback on a number

of issues when they are out in the businesses during the year.

• The Board and throughout the Company there are regular celebrations and events to recognise

employees and teams when they are doing a great job.

• Listening forums such as Employee Forums where employees have the opportunity to raise their

feedback on success as well as areas for improvement whilst having the opportunity to discuss

these directly with Executive Committee members and Board Directors.

6262

HOW THE BOARD EMBEDS CULTURE

Commitment: We uphold high standards and confidently challenge wrong behaviours

• Board reviews business performance measures and metrics regularly through the various regular

reports from the Executive Committee members, (including in the context of the market and the

Company’s competitors).

• Review of the annual colleague engagement survey, which includes on colleagues’ feedback on

whether they are satisfied with the communications they receive about local sites and departments

in order to do their jobs effectively..

• Board reviews our customers’ feedback through the customer survey and reports on the same to

the Board.

• Board reviews and receives specific reporting and presentations on major business change

programmes such as the Company’s transformation programme, along with external advisers, to

have the opportunity to directly ask questions of specialist advisers and subject matter experts.

Ownership: We create a trusted environment where people are empowered to act and can learn and improve

• The strength of leadership is measured as part of the colleague engagement survey which includes

feedback on colleague motivation, line management, colleague recognition, line manager

communication and ability to raise issues, all of which this year showed an improvement compared

to the prior year.

• The Chief People Officer regular reports include reporting on metrics such absence, which give an

indication of the strength of leadership amongst other metrics.

• The visibility that the Board has of whistleblowing cases also means that any cases related to

leadership or colleague behaviour would be immediately visible to the Audit Chair.

• Review of reports from each of the Employee Forums through Karen Hubbard, who is the

designated Non-Executive Director for workplace engagement.

• Board Directors regularly take the opportunity to seek colleagues’ feedback on a number of issues

when they are out in the businesses during the year.

• Oversight of succession planning for the Board, Executive Committee and senior leaders.

Simplicity: We avoid over complication by keeping things simple

• Board and Company has overseen revised reporting on business performance measures and

metrics this year adopting a flexible approach and required format of reporting from Executive

Committee members to keep things simple and enable executive management to focus on key

initiatives to drive better performance.

• Review of the annual colleague engagement survey to understand how are colleagues are feeling

about things and how we can communicate better in order for them to do their jobs effectively.

• Board reviews our customers’ feedback through the customer survey and reports on the same to

the Board.

• Sharper focus on a revised Company strategy has enabled the Executive Committee members to

focus on key messages and simple actions to drive better business performance.

• As appropriate, Board continues to review and receive specific reporting and presentations on

major business change programmes such as the Company’s transformation programme, along with

external advisers, to have the opportunity to directly ask questions of specialist advisers and subject

matter experts.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

63

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

63

Board activity in 2025

The Board maintains a comprehensive schedule of meetings

and a forward agenda to ensure its time is used most

effectively and efficiently. However, there is flexibility in

this programme, which is important to permit key items to

be added to any agenda, so that the Board can focus on

evolving and important matters at the most appropriate time.

This was specifically illustrated this year by the Board having

regular dedicated Board meetings and calls this year on the

acceleration of the Company’s transformation programme

and of its revisited strategy, with subsequent updates on the

transformation programme for the Board at all of its meetings

and calls thereafter.

Board agendas are structured carefully to facilitate

discussions and allocate appropriate time to all relevant

matters, and the agendas are agreed in advance by the

Interim Executive Chair, (along with the General Counsel &

Company Secretary).

A typical Board meeting will comprise the following elements:

• Reports from the Chairs of each of the Board Committees

on the proceedings of those meetings, including the key

discussion points and particular matters to bring to the

Board’s attention.

• Following every Employee Forum and ESG Committee,

a report on the topics discussed is presented by Karen

Hubbard to add further context at the Board meeting.

• Performance reports from the Executive Committee,

including: reports from the Chief Executive, Chief Finance

Officer, Chief People Officer, Sales Director and Chief

Transformation Officer.

• Deep dive reports into areas of particular strategic

importance, opportunities and risks, to evaluate

progress, provide insight and, where necessary, decide on

appropriate action.

• Legal and governance updates, including: Quarterly

Reports from the General Counsel & Company Secretary,

approval of delegated financial authorities across the

Group; approvals of various policies (such as ‘Speak Up’

Policy, Health & Safety Policy, Approval of the Anti-Slavery

and Human Trafficking Statement).

• Time is set aside at various meetings for the Chair to hold

an Independent Non-Executive Director only meeting,

(where it is considered appropriate, to provide the

opportunity for discussion on key matters without the

Executive Directors and management present).

• All of the Board also meet over dinner on a number of

occasions before certain Board meetings, also joined by

members of the Executive Committee, to enable Board

members and Executive Committee members to build a

rapport with each other and a relationship on a personal

level, share external views and consider issues impacting

the Group, resulting in better Board dynamics and

decision making.

Health &

Safety policy

Board reviews

and approves the

Company’s Health &

Safety policy

Review ERP Project Nexus

Board consider and approve

the pause to the ERP

replacement programme whilst

the business continues to focus

on key transformation activity

Strategy Day

Board receives

updates from our key

areas of the business

and its strategy for

each area

Transformation Programme

update

Board receives update of the

Company’s transformation

programme

March

August

September

December

6464

BOARD LEADERSHIP AND COMPANY PURPOSE

Strategy Day

Board receives update from

key areas of the business and

its strategy for each area

Independent Retail

Board receives update

from Independent Retailer

Leadership team and reviews

the sale and leaseback

proposal for its Tamworth site

Rayleigh site visit

Board visits its new warehouse site in

Rayleigh for a site visit shortly after

it became operational and receives

updates on its network strategy and

hears from its contracts leadership team

Buying &

supply chain

Board receives

update from the

Chief Buying Officer

Transformation

Programme

Board receives update

on its accelerated

transformation programme

and strategy review

Update on strategy

Board reviews the latest

feedback on its revised

strategy and progress

on accelerated

transformation actions

April May

July

October

November

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

65

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

65

Our Board is ultimately responsible for the strategy, management,

performance and long-term sustainable success of the Group.

It is the principal decision-making forum for the Group,

providing entrepreneurial leadership, both directly and

through its Committees and by delegating authority to the

Executive Team.

This responsibility includes: setting the Company’s purpose,

values and strategy; reviewing and promoting the desired

organisational culture; ensuring the necessary resources are

available to meet agreed objectives; and ensuring that all of

these elements are aligned. The Company’s business model

and strategy is detailed on pages 7 to 17.

Through the strong governance framework that it has in

place, the Board is able to deliver on its strategy of providing

strong sustainable financial and operational performance.

The Board is also accountable for ensuring that in carrying

out its duties the Group’s legal and regulatory obligations

are being met; and for ensuring that it operates within

appropriately established risk parameters.

Culture and colleagues

The Board is responsible for monitoring and assessing culture.

The Board does not have a single way to assess culture,

instead it draws on multiple sources to understand the way

colleagues feel about the Company. This is done through

formal and informal methods, through the outputs from the

Employee Forums and the reports of the Executive Team to

the Board. Please also see pages 62 and 63.

Colleagues are encouraged to incorporate the values and

behaviours into work every day to deliver our objectives,

together.

Karen Hubbard is the Independent Non-Executive Director

accountable for representing the voice of our colleagues in

Board meetings. Please see page 69 for feedback from Karen

on 2025 Employee Forums.

Work continues to enhance communication to ensure that

staff across the business, especially those more remotely

situated and any new colleagues are briefed on relevant

Company news, so they do not feel isolated. The Group-

wide intranet continues to be developed as a place for

colleagues to access all communication and information

about benefits and personal and financial wellbeing. In

addition to this, the following improvements have been during

the year; the sales conference was held off-site, the ongoing

leadership development programme, as well as the employee

engagement survey and specific senior leadership team

meetings to discuss the revised strategy and how everyone

can contribute to this.

The ‘Speak Up’ Policy (which continues to include an externally

managed helpline) which was launched in 2022 continued

to be in place during the year and this, together with a

well-established grievance policy, provides a mechanism

for colleagues to raise matters of concern more formally.

In addition, the Headlam Code of Ethics continues to be

issued to all new employees and is part of the new induction

programme. As well as reviewing People KPIs at the Board

and the outputs from the listening channels, the Board has

continued to influence and monitor Group culture in a number

of additional ways summarised below but please also see

pages 62 and 63 on how the Board assesses how its culture is

embedded in the Group:

• Increasing the focus on the health, safety and working

practices of our colleagues and reviewing key health

and safety performance indicators, please see page 33.

• Reviewing and revising remuneration structures for

senior management.

• Reviewing the progress of the implementation of the

People Strategy.

• Regular meetings with management and inviting

presentations at the Board and Committee meetings

from relevant managers and colleagues.

• Assessing other cultural indicators such as the attitude

to risk, the implementation and compliance with

Group-wide policies such as Anti-Corruption and

Bribery, Fraud and Money Laundering.

6666

BOARD LEADERSHIP AND COMPANY PURPOSE CONTINUED

Board Engagement with Stakeholders

Information on our stakeholder engagement and Section 172 Statement of the Strategic report on pages 18 to 20.

By understanding the interests and needs of all our stakeholders, the Board can take these views into account in Boardroom

discussions and decisions. The relevance of each stakeholder group may change depending on the issue under discussion.

The Board continued to develop its methods of engagement during the year and this work will be continued during 2025.

Our Colleagues

Board members engage with a wide variety of colleagues. Karen Hubbard is our

dedicated Employee Non-Executive Director and attends various Employee Forums.

See pages 32 to 34 for employee engagement

Our Customers

The Board receives customer insights through Board reports and strategy

presentations and from the Group Marketing Director and other members of the senior

management team.

Our Suppliers

Supplier relationships provide valuable insights through engagement with operations

teams and through the Interim Executive Chair and Chief Buying Officer.

See page 19 for supplier engagement

Our Shareholders

There is regular dialogue with our shareholders, especially following the revised strategy

announced on 11 November 2025.

See page 19 for shareholder engagement

Our Communities

and the Environment

It is important that we operate safely and sustainably and that we review the impact of

our operations on local communities and on the environment. The Board receives regular

updates on these activities.

Karen Hubbard is our dedicated ESG Non-Executive Director and attends the ESG Committee.

Further information can be found in our Sustainability Report on pages 26 to 45

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

67

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

67

Examples of how the Board considered the interests of its key stakeholders

when making decisions.

Project Nexus – ERP

Replacement Programme

During the year the Board made the

decision to pause the ERP replacement

programme. This was taken after

considering the competing priorities

for colleague time and attention

between the ERP programme and the

transformation plan. The Board also

recognised that the transformation plan

could have an impact on the design of

the new ERP. This could cause rework

of the ERP if the two programmes were

running concurrently; hence it was felt

appropriate to mitigate such a risk in

order to conserve resources.

Debt Refinancing

In January 2026 the Group announced

the completion of a refinancing of

its borrowing facilities. The decision

to launch the refinancing process

was taken by the Board during 2025

and then the final facility agreement

was approved in January 2026. In

commencing the refinancing in 2025

the Board reflected on the fact that the

prevailing facility was not due to expire

until October 2027, but that it was in

the interests of multiple stakeholders

to secure new financing well ahead of

that in order to provide reassurance

that the Group had access to borrowing

facilities throughout the period of

the transformation plan and beyond.

Furthermore, the prevailing facility had

required discussions with the lenders

every six months on covenants, which

was time-consuming and incurred fees.

Transformation programme

In response to challenging market conditions, with consumer spending on

home improvements in significant decline combined with heavy cost inflation

in recent years, the Board made the decision to launch a transformation

programme in 2024.

The objective of this was to make Headlam a more effective organisation and simplify the

Group’s offer to its customers, whilst also driving through efficiencies in working capital and asset

ownership in order to fund the changes needed. The Board continually review the progress of

the transformation plan and the wider strategic initiatives. The prevailing strategy had been to

offset cyclical market decline, and the impact of new entrants, with growth with larger customers

and through trade counter expansion in order to broaden the customer base. Whilst this strategy

had achieved growth in those newer customer groups, it had come at the expense of the core

customer group of independent retailers and contractors. Accordingly, and as a product of its

continual review of the performance of the business, the Board decided, in the second half of

2025, to make a change in leadership of the Group and to embark on a change in the strategic

direction. This change involves a more significant right-sizing of the business towards current

market volumes, rather than assuming a material cyclical recovery, as well as a refocus on the

independent retailers and contractors.

6868

BOARD LEADERSHIP AND COMPANY PURPOSE CONTINUED

Q

Describe the Employee Forum

and your role as designated

Non-Executive Director,

workforce engagement and

how it adds value to the Group?

Q

What have been your

highlights this year?

A

The Employee Forum is one of the ways we engage

with our colleagues. It provides the opportunity for

colleagues to meet with myself and senior members

of management on a regular basis, helping them

to stay connected to the strategy and direction of

the Company. It also provides the opportunity for

us to listen directly to what colleagues have to say

and hear about matters the Board is reviewing and

considering.

I also actively spend time with colleagues, without

management present, to give colleagues the

opportunity to provide feedback directly to

the Board.

As the nominated Non-Executive Director for

workplace engagement, I then provide this

feedback directly to the Board which helps us

all gain a better understanding of day-to-day

operations and insight into the implementation

of the transformation plans, and how that

impacts our colleagues. It also helps ensure the

Board understands how the Company’s culture is

embedded.

I continue to liaise with the Interim Chief People

Officer and support the Group in how it can

better communicate and engage with colleagues.

In addition, as a member of the Remuneration

Committee my insight is also very helpful in the

context of Executive pay.

A

I have once again been especially impressed by

the willingness of the forum members to raise issues

and confidently challenge business processes and

provide constructive insights.

Good progress has also been made this year in

getting communication to all levels, functions

and sites. I’ve been pleased to hear about

the improvements in the level and cascade of

communications across the Company, especially as

the Company implements its transformation plans.

I’ve also been pleased to see a good representation

at the Employee Forums of a workforce that is

diverse in terms of functions and also geographically

spread. I’m looking forward to seeing continued

improvements in 2026 as the format of the

Employee Forum is reviewed by senior management

and it continues to evolve as a successful way to

engage with our colleagues.

Karen Hubbard

Non-Executive Director nominated to

represent the employee voice at the Board

“ Pleased to hear directly

from our colleagues about

the continued improvement

in communications and

engagement this year.”

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

69

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

69

Q&A WITH KAREN HUBBARD

Board balance

As at 31 December 2025 the Board consisted of the Interim

Executive Chair, the Chief Financial Officer, the Senior

Independent Director and two further Non-Executive

Directors.

As such, at least half the Board, (excluding the Interim

Executive Chair and the Chief Financial Officer), were Non-

Executive Directors in accordance with the Code during

the year.

The Board undertook a review of the size and balance of

the Board and confirmed that it was appropriate to meet

the business and operational objectives. Further information

on the changes to the Board in 2025 can be found in the

Nomination Committee report on page 86.

Decisions are made by the Board following detailed

consideration of the items under review and no one

individual or small group of individuals dominate the

Board’s decision-making.

The Board operates within a corporate governance

framework designed to support the achievement of

long-term sustainable success. The Board has overall

responsibility for setting the Group’s strategy and setting

objectives for the business, taking into account the risk

appetite of the business. The Board has a formal schedule

of matters reserved for its approval and then delegates

responsibilities to its committees and management. The list of

the key matters considered by the Board in 2025 can be found

on page 75.

The schedule of matters reserved for the Board has

been reviewed and is available from the Governance

section of the Company’s website, www.headlam.com.

It includes matters relating to strategy and management,

structure and capital, financial reporting and controls,

risk management and internal controls, contracts, Board

membership and delegation of authority, acquisitions and

risk management. An overview of the main duties, roles

and responsibilities of the Board are also available on the

Company’s website.

The Statement of the Responsibilities of the Chair, Chief

Executive and Senior Independent Director has been

reviewed and is also available on the Company’s website.

Board at a Glance

Gender representation

as at 31 December 2025

Board Independence

as at 31 December 2025

Board Director tenure

as at 31 December 2025

3

2

Interim Executive Chair 1

Executive Directors 1

Independent Non-Executive

Directors (including the

Senior Independent Director)

3

Adam Phillips

Jemima Bird

Robin Williams

Karen Hubbard

Stephen Bird

7.4

4.4

3.5

3.3

3.3

2.9

Male

Female

7070

DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES

Non-Executive Chair (pre 3 October 2025)

The Non-Executive Chair leads the Board and sets the

cultural tone from the top. He ensures high standards

of corporate governance are maintained. He is

responsible, with the Board, for understanding the

views of all key stakeholders and ensuring they are

considered in all decision-making. He ensures that all

Directors are able to participate in discussions and

constructive challenge and to promote effective

communication between the Executive and Non-

Executive Directors. The Non-Executive Chair led the

annual Board effectiveness review and ensures any

new Directors have a tailored induction.

General Counsel & Company Secretary

The General Counsel & Company Secretary is secretary to the Board and its Committees. The role is to support the

Chair and Chief Executive in fulfilling their duties particularly in relation to induction, training and Board effectiveness

evaluations. In addition, she supports the Non-Executive Directors and provides updates to the Board and advice on

corporate governance and compliance matters.

Chief Executive

The Chief Executive leads the Group and ensures the

delivery of its commercial objectives, whilst ensuring

that operational policies and practices are driving the

appropriate behaviour in line with the desired culture.

He proposes and develops the Group’s strategy in

consultation with the Executive Team, the Chair and

the Board and leads the communication programme

with all key stakeholders including employees. They are

responsible for overseeing Group health and safety

and diversity initiatives and ensuring the Board has all

the information it requires.

Senior Independent Director

In addition to their role as a Non-Executive Director,

They act as a sounding board for the Chair and

acts as an intermediary for other Directors when

necessary. They are available to shareholders where

communication through the Chair or Executive

Directors may not seem appropriate and to provide

additional support in resolving significant issues. They

are also responsible for leading the effectiveness

evaluation of the Chair and discussions regarding

the term of appointment and fees of the Chair. From

3 October Jemima Bird as Senior Independent Director

also supported the Interim Executive Chair and in doing

so carried out some elements of the Non-Executive

Chair role.

Chief Financial Officer

The Chief Financial Officer is responsible for bringing the

commercial and financial perspective to the Boardroom.

He is responsible for managing the Group’s finance

function and ensuring that the appropriate financial

support and processes are in place to support the

implementation of the Group’s strategy. He oversees

and supports the relationship with the investment

community and shareholders. He chairs the Executive

Risk Committee which oversees the Group’s risk profile

and risk management process. From 3 October, the Chief

Financial Officer carried out some elements of the Chief

Executive role to support the Interim Executive Chair.

Independent Non-Executive Directors

The role of the Independent Non-Executive Director

is to provide strategic and specialist guidance with

effective and constructive challenge. They critically

assess the strategy and scrutinise the performance of

management in meeting agreed goals and objectives

within the risk and control framework set by the Board.

They ensure all stakeholders are considered in the

decision-making process. They have a prime role in

succession planning and setting appropriate levels of

remuneration for the Executive Directors and senior

management team.

Board and Committee Structure as at 31 December 2025

Interim Executive Chair (from 3 October 2025)

After Chris Payne stepped down on 3 October 2025,

Stephen Bird assumed the role of Interim Executive Chair

whilst a search for Chris’ successor was undertaken.

Stephen fulfilled elements of the Chief Executive roles.

However, the Board naturally increased the governance

oversight and frequency of Board meetings and calls

to collate feedback and oversight over the Executive

Committee and the Company’s performance, including

presentations and information validated by external

advisers to the Board to maintain an independent

overview as and where appropriate.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

71

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

71

Committee attendance

Membership of the Board and its Committees and attendance at meetings held during the year ended 31 December 2025.

Board

Nomination

Committee

Audit

Committee

Remuneration

Committee

Keith Edelman 1/15 1/4 – –

Chris Payne 12/15 – – 2/4

Stephen Bird 14/15 3/4 4/4 3/4

Jemima Bird 15/15 4/4 4/4 4/4

Karen Hubbard 15/15 4/4 4/4 4/4

Robin Williams 15/15 4/4 4/4 4/4

Adam Phillips 15/15 – – –

The numbers in the table above confirm how many meetings each Director attended and the total each was eligible to attend during the year.

Nomination

Committee

To monitor the

size, diversity and

composition of the Board

and its Committees

and ensure a formal,

rigorous and transparent

procedure for the

appointment of new

Directors and to plan for

succession. To take an

active role in monitoring

the Company’s diversity

strategy and approach

and monitoring its

effectiveness.

See page 86 to

read more

Audit

Committee

To assist the Board in

fulfilling its obligations

relating to the Group’s

financial reporting

practices, internal control

and risk management

framework, and its

external audit and other

assurance processes.

See page 78 to

read more

Executive Risk

Committee

Meets quarterly

to evaluate and

propose policies and

processes to current

and emerging risks.

Remuneration

Committee

To determine and agree

the remuneration policy

for Executive Directors

and Executive Team, and

to monitor and report

on it. To review wider

workforce remuneration

and related policies

in accordance with

the Code.

See page 92 to

read more

Disclosure

Committee

Meets as required

to assist the Board

in discharging its

responsibilities in

relation to the control of

inside information and

obligations under the

Market Abuse Regulation.

Group Board

7272

DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES CONTINUED

ESG

Committee

The Committee generally

meets quarterly to

further develop the

Sustainability Strategy

and to monitor progress

towards achieving the

agreed commitments.

However, due to business

need the Committee

met twice in 2025 but still

seeks to embed good

sustainability practices

across the Group and is

attended by a group of

leaders from across the

business.

For more

information

on the

Sustainability

strategy see

page 26

Employee

Forum

The Employee Forum

seeks to allow colleagues

to express and discuss

their views on any

issue, and provides

an opportunity for

them to influence and

develop a more inclusive

working environment.

The Employee Forum

meets quarterly.

There are additional

check in meetings

between the formal

meetings attended

by Employee Forum

representatives only.

For more

information on

Employee Forum

see page 69

Group

Executive

Team

The Executive Team

meets every month to

develop and monitor

strategy, operational

plans and procedures

and to ensure financial

performance against the

budget is monitored. The

Executive Committee

assesses and controls

risk and prioritises and

allocated resources

to deliver the strategy.

Group health and safety

is now monitored during

each Executive Team

monthly meeting.

See page 10

onwards and 33

Board roles and responsibilities

All Directors share collective responsibility for the activities

of the Board; the long-term success of the business and its

impact on stakeholders and the wider society. The Board

roles are constructed to ensure a clear distinction between

leadership of the Board and the executive leadership of the

business. Specific Board roles are outlined in the table on

page 71.

Board Committees and delegation

Various operational matters and decisions have been

delegated to Board or management committees.

The Company has long-established Audit, Disclosure,

Nomination and Remuneration Committees which, oversee

and debate important issues of policy and assist the Board in

attending to its responsibilities.

Terms of reference for the Audit, Nomination and

Remuneration Committees have been reviewed during the

year and are available on the Governance section of the

Company’s website.

The Executive Directors are responsible for the detailed

implementation of the strategic decisions of the Board. The

Non-Executive Directors are responsible for evaluating and

challenging management’s proposals and their mix of skills

and experience bring a broader perspective to the Board’s

dialogue and decision-making process.

Independence

The Company recognises the importance of its

Non-Executive Directors remaining independent of executive

management in character and judgement, in order for them

to effectively support and challenge management. The

Board considered the independence of the Non-Executive

Directors and, taking into account the Board’s review of the

Conflicts of Interests register, consider that three remain

independent in character and judgement and free from any

business or other relationship that could materially interfere

with the exercise of independent and objective judgement.

None of the circumstances outlined in the Code that may

impair, or could appear to impair, independence apply in

the case of any Non-Executive Director. Stephen Bird was

considered independent upon appointment to the Board and

upon appointment as Non-Executive Chair. Jemima Bird was

considered independent upon her appointment to the Board

and upon her appointment as Senior Independent Director on

27 February 2025 and throughout 2025 and continues to be

considered as independent notwithstanding the additional

support which Jemima has provided the Company since

3 October 2025 to support the Interim Executive Chair whilst

searches for successors for certain management roles were

undertaken.

The Board considered Jemima independent because the

additional time commitment was exceptional in nature and

temporary, the remuneration (i.e. a fixed fee which was not

performance or share price linked) should be considered

to be an increase in her Director’s fee, rather than as

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

73

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

73

Group Chief Executive

additional remuneration, the payment of additional fees is

consistent with the current Directors’ Remuneration Policy

and the amounts paid are not outside of market norms if

converted to a per day rate and Jemima remained a Non-

Executive Director (i.e. she has not become a employee of

the Company). The Board has met more frequently to have

more oversight and receives third-party presentations and

data to maintain an independent evaluation of matters being

presented by management.

The Senior Independent Director is available to shareholders

if they have concerns which are not resolved through the

normal channels of the Chair, Chief Executive or Chief

Financial Officer, or for which such contact is inappropriate.

The Non-Executive Chair and Non-Executive Directors do not

participate in any bonus, share option or pension scheme of

the Company, nor are they subject to minimum shareholding

requirements. They are initially appointed for a three-year

term and, subject to review and re-election by shareholders,

can serve up to a maximum of three such terms.

In line with the Code, all Board members seeking re-election

stand for re-election by shareholders annually at the AGM,

(neither Keith Edelman who left in 2025 or Adam Phillips who

leaves shortly in 2026 will stand for re-election).

Board activity in 2025

Board meetings provide the forum for the debate, review and

challenge of strategic, operational and governance matters,

please also see pages 64, 65 and 75.

The Board had 15 meetings during the year to discuss the

latest operating and financial information, key strategic

items, additional deep dives into specific items and other

topics requiring discussion or decision. The agenda has strong

links to the strategic objectives of the Group and is set via a

collaborative process between the Interim Executive Chair

and the General Counsel & Company Secretary. Sufficient

time is allocated to each item to ensure effective discussion.

Standing agenda items include updates from the Interim

Executive Chair, Chief Financial Officer, and Interim Chief

People Officer on trading matters, health and safety, people

and financial reports. The annual Board work programme

ensures that the view of all stakeholders, including employees,

suppliers, customers and shareholders are taken into

consideration. This ensures that the Directors discharge their

duties including those under section 172(1) of the Companies

Act 2006. Further detail on stakeholders can be found on

pages 18 to 20.

Board papers are issued where possible, five working days

prior to each meeting to allow adequate consideration of

the matters to be discussed. The Board’s meeting agenda is

structured to ensure sufficient time is given to each item under

consideration.

For further information on strategy see page 12

The Board receives an update from the General Counsel &

Company Secretary on a quarterly basis including updates

on matters of corporate governance. Matters requiring

attention between these quarterly updates are shared at

the next meeting, or between meetings as required. The

Board performs deep dives into areas of importance such

as sales, buying, ecommerce and digital, and conducts post

implementation reviews of key capital projects.

7474

DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES CONTINUED

Strategy and management

• Review of Group strategy and

priorities

• Review of organisation

structure to deliver the

strategy and the resources

required

• Consideration of the

operational strategy to

deliver the strategic goals

• Deep dives into strategic

areas, including ERP

replacement programme

• Sale and leaseback of the

Tamworth distribution centre

• Oversight of the strategy

refresh announced in

November 2025

• Considered the impact

of Company culture on

initiatives and projects

See page 12 to read more

on Strategy

Internal controls and

risk management

• Consideration of the

effectiveness of the internal

audit function

• Completed an assessment

of the Company’s emerging

and principal risks and risk

appetite

• Monitored health and

safety performance and

implementation of continual

improvements to procedures

• Monitored the ongoing

implementation of

recommendations arising out

of IT security

• Received a presentation

from the appointed Health &

Safety Director

See page 46 on risk

management

Financial and

performance reporting

• Review of the trading

performance and the

approval of the Company’s

annual and half-year results

• Approval of the Company’s

dividend policy

• Reviewed the Company’s

capital allocation priorities

• Reviewed and approved the

Company’s 2025 and 2026

budget, forecasts and key

performance targets

• Long-term viability

statement, and time frame

over which it should be

considered

• Approved the UK Tax strategy

See page 51 for long-term

viability statement

ESG and stakeholder

engagement

• Interacted with shareholders

and the wider investment

community

• Reviewed investor relations

programme and feedback

provided by the Company’s

investors, stockbrokers and

financial PR agency plus

reports on investor roadshows

• Received progress updates on

ESG Committee activity

• Received feedback from the

Supplier Conference

See page 26 for

Sustainability report

People

• Approval of the appointment

of Stephen Bird (as Interim

Executive Chair with effect

from 3 October)

• Executive Committee

succession planning

• Consideration of health

and safety

• Consideration of Group

diversity

• Gender pay gap reporting

• Modern slavery reporting

• Employee share grants and

long service awards

See pages 32 to 35, 62, 63

and 88 on culture,

colleague engagement and

diversity

Governance and culture

• Participated in and reviewed

the results of an externally

facilitated Board and

Committee evaluation

• Approved the terms of

reference of each Board

Committee

• Reviewed and approved the

Board’s principal policies

• Reviewed the Company’s

Register of Conflicts

• Approved the Company’s

Anti-Corruption and Bribery

policy, procedures on gifts

and hospitality, Fraud and

Anti-Money Laundering policy

and Speak Up policy

• Received and considered

reports on compliance

with financial, regulatory,

corporate responsibility and

environmental commitments

Key highlights of the Board discussions during the year under review are outlined.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

75

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

75

Outside the Boardroom

Throughout the year the Board undertook

site visits across the business.

In April they visited the Rayleigh distribution centre which

included a tour of the site as well as presentations from site

management on the performance and opportunities for

the business (including health and safety performance). The

Board also meets and speaks with a variety of employees

during these visits.

In addition the Directors undertook further site and customer

visits, which allowed an additional opportunity to discuss

areas relevant to the customers and the Board and meet a

variety of customer managers and employees.

The Interim Executive Chair is kept up to date about emerging

issues through regular interaction with the Chief Financial

Officer and other members of the Executive Committee.

All this activity allows the development of a deeper

understanding of the Company and to ask questions about

any specific areas of interest. This improves the constructive

challenge at Board meetings.

The Chair and Non-Executive Directors schedule meetings

without the Executive Management present to allow

an opportunity to discuss the operation of the Board

and any areas for consideration are fed back to the

Executive Directors.

The Senior Independent Director also held a meeting of

the Non-Executive Directors without management or the

Chair present.

Risk management

The Board has overall responsibility for Group’s system of

risk management and internal control and for reviewing its

effectiveness and is supported in this regard by the Audit

Committee and the Executive Risk Committee.

Emerging risks are considered by the Board at least annually.

Further information on the Company’s approach to risk

management is available in the Strategic report on page 7

and in the Audit Committee report on page 78.

A description of the risks identified, together with details of

how they are managed or mitigated, is set out on pages 46

to 50.

The Audit Committee, on behalf of the Board, monitors the

Company’s system of risk management and internal control

with papers from the Executive Risk Committee at each of its

meetings, and conducts a review of its effectiveness at least

once a year.

Board induction and training

The process for identifying and evaluating new candidates

for Board positions has been delegated to the Nomination

Committee under its terms of reference. Once a preferred

candidate has been identified they are recommended to the

Board for appointment. Further information on this process is

outlined below.

Induction

Upon joining, each new Director receives a tailored induction

programme relevant to their experience, expertise and

committee membership. Particular emphasis is placed on the

new Director visiting several operating locations and businesses

and meeting the associated senior managers and colleagues to

aid with deep understanding of the Group’s business operations

and the day-to-day challenges facing the business. The Director

is also able to accompany a salesperson and a driver for a day

to help develop an all-round understanding of the roles and the

challenges faced at all levels of the organisation.

An induction programme will typically include briefings

on strategy and other matters, site visits, and one-to-one

meetings with senior colleagues, including other Directors and

each member of the Executive Team, in addition to advisers

such as the Company’s stockbrokers and auditor. Briefings

are included on health and safety, investor and workforce

engagement, culture, governance and risk.

Meetings will also be scheduled with each Committee Chair

and relevant advisers.

A comprehensive information pack is provided which includes

(but is not limited to):

• Background information about the Group and current

strategy documents;

• Board and Committee minutes and meeting procedures;

• Group policies;

• Matters reserved for the Board and Committee terms

of reference;

• Financial budgets;

• Shareholder and other stakeholder feedback;

• Customer insights; and

• Relevant industry and financial reports.

Training and development

All Directors are considered to be suitably qualified, trained

and experienced so as to be able to participate fully in the

work of the Board. To assist with the independent conduct of

their function and, if required, in connection with their duties,

a process is in place for the Non-Executive Directors to obtain

professional advice at the Company’s expense.

The Directors keep their knowledge and skills up to date

and have the opportunity to discuss areas for development

with the Chair. Virtual seminars and on-line courses run by

professional bodies on various commercial, operational and

regulatory matters were attended by the Directors as part of

their ongoing development .

As required, professional advisers are invited to the Board

meetings to provide in-depth updates and the Board also

receives updates on environmental, employee and governance

issues as appropriate. The General Counsel & Company

Secretary provides regular updates on regulatory matters.

Presentations at the Board during 2025 have covered ESG

updates, cybersecurity, investor views, customer insight,

and market remuneration and policy trends. In addition,

the General Counsel & Company Secretary provides regular

updates on developments in Corporate Governance.

The Non-Executive Directors further enhance their

understanding and knowledge of the business and culture

by spending time with the Executive Directors, the Executive

Team, other senior management and colleagues.

7676

DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES CONTINUED

Board evaluation

Progress during 2025 versus actions identified as part of the prior year’s Board evaluation (2024)

Customer

Continued Board engagement

with Executive team Meetings

Actions

identified in

2024

To ensure that the Board

continued to understand the

Company’s different customer

segments it was agreed that

each of the Board members

would contact and/or visit

different customer types to gain

further insight.

To ensure the continued

dialogue and engagement

between Executive team

members and individual

Board members outside of the

Boardroom to get the benefit of

the Board Directors’ experiences

and input into the Company’s

strategy and its implementation.

It was agreed that the Board

would continue with a recent

practice of each Non-Executive

Director providing direct

feedback at the end of each

meeting for the benefit of the

Executive Directors to share with

the Executive team members.

Progress

made in 2025

The Board completed this and

met with different customers

during the year.

The Board continued to engage

with the Executive team on

an individual and collective

basis to further understand the

challenges the Company faces

which enabled the Board to take

urgent action to accelerate the

transformation programme and

revise its strategy.

The Board has embedded this

feedback approach at each

meeting which has worked well

to capture consistent points for

Executive team members.

2025 Board evaluation

The Code recommends that there should be a formal and

rigorous annual evaluation of the performance of the Board

and its Committees and that this process is externally

facilitated at least every three years. The Board undertook

an externally facilitated self-evaluation in 2025 with Telos

Partners.

The evaluation noted the positive performance of the Board

in several areas and highlighted areas, which would benefit

from further improvement.

The Board discussed the report and agreed actions to take

forward based on the suggestions in the report.

Performance review of the Chair

(and Interim Executive Chair) during

the financial year

The Senior Independent Director (Jemima Bird), following

results of the Board evaluation and consultation with other

Directors, provided feedback to Stephen Bird as the Chair

and Interim Executive Chair on his own performance. The

review noted that the Chair had strengthened relationships

between the Board and the Management Team, with a more

collaborative leadership and approach, allowing full member

participation in meetings. In addition, given the Company’s

performance a directive-led approach with the Management

Team was deemed appropriate and would receive periodic

reviews as business context evolves. Please see the Nomination

Committee report on pages 78 to 85 on how it ensured that

the Company continues to have the most effective Board

composition and combination of skills to support the delivery of

the acceleration of the Company’s strategy.

Individual Director performance

reviews during the financial year

As part of the annual effectiveness review of the Directors,

the Chair provided feedback to each Director on their own

performance and discussed training and development

opportunities.

Following the results of the evaluation and the relevant

performance reviews described in this section, the Board

confirms that all Directors, including the current Chair

of the Board, continue to be effective and demonstrate

commitment to the role, including dedicating sufficient time

to attend all necessary meetings and to carry out all other

duties required of them.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

77

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

77

COMPOSITION, SUCCESSION

AND EVALUATION

Statement from the Chair

of the Audit Committee

On behalf of the Board, I am

pleased to present the Audit

Committee’s report for the

year ended 31 December

2025.

This report outlines the Audit

Committee’s ongoing role in providing

robust challenge and oversight of the

Group’s financial reporting, internal

controls, and risk management.

The macroeconomic and industry

headwinds commented upon last year

have persisted through the year, which

has created externally driven challenges.

These have been compounded

by certain adverse unintended

consequences of the strategy that the

Group had been pursuing and which

was revised during the year. The Audit

Committee has continued to monitor

closely for the potential impact of these

challenges on the Group.

Membership and

meetings

The Audit Committee comprises

Stephen Bird, Jemima Bird, Karen

Hubbard and myself. All members are

independent Non-Executive Directors,

except for a period of time, when

Stephen Bird and Jemima Bird took on

executive duties following the departure

of the CEO in October 2025, bringing

a broad range of relevant experience

that enables effective challenge

and thorough analysis of the matters

considered. Further details of the

Committee members’ experience can

be found in the Directors’ biographies

on pages 60 and 61. Information on

the remuneration of Audit Committee

members is set out in the Report on

Directors’ Remuneration on page 106.

The Audit Committee met four times

during the year in scheduled meetings

aligned to the annual programme of

business and the financial reporting cycle.

Meetings are held shortly before Board

meetings to facilitate effective and timely

reporting, with the Chair of the Audit

Committee providing a verbal update to

the Board following each meeting.

The Chief Executive/Executive

Chair, Chief Financial Officer, and

representatives of the external auditor

attend Audit Committee meetings at

the invitation of the Committee Chair.

The Director of Group Finance, the Head

of Internal Audit, and other members

of senior management attend as

appropriate. During the year, the Audit

Committee also held meetings with the

external auditor without management

present and, separately, with the Head

of Internal Audit. In addition, I meet

regularly with the Lead Audit Partner

outside the formal meeting schedule

and maintain ongoing contact with the

Chief Financial Officer and the Head of

Internal Audit.

The Company Secretary acts as

Secretary to the Audit Committee.

In addition to formal meetings,

Audit Committee members met with

members of the operational and

finance teams, as well as other senior

management, during the year.

Main role and key

responsibilities

The Audit Committee is appointed by

the Board and operates under written

terms of reference (available in the

investors section at www.headlam.com).

At the start of the year the Audit

Committee agreed its priority areas of

focus for 2025. These are set out in the

table below along with a summary of

the progress the Audit Committee has

made on these priorities.

“ The Audit Committee has continued to

closely monitor the impact of market

conditions, and the transformation plan,

on the Group’s significant accounting

matters and key judgements.”

Robin Williams

Chair of the Audit Committee

Key responsibilities:

• Monitoring the integrity of the

Group’s financial statements

and results announcements

and any other published

financial information and

significant financial reporting

issues and judgements, as well

as other required disclosures.

• Reviewing the adequacy and

effectiveness of the Group’s

internal controls and risk

management systems.

• Approving the activities,

reviewing the findings and

assessing the effectiveness

of the Group’s internal audit

function.

• Recommending the external

auditor appointment;

assessing audit quality and

effectiveness; assessing

independence, objectivity

and approving fees; and

monitoring non-audit services.

7878

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

Key areas of focus Progress made

Preparation for

compliance with the UK

Corporate Governance

Code reform including

readiness for the required

Director’s Declaration in

respect of the year ended

31 December 2026

Preparations for compliance progressed well

during the year. A dry run of the controls and areas

underpinning the Declaration was performed in

2025.

Whilst the key remediation focus is on material

controls, attention is also given to key controls

which form part of our internal control

environment assessment.

Continued oversight

and challenge of the

impact of the Group’s

transformation plan

on financial reporting

and on significant

judgements and

estimates

The impact of the transformation plan has been

assessed as part of the half year process on

significant judgements and estimates, including

bad debt and stock provisioning as well as going

concern.

Oversight of financial

control implications of

the new ERP

The Finance team have been heavily involved in

shaping the design of the new system, including

the incorporation of the required controls. The new

system is defined in a master document called

‘Day In The Life’.

The Board carefully discussed the considerations as

to whether or not to pause the implementation of

the new ERP system, ultimately deciding to pause

it. Prior to that decision the project team had been

building towards doing walk throughs of each

of the key processes for the Executive team and

certain members of the Audit Committee.

Assessing impact of

macroeconomic and

trading environment

on the Group’s

accounting judgements

and estimates (e.g.

impairment, going

concern, etc.)

The macroeconomic impact and trading

environment has also been considered in the

half year process on significant judgements and

estimates, notably in the 3 year plan roll forward

and going concern assessment.

Consideration of

emerging risks, including

through a facilitated

workshop

The Risk Committee undertook a facilitated

workshop in 2024 and this was envisaged to be

repeated in 2025, with the Audit Committee.

However, given other business priorities in light of

business performance, this will be covered by the

Audit Committee during 2026. Consideration of

emerging risks has, nonetheless, continued during

the year.

How the Committee

spent its time

Financial Reporting 30%

External Audit 30%

Internal Controls and Risk 25%

Governance 15%

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

79

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

79

Activities of the Audit Committee during the year

The key activities of the Audit Committee in discharging its principal areas of responsibility are outlined below

External Audit

• Approved the external audit plan, scope, materiality,

and the audit fee.

• Reviewed audit findings, including private meetings

with the external Auditor, and assessed auditor

independence and effectiveness.

• Oversight of the audit tender process concluding in

the recommendation to reappoint PwC.

Governance

• Reviewed and approved the Audit Committee’s

terms of reference, annual programme of work and

key governance policies.

• Considered matters relating to modern slavery and

human trafficking and received updates on relevant

corporate governance developments.

Going concern and viability reporting

• Reviewed financial modelling supporting the going

concern assessment.

• Considered the viability assessment and scenario

analysis underpinning the long-term viability

statement.

Financial reporting

• Reviewed the interim and annual financial

statements, including significant accounting

judgements, estimates and risk disclosures.

• Considered the effectiveness of processes to ensure

the Annual Report and Accounts are fair, balanced

and understandable.

• Assessed the impact of macroeconomic and

trading conditions, and the transformation plan,

on accounting judgements, disclosures and

liquidity, and reviewed the going concern basis of

preparation.

• Considered the external Auditor’s findings and

management’s responses, and approved the Audit

Committee Report for inclusion in the Annual Report

and Accounts.

Internal controls and Risk

• Approved the internal audit charter and plan and

reviewed reports on the effectiveness of internal

controls and risk management.

• Supported the Board in its review of principal and

emerging risks and related disclosures.

• Oversight of the preparation for compliance with the

Director’s Declaration in respect of the year ended

31 December 2026.

8080

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Significant financial reporting issues and areas of estimate and judgement

The Audit Committee received and discussed reports and recommendations from management and the Auditor setting out the

significant issues and areas of judgement and estimation.

Significant issues and areas of

estimate and judgement How they were addressed

Supplier arrangements

The Group has a significant number

of rebate agreements with suppliers.

These agreements can contain multiple

terms or tiered arrangements based on

the volume of goods purchased. The

majority of these rebates are paid to the

Group after the year-end, meaning that

there is typically a significant rebate

receivable at the year-end balance

sheet date.

Management explained to the Audit Committee the process of calculating the

amounts expected to be received and confirming these balances with suppliers

and discussed the assumptions made in the calculations. The Audit Committee

challenged the assumptions used by management and reviewed the level of cash

receipts and credit notes received after the year-end.

The work of the external auditor in relation to supplier rebates was discussed by

the Audit Committee.

Based on this, the Audit Committee was satisfied that the amounts recognised

have been appropriately scrutinised and that the assumptions upon which the

calculation was based are sufficiently robust.

Non-underlying items

The Group accounting policy for

non-underlying items states that

performance measures will be

presented which exclude items which

are associated with the acquisition of

businesses and other items which by

virtue of their nature, size and expected

frequency, warrant separate additional

disclosure in the financial statements

in order to fully understand the

underlying performance of the Group.

Management must exercise judgement

in deciding whether items should be

treated as non-underlying by reference

to this policy.

The Audit Committee considered the presentation of non-underlying items in

accordance with the Group accounting policy. This year the non-underlying items

included income of £6.2 million in respect of the profit on disposal of properties,

and expenses of £36.3 million comprising: £1.1 million of amortisation of intangibles

and other acquisition-related expenses, £4.8 million impairment of assets, £23.2

million business restructuring and change-related costs, £5.6 million ERP system

development, and £1.6 million provision relating to legal claim.

The Audit Committee received reports from management and the Auditor,

outlining the judgements applied including consideration of materiality. The Audit

Committee also considered whether the Annual Report and Accounts was fair,

balanced and understandable and challenged management’s designation of

items as non-underlying. The Audit Committee concluded that the disclosure of

non-underlying items was sufficient and appropriate for the user of the accounts

to understand the nature of the items and reason for their treatment as non-

underlying.

Carrying value of

non-current assets and

recoverability of investments in

subsidiaries

The Group had £7.6 million of goodwill

allocated on its balance sheet at 31

December 2025, resulting from past

acquisitions, along with intangible

assets, property, plant and equipment

and right-of-use assets. Furthermore,

the Company’s investments in

subsidiaries are £12.6 million. The

assessment of the recoverable amount

of these assets are estimated based on

future cashflows and any impairment

has the potential to be material.

Management performed the annual impairment review of goodwill, along with

impairment reviews for other groups of assets at both June 2025 and December

2025 where indicators of impairment were identified. The key assumptions used

in an impairment review are the level of revenue growth, gross margin and the

discount rate.

Management concluded that an impairment of £4.8 million was necessary during

2025, in respect of the Melrose cash generating unit, as described in note 10.

Management also assessed the recoverability of the Company’s investment in

its subsidiaries and an impairment of £83.8 million was recorded. This was driven

by an increase in debt in HFD Limited and the reduced value in use of cash flow

projections as a result of the Group’s transformation plan, which, whilst providing

a clear line of sight to return to profitability, is based on a smaller business and

hence the absolute profit in the long term projections has changed compared to

previous impairment assessments.

The Audit Committee considered the impairment reviews carried out by

management and discussed the basis of the key assumptions and the sensitivities

performed. The Audit Committee also considered the external auditors’ findings

and discussed this matter with the external auditors. Based on this the Audit

Committee was satisfied that the approach taken by management was robust

and that the assumptions made were reasonable.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

81

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

81

Significant issues and areas of

estimate and judgement How they were addressed

Recoverability of deferred tax

assets

A net deferred tax asset of £8.2m has

been recognised in respect of tax losses

Over the last two years the Group’s deferred tax assets in respect of tax losses

have increased. In determining whether it is appropriate to recognise deferred tax

assets management is required to consider whether there are sufficient deferred

tax liabilities against which to offset these deferred tax assets and, where this is

not the case, to satisfy itself that there are sufficient taxable profits projected in

order to utilise these losses in an appropriate timeframe.

Management has assessed future trading forecasts and has concluded that the

deferred tax assets recognised will be recoverable using estimated future taxable

income over a five year period to 2030 based on approved business plans for the

Group up to 2029 with 2030 assumed to be in line with 2029. The directors have

not deemed it appropriate to estimate future taxable income past 2030 given

the unreliability of using estimating data past this point. The losses can be carried

forward indefinitely and have no expiry date.

The Committee considered management’s assessment and its projections, after

which the Committee concurred with management’s view that it was appropriate

to recognise the deferred tax assets

Provision for legal claim

The Group has recognised a provision of

£1.6m in respect of a health and safety

offence in 2022

The legal claims provision relates to one of the Company’s subsidiaries, MCD

Group Limited, which is being prosecuted by a local authority for a health and

safety offence relating to an accident at one of the Group’s sites, previously

disclosed in our 2022 Annual Report. MCD Group Limited has pleaded guilty to the

offence and awaits sentencing.

There is significant uncertainty in estimating the level of fine that may be

imposed. The Committee considered management’s assessment, as well as

external input, including with reference to sentencing guidelines. The Committee

concurred with the provision of £1.6 million recognised, being the best estimate at

the current time.

Going Concern

In determining the appropriate basis of

preparation of the financial statements

the Directors are required to consider

whether the Group can continue in

operational existence for a period no

shorter than 12 months from the date of

approval of the financial statements

The Audit Committee assessed management’s going concern analysis, which

included forecasts of a base case scenario and a severe but plausible downside

scenario, and covenant compliance and liquidity headroom in those scenarios.

Particular attention was given to assumptions relating to revenue, transformation

plan initiatives, cash inflows from property disposals and working capital

optimisation, and the availability of committed borrowing facilities.

The Audit Committee challenged these assumptions and reviewed the mitigating

actions available, including those that are in the Group’s control and those

that are not. The Audit Committee noted that the Group was compliant with

covenants in both the base case and the downside scenarios. Having considered

the analysis and the disclosures proposed in the financial statements, the Audit

Committee concluded that it is appropriate to prepare the financial statements

on a going concern basis. The Audit Committee also noted that, whilst the

transformation plan is anticipated to result in a reduction in Net Debt, there

are cash inflows in the projections (specifically, property disposals) that are not

wholly within the Group’s control. Accordingly, the Committee concurred that

those particular circumstances represent a material uncertainty which has been

disclosed in the financial statements.

8282

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Internal audit

The Group has a Head of Internal Audit, who provides regular

reports to the Audit Committee at each meeting. During the

year, the function delivered the approved internal audit plan,

which was developed with reference to the Group’s principal

risks.

The Audit Committee also receives assurance from a range

of other sources, including internal control reviews carried

out by the Group finance team and additional management

reporting. This includes a consolidated overview of assurance

activities across the Group, together with internal self-

certification reports covering compliance with regulatory

requirements and Group policies.

The internal audit function will continue to develop in line with

the Group’s strategy, focusing on assessing the effectiveness

of risk management processes, policies, procedures, systems

and key controls. Management considers recommendations

arising from internal audit reviews, with progress against

agreed actions monitored by Internal Audit and reported to

the Audit Committee on an ongoing basis.

The Audit Committee remains satisfied with the independence

and effectiveness of the internal audit function. The Head

of Internal Audit reports directly to the Chair of the Audit

Committee, with an administrative reporting line to the Chief

Executive, and holds no other operational responsibilities, in

accordance with the Institute of Internal Auditors’ Code of

Practice.

Private sessions between the Audit Committee and the Head

of Internal Audit are held twice annually, with additional

meetings between the Head of Internal Audit and the

Committee Chair taking place at least quarterly.

External auditor

Non-audit services

The Audit Committee has reviewed its policy for the provision

of non-audit services (‘Non-Audit Policy’) within the last 12

months. Under the Non-Audit Policy and in line with FRC’s

Ethical Standard, non-audit fees paid to the external auditor

should not exceed 70% of the average audit fee for the

preceding three periods.

During the year, no non-audit services were provided by the

Auditor and therefore no fees were paid to the Auditor for

non-audit services. The general policy is that the external

auditor must not carry out any non-audit services. The Group’s

statutory auditor will only be engaged to carry out non-

audit services in exceptional circumstances or where there

is a regulatory request and any such engagement would

be approved by the Audit Committee. This is to ensure the

independence of the external auditor is safeguarded.

Independence and objectivity

The Audit Committee annually reviews the appointment of

the external auditor and considers their independence and

objectivity.

PwC was initially appointed as Auditor in 2016 following a full

tender exercise. Gill Hinks took over as lead audit partner for

Headlam Group plc following the conclusion of the 2019 audit

and, as she had served as lead audit partner for five years

prior to this year’s audit commencing, the Audit Committee

considered, in conjunction with the external auditors,

appropriate lead audit partner arrangements in accordance

with current professional standards. Laura Hill became lead

audit partner for the year ended 31 December 2025.

The Audit Committee considered the conduct of the external

auditor and the level of challenge displayed during the course

of the year-end audit, in particular the depth of discussions

and the challenge to the Group’s approach to its significant

judgements.

The external auditor has processes in place to ensure that

independence is maintained and has written to the Audit

Committee confirming that, in their opinion, they remain

independent within the meaning of the relevant regulations

on this matter and their own professional standards and

that no conflict of interest exists that would affect their

professional judgement.

Taking into account the external auditor’s confirmation, its

own deliberations and feedback from management, the

Audit Committee agreed that the external auditor remained

independent from management and able to display an

independent view on the position of the business.

Effectiveness of external audit

An effectiveness review is performed after the conclusion of

each year’s audit. Feedback was obtained from members of

the Audit Committee, regular attendees and members of the

finance team. The review covers several themes including the

calibre of the external auditor, the team and relationship with

the business and the independence and objectivity displayed.

The progress achieved against the agreed audit plan and

the competence with which the auditor handled the key

accounting and audit judgements were also considered.

Following the review, the Audit Committee concluded that the

external auditor, PwC LLP, remained independent and that

the external audit process remained effective.

Audit tender

PwC will, for the year ending 31 December 2026, have been the

Group’s Auditor for ten years. Accordingly the Group conducted

a competitive tender process for the Group’s external audit, in

line with regulatory requirements and to ensure continued audit

quality, independence and value for money.

Two members of the Audit Committee formed a tender

subcommittee which also included the Chief Financial Officer

and Director of Group Finance. This tender subcommittee

oversaw the tender process, which included the preparation

of a detailed request for proposal and management

presentations. A number of leading audit firms were invited

to participate in the tender, including the incumbent auditor.

The Committee was satisfied that the process was fair,

competitive and appropriately robust.

Management supported the process by coordinating

information requests and providing factual input; however,

the final evaluation and recommendation were made solely

by the Audit Committee, following input from the tender

subcommittee.

Following the conclusion of the tender, the Audit Committee

recommended the reappointment of PwC as the Company’s

external auditor, subject to shareholder approval at the AGM.

The Audit Committee’s recommendation, that a resolution to

reappoint PwC LLP be proposed at the AGM, was accepted

and endorsed by the Board. In accordance with regulatory

requirements, the next audit tender will be conducted no later

than 2036.

The Audit Committee concluded that the tender process was

thorough and effective and that the recommended auditor

is well placed to deliver a high-quality, independent audit of

the Group.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

83

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

83

FRC review of 2024 financial statements

The FRC conducts a review programme of companies’ annual

reports and accounts. During 2025 the FRC conducted such a

routine review of the Company’s 2024 accounts and enquired

into specific areas of the Company’s reporting.

As a result of this FRC review, the Company has changed its

accounting policy for cash and cash equivalents in order to

provide reliable and more relevant information in the financial

statements.

The Group accounting policy when there is a cash pooling

arrangement in place, covered by one single bank contract,

relating to a single currency and subsidiaries operating in

the same country, is that cash and cash equivalents and

overdrafts are considered to be a single unit of account and

they are reported on an aggregated basis.

The Company is now deemed to be the primary participant in

the pooling arrangement and the amount recorded as cash

and cash equivalents in the Company’s financial statements

is the net cash balance on the pooling arrangement rather

than its memo account balance, with the difference recorded

as an intercompany balance. This change in accounting

policy has resulted in the restatement of the Company’s

cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2024 period from

£82.3 million to £7.5 million with corresponding adjustments to

trade and other receivables from £28.7 million to £128.6 million

and trade and other payables from £49.2 million to

£74.3 million. The brought forward cash and cash equivalents

balance as at 1 January 2024 has been restated from

£63.2 million to £15.1 million.

There is no change to the Group’s cash and cash equivalents

in the consolidated financial statements.

It is noted that there are inherent limitations to the FRC review

of the 2024 annual report and accounts and that it does not

provide assurance that the annual report and accounts are

correct in all material aspects. The FRC role is not to verify

the information provided to it, but to consider compliance

with reporting requirements. The FRC accepts no liability

for reliance on them by the Company or any third party,

including, but not limited to, investors and shareholders.

Misstatements

Management reported to the Audit Committee that they

were not aware of any material misstatements or immaterial

misstatements made intentionally to achieve a particular

presentation. The external auditor reported to the Audit

Committee the misstatements that had been found in the

course of the audit work and no material amounts remained

unadjusted.

Information security and cyber risk

The Audit Committee, with its membership consisting of only

Non-Executive Directors, oversees the Group’s approach to

information security and cyber risk management as part

of its review of the risk management and internal control

framework and its oversight of the work of the Executive Risk

Committee.

The Company has a clear approach to identifying and

mitigating information security risk. Information security and

cyber risks are mitigated through processes and procedures

employed by the Group; training provided to all colleagues

with email access and annual cyber awareness training; and

independent assurance and annual penetration testing.

A small subsidiary of the Company was subjected to a

cyber attack during the year, which successfully infiltrated

and disabled the standalone ERP system of the subsidiary.

However, through swift action to isolate and disconnect the

affected system and launch an alternative version of the ERP

system, populated with backup data, there was very minimal

disruption with little to no lost revenue as a result. We did not

identify any loss of data from this attack.

Risk management and

internal control effectiveness review

The Board has ultimate responsibility for the effective

management of risk throughout the Group, including

determining its risk appetite and identifying key strategic and

emerging risks. The role of the Audit Committee is to monitor,

on behalf of the Board, the Group’s financial and non-

financial risk and internal control management systems and

assess their effectiveness.

In supporting the Board in its assessment of the effectiveness

of risk management and internal control process, the

Audit Committee relies on a number of different sources of

assurance: at each meeting, the Audit Committee reviews the

minutes of and considers assurance provided by the Executive

Risk Committee as part of its assessment of the effectiveness

of the risk management framework; reports provided by

management and the Executive Risk Committee; and the

assurance provided by third parties in specific risk areas.

The Audit Committee also receives reports from the external

auditor on matters identified during the course of its statutory

audit work. The Audit Committee takes into account the

resources within the finance team including the structure of

the team, and the qualifications, experience and competence

of the people within it, in forming its view.

The Group’s control framework is intended to manage rather

than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives.

Such a framework can only provide reasonable and not

absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss.

The control framework is evolving in line with the strategic

objectives and has been enhanced by the implementation of a

set of minimum controls standards, with a rolling programme of

testing to ensure that all of the minimum control standards are

designed and operating effectively.

Health and safety risks are managed by the Executive Risk

Committee but performance is monitored directly by the

Board at each of its scheduled meetings.

An overview of the risk management framework and the

principal risks and uncertainties it identifies, is set out on

pages 46 to 50.

The Audit Committee was satisfied that the reporting

disclosures in respect of internal controls and risk management

are a fair representation of the Group’s position.

8484

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Fair, balanced and understandable

At the request of the Board, the Audit Committee reviewed

the Group’s Annual Report and Accounts and considered

if when taken as a whole, it was fair, balanced and

understandable, and provides the information necessary

for shareholders to assess the Company’s position and

performance, business model and strategy, as required by the

Code Provision 25.

The key themes are considered early in the process and this

process involved a wide range of individuals including the

Interim Executive Chair, Chief Financial Officer, Company

Secretary, Finance Team, Interim Chief People Officer and

senior managers of the businesses.

The Audit Committee followed robust procedures to make

this assessment. These included reviewing the early stages of

drafting and any feedback was then incorporated into the

subsequent drafts. Each Director also had the opportunity

to review and feedback on a full copy of the report which

provides additional oversight. The Audit Committee also

had oversight of the overall process and also the results of

the evaluations of the remuneration committee report and

the governance section as well as private sessions with the

external auditor.

In addition, the Audit Committee considered and challenged

the going concern assumptions and the management’s areas

of significant judgements as part of the year end process as

did the external auditor.

The Audit Committee considered the content and if it was

balanced with both negative and positive factors being

presented and that it represented the events throughout the

year. The balance and consistency between narrative and

financial reporting was reviewed.

It was recommended to the Board that the 2025 Annual Report

and Accounts did reflect a fair, balanced and understandable

assessment of the Company’s position and prospects and

contained sufficient information for shareholders to assess the

Company’s position, performance, business model and strategy.

Speak Up policy

The Group’s ‘Speak Up’ Policy enables employees to

confidentially raise concerns regarding potential improprieties

in financial reporting or other matters. All employees receive

the Policy at induction and through ongoing training and

communications throughout the year.

Concerns can be raised via clearly defined internal channels

or anonymously through an independent external provider.

The ‘Speak Up’ Committee - comprising the Interim Chief

People Officer, General Counsel & Company Secretary,

Director of Group Finance, and Head of Internal Audit -

oversees the process, with all incidents reported to the Chair

of the Audit Committee. Investigations are conducted in line

with the Policy, with outcomes communicated to the Board as

appropriate.

The Group maintains a zero-tolerance approach to

bribery. During the year, the Audit Committee reviewed the

Anti-Corruption and Bribery, and Fraud and Anti-Money

Laundering Policies and recommended their approval to the

Board. Further details are available on page 75.

Committee effectiveness review

The effectiveness of the Audit Committee was evaluated as

part of the Board evaluation. Further details of this can be

found on page 77. The review found that the Audit Committee

is operating effectively and that its role and remit remain

appropriate for the current needs of the business.

Summary

The Audit Committee has concluded, as a result of its work

during the year, that it has acted in accordance with its terms

of reference and fulfilled its responsibilities.

The Audit Committee remains committed to maintaining

an open and constructive dialogue on relevant audit

matters with shareholders. If you should have any

questions on any aspect of this report, please do email

headlamgr[email protected] and I will also be available at

the AGM to answer any questions about the work of the Audit

Committee.

This Audit Committee report forms part of the Corporate

Governance Report and is signed on behalf of the Audit

Committee by:

Robin Williams

Chair of the Audit Committee

25 March 2026

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

85

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

85

Statement from the

Chair of the Nomination

Committee

On behalf of the Board, I

am pleased to present the

Nomination Committee

report for the year ended

31 December 2025.

Succession planning

Following a succession Chair transition

between Keith and myself, I took over

as Chair of the Board and Chair of the

Nomination Committee with effect

from 27 February 2025.

The Nomination Committee then also

considered the balance of skills and

experience on the Board to support the

delivery of the key strategic aims and

revised strategy of the Company.

As a result, Jemima Bird, our Chair

of the Remuneration Committee

was appointed as the Senior

Independent Director with effect from

27 February 2025. Full details of all the

Board can be found in their biographies

on pages 60 and 61.

Executive Directors

The focus later in 2025 was to consider

the composition of the Board and

the senior management team in light

of the Company’s performance and

needs going forwards, with careful

planning to support the Company

through accelerating its transformation

programme and revised strategy.

Following Chris Payne’s stepping down

as Chief Executive Officer on 3 October,

I became Interim Executive Chair whilst

a search for a successor for Chief

Executive Officer took place.

Following a successful search using

search agency Warren Partners, I’m very

pleased to welcome Rob Barclay as

our Chief Executive Officer Designate

who joined on 9 March 2026 and will

assume the Chief Executive Officer role

on 27 April 2026 after a short handover

and I will revert back my role as Non-

Executive Chair.

I’m very pleased to welcome Rob

Barclay as our Chief Executive

Officer Designate who will become

Chief Executive Officer and join the

Board on 27 April 2026 after a short

handover (when I will revert to Non-

Executive Chair), and Richard Jones

who joined the Group as Interim CFO

on 12th March 2026 and will replace

Adam Phillips, CFO, on the Board on

26th March 2026.

Board composition

The Nomination Committee will

continue to monitor the composition of

the Board, its Committees and senior

management on an ongoing basis to

ensure they remain appropriate and

effective and have the right balance

of skills, knowledge, experience and

diversity to deliver the Company’s

strategy now and in the future.

“ The Committee is committed to

ensuring that the Board and the senior

management team have the right skills,

experience, knowledge and background

to deliver the revised strategy.”

Stephen Bird

Chair of the Nomination Committee

Key responsibilities:

• Monitoring the structure, size

and composition of the Board,

its Committees and the senior

management on an ongoing

basis to ensure they remain

appropriate and effective

and have the right balance of

skills, knowledge, experience

and diversity to deliver the

Company’s strategy now and

in the future.

• Making recommendations

to the Board of any changes

required and leads the process

regarding appointments

to the Board, including the

role as Chair and Senior

Independent Director.

• Succession planning for the

Board (including Chair and

Committee Chairs) and senior

management and making

recommendations to the

Board.

• Considering the diversity of

the Board and the talent

pipeline.

Full details of responsibilities

delegated to the Nomination

Committee by the Board in the

written terms of reference which

are available on the Company’s

website.

8686

NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT

The Nomination Committee also

annually considers the tenure of the

Board and when considering succession

planning for the Board, consideration is

given to skills, experience and diversity

to ensure that there is the appropriate

mix to continue to lead the Company

and deliver long-term success of the

Company for all of our stakeholders.

Strengthening the Senior

Management Team

The Nomination Committee focused

on the search and recruitment of a

replacement Chief Executive Officer

during 2025 whilst also ensuring the

right people with the right skills were in

place within the senior management

team to deliver the revised strategy and

ensure performance management was

strengthened throughout the business.

An interim review was undertaken

of the senior management team,

to ensure the accelerated delivery

of the transformation programme

and revised strategy in challenging

market conditions with added

expertise in buying and supply chain

transformation and sales to drive our

sales force performance. We also

supplemented the senior management

team with interim support with further

expertise across HR, Operations and

Transformation.

Board diversity

Board diversity and the advantages

it can make to decision making are

acknowledged by the Board. Diversity

is considered for every appointment,

which are made on merit against

objective criteria. Recruitment agencies

are instructed to present a diverse list of

candidates for all roles.

Any appointments are made to ensure

the correct and complementary skills

are on the Board, and provide the level

of experience required to deliver the

strategy for our stakeholders. The Board

diversity policy is considered every year

by the Board, which was last reviewed

in July 2025 and can be found on the

Company’s website.

The key statement of the Board

diversity policy is that the Company

is committed to developing a diverse

workforce and equal opportunities for

all and that the Board recognises the

valuable contribution that diversity

including gender, ethnicity and personal

strengths can bring to the Board.

The Board diversity policy also

commits to maintaining the current

gender balance of the Board, and the

Nomination Committee continues to

be committed to increasing gender

and ethnic diversity at Board level

and will seek to achieve this when the

opportunity arises and appropriate

candidates are identified.

Notwithstanding this, all Board

appointments will be made on merit

and against objective criteria and the

Nomination Committee will monitor

progress against the Board diversity

policy.

In terms of Board gender diversity,

as at 31 December 2025, there were

five Board members, two of which

were female (40%) and three were

male (60%).

One of our female Board Directors,

Jemima Bird is our Senior Independent

Director. Whilst the Board has 40%

female Board Directors, it recognises

that it does not have a Director from

an ethnic minority background, which

means it does not comply with all of the

diversity and inclusion targets set out in

the Listing Rules. However, the Board is

committed to increasing diversity when

the opportunity arises and appropriate

candidates are identified.

The Board has reviewed its size,

structure and composition during

the year, (and more recently on

4 March 2026), and concluded that

its remains suitable to meet the

Company’s needs and to promote the

desired culture, (please also see the

results of the 2025 Board Evaluation on

page 77).

It remains the policy that all

appointments to the Board and

Executive team should be made

on merit and against objective

criteria, whilst addressing diversity

considerations of the Board. The

Board’s diversity objective is to have a

broad range of age, gender, ethnicity,

approach, skills, experience and

educational/professional backgrounds

represented at Board level and in

senior management positions, and the

Nomination Committee will continue

to review what steps and recruitment

processes are appropriate for achieving

diversity.

The information required by the

Listing Rule for companies to report

information and disclose the gender

and ethnic background representation

on their boards and executive

management on a comply or explain

basis is included below.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

87

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

87

Data concerning gender and ethnicity representation is collected directly from all the individual Board and Executive team

members as part of their onboarding process, or in the case of the Non-Executive Directors, through a Diversity and Inclusion

Monitoring Form (the ‘Form’) which was issued for completion asking individuals to disclose their gender and ethnicity using the

options included on the Form, which align with the detail in the left-hand columns of the tables below and therefore includes the

option to not specify an answer.

Gender representation as at 31 December 2025

Board Executive Committee

Number of

Board members

Percentage of

the Board

Number of

senior positions

on the Board

(CEO, CFO, SID

and Chair)

Number in

Executive

management

Percentage

of Executive

management

Men 3 60% 2 5 55%

Women 2 40% 1 4 45%

Not specified/prefer not to say – – – – –

Ethnicity representation as at 31 December 2025

Board Executive Committee

Number of

Board members

Percentage of

the Board

Number of

senior positions

on the Board

(CEO, CFO, SID

and Chair)

Number in

Executive

management

Percentage

of Executive

management

White British or other White

(including minority-white groups)

5 100% 2 9 100%

Mixed/Multiple Ethnic Groups – – – – –

Asian/Asian British – – – – –

Black/African/Caribbean/

Black British

– – – – –

Other ethnic group, including Arab – – – – –

Not specified/prefer not to say – – – – –

Group-wide diversity

The Company has continued to implement its inclusion and wellbeing strategy, which includes actions to improve the diversity,

equity and inclusion of our workforce, please see further details on page 34.

Colleague engagement

Karen Hubbard is appointed as the designated Non-Executive Director for workforce engagement. Further information on the

establishment of the Employee Forum and how the employee voice is heard in the Boardroom can be found on page 69.

Effectiveness of the Nomination Committee

The effectiveness of the Nomination Committee was evaluated as part of the 2025 Board and Committees evaluation, which

was undertaken externally this year by an external third-party consultant, Telos Partners. The report highlighted that the Board

and its Committees continue to function well. The findings were discussed and it was agreed that the Nomination Committee

remained effective.

Directors – retirement, election and re-election

Individuals seeking election and re-election at the 2026 AGM is set out in the AGM Notice of Meeting.

8888

NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Each Director has been subject to a performance evaluation

and the Nomination Committee has conducted its own

annual review of the appropriateness of the Directors’ skills

and experience; their time commitment to the Company;

and their contribution to the Board during the year. As part of

this review, each Director has confirmed that they continue

to allocate sufficient time to discharge their responsibilities

effectively, and the Nomination Committee evaluates their

ability to do so, taking into consideration other external

commitments, in addition to their individual performance

throughout the year and their skills and experience set against

the agreed strategy.

Following this review the Nomination Committee, and

subsequently the Board has concluded that each Director

continues to make an effective and valuable contribution and

demonstrates commitment to their role. It is recommended

that shareholders approve the resolutions to be proposed to the

forthcoming AGM relating to the election and/or re-election of

each Director (as applicable).

A year of progress

Despite the challenges throughout the year, we have made

good progress with our revised strategy and accelerating our

transformation programme . The Nomination Committee

always has the long-term success of the business for all

stakeholders in mind.

Membership and attendance

at 2025 meetings

During the year, I acted as Chair of the Nomination

Committee, and it comprises a majority of Independent

Non-Executive Directors as required by the Code, their

biographies are set out on pages 60 and 61. Appointments

to the Nomination Committee are made by the Board. The

Nomination Committee considers the composition of the

Board and its committees on an annual basis.

The Nomination Committee met on four occasions in order

to fulfil its responsibilities delegated to it by the Board.

Attendance is shown in the table below.

Only members of the Nomination Committee are entitled to

be present at meetings. However, other Directors (including

the Chief Executive Officer), members of the Executive

team and advisers may be invited to attend Nomination

Committee meetings at the discretion of the Chair. The

General Counsel & Company Secretary performs the role of

Secretary to the Nomination Committee.

No Director is involved in any decisions regarding their

own continuation in office, re-appointment or re-election,

including the Chair and this operated where in relation

to my appointment as Interim Executive Chair, our Senior

Independent Director chaired the Nomination Committee

which discussed this.

Name No. of meetings attended

Stephen Bird 3/4

Jemima Bird 4/4

Karen Hubbard 4/4

Robin Williams 4/4

As referred to above, there was one Nomination

Committee meeting held to discuss specifics relating to my

appointment as Interim Executive Chair and given this, it

was not appropriate that I attended this meeting and so my

attendance record in the table above reflects this.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

89

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

89

Appointment and re-appointment

of Directors

The Nomination Committee has procedures in place for a

formal, rigorous and transparent process leading to Board

appointments, ensuring that appointments to the Board

are made on merit, against objective criteria and promote

diversity of gender, social and ethnic backgrounds. This has

been shown by the decision to appoint Jemima Bird as our

Senior Independent Director last year.

The Chair and the other Non-Executive Directors are

appointed for an initial period of three-years, which, with

the approval of the Nomination Committee and the Board,

would normally be extended for a further three years term.

All appointments are subject to annual election by the

shareholders.

The letters of appointment of all Non-Executive Directors

(alongside the service contracts for the Executive Directors)

are available for inspection at the Company’s registered

office during normal office hours. Copies are also made

available at each of the Company’s Annual General Meetings

for 15 minutes prior to the meeting and throughout.

Time commitments

The letters of appointment clearly set out the time

commitment expected from each Non-Executive Director

and this is reviewed annually by the Committee to ensure it

remains appropriate. Each Non-Executive Director confirms

at the time of their appointment, and each year thereafter,

with careful consideration to their external appointments,

that they can continue to dedicate sufficient time to the

Group’s business.

All Directors have demonstrated strong time commitment to

their roles during the year.

The Nomination Committee confirms that it is fully satisfied

that each Director dedicates the appropriate amount of time

to their roles on the Board and the Nomination Committee.

Board size, structure and composition

The composition and performance of the Board and its

Committees was considered by the Nomination Committee

as part of its annual assessment and it was concluded

that the Board and each Committee continue to function

effectively. The Nomination Committee concluded that the

composition of the Board is compliant with the provisions

of the Code, is appropriate to meet the business and

operational objectives, and is sufficient to bring a balanced

and experienced view to the decision-making process.

Activities of the Nomination Committee

The Nomination Committee agrees an annual workplan and, in

addition to matters relating specifically to its terms of reference,

agendas incorporate matters arising and topical items upon

which the Nomination Committee has chosen to focus.

The key activities of the Nomination Committee during the

year in discharging its principal areas of responsibility are

shown as follows:

Skills assessment and succession

• Reviewed the skills and experience required by the Board

in the context of wider business needs and culture, long-

term strategic objectives and stakeholder feedback.

• Reviewed the skills and experience of Non-Executive

Directors to fully support the achievement of the Group’s

strategic objectives.

• Supported the recruitment of key interim Executive team

and management positions.

• Implemented the Chair and CEO succession plans.

Governance

• Reviewed the structure, size and composition of the Board

and its Committees.

• Reviewed and updated the terms of reference of the

Committee and its annual plan.

• Reviewed the time commitment required of Non-

Executive Directors and evaluated whether enough time

had been committed to fulfil their duties.

• Recommended the re-election of all Directors due to retire

at the AGM

• Reviewed the role descriptions of the Chair, Chief

Executive and Senior Independent Director positions

• Considered and re-approved the policy on approving

external appointments.

• Reviewed and approved the Board diversity policy.

Evaluation

• Reviewed the results of the Board effectiveness in relation

to the Board, its Committees and their own performance.

• Considered the composition, size and diversity of

the Board.

Reporting

• Considered and recommended to the Board the

Nomination Committee report for inclusion in the Annual

Report and Accounts

This report and the information on pages 56 to 123 forms part

of the Corporate Governance report and is signed on behalf

of the Nomination Committee by:

Stephen Bird

Chair of the Nomination Committee

25 March 2026

9090

NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Strategic Report

91

Governance

91

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

Annual statement

On behalf of the Board,

I am pleased to present

the Directors’ Remuneration

Report for 2025.

The report includes this Annual

Statement, a new Directors’

Remuneration Policy (‘Policy’) given

that the current Policy expires in

2026, and the Annual Report on

Remuneration for the financial year

ended 31 December 2025. The Directors’

Remuneration Report (excluding the

Policy) will be subject to an advisory

shareholder vote at the AGM on

20 May 2026 and the Policy will be

subject to a binding shareholder vote

at the same meeting. This new Policy,

subject to the approval of shareholders,

will last for three years from the date

of approval or until another policy is

approved at a general meeting in the

interim.

Business performance and

incentive out-turn for 2025

As set out in the Chair’s statement on

page 2, 2025 proved to be a difficult

year for the industry as a whole,

and for many businesses exposed

to consumer discretionary spend.

Financial performance reflected both

a persistently challenging market and

the deliberate decision to exit low-

margin revenue as the Group refocused

on its core customer base. Despite this

backdrop, the Company made good

progress with the acceleration of its

strategy to optimise and simplify the

business through its transformation

plan.

No annual bonus was payable in

respect of 2025 as a result of the

threshold profit target (70% of the

bonus) not being met. While progress

was made against a number of the

non-financial targets (30% of the

bonus), the Committee determined

that it was not appropriate to award an

annual bonus in light of the Company’s

financial performance and broader

stakeholder experience.

In respect of the 2023 PSP award due

to vest in April 2026, the Committee

determined that EPS and TSR

performance was below threshold. As

such, and as noted in the discretion

section below, the Committee agreed

to lapse the 2023 PSP awards regardless

of performance against the ESG

targets. Further details of the 2023 PSP

award are set out on page 110.

Noting the above, the Policy is

considered to have operated as

intended and as detailed below, no

changes are considered necessary.

Proposed New Policy

The three-year term of our current

shareholder-approved Directors’

Remuneration Policy expires in 2026 and,

as a result, we are seeking approval for

a new Policy at the 2026 AGM. Following

a detailed review of the Policy towards

the end of 2025, the Committee

determined that it continued to remain

fit for purpose and, as such, no changes

are proposed in respect of the Policy

that was last approved by shareholders

at the 2023 AGM.

Board Changes

Chris Payne stepped down as Chief

Executive Officer and Executive Director

on 3 October 2025 and Stephen Bird

assumed the role of interim Executive

Chair on the same date. Rob Barclay

joined the Company as Designate Chief

Executive Officer on 9 March 2026 and

will assume full responsibility as Chief

Executive Officer on 27 April 2026 when

Stephen Bird will revert to his role as Non-

Executive Chair. Richard Jones joined the

Group as Interim Chief Financial Officer

on 12 March 2026 and joins the Board

on 26 March 2026 following an orderly

handover from Adam Phillips.

“ Careful consideration in exercising

our discretion has been vital this year,

allowing us to strike the right balance for

our stakeholders during what has been

a challenging period for the Company.”

Jemima Bird

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Key responsibilities:

• Designing the framework

and policy for Executive

Directors’ remuneration and

determining remuneration

packages for the Executive

Directors, Chair and senior

managers.

• Establishing remuneration

schemes that promote

long-term shareholdings

by Executive Directors and

that support alignment with

shareholders’ interests, both

in employment, and post

cessation.

• Reviewing workforce

remuneration and related

policies.

9292

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT

Discretion

The Remuneration Committee is conscious of its role in

ensuring that remuneration is appropriate when considering

the performance of the business and the individual Directors.

As detailed above, whilst the Remuneration Committee

recognises the significant work carried out by the management

team in respect of delivering the Company’s transformation

programme, the Remuneration Committee determined that no

bonus should be payable to the Executive Directors in respect

of the year ended 31 December 2025. In addition, noting that

EPS and relative TSR performance was below threshold, the

Committee determined that the 2023 PSP should lapse in full,

regardless of performance against the ESG targets. Finally, the

Remuneration Committee exercised negative discretion post

year end to lapse that Chris Payne’s 2024 DBP share awards

given his departure.

Remuneration for 2026

Base salary

No salary increases were awarded from 1 January 2026.

As such, current salary levels are as follows:

Director

1 January

2026*

1 January

2025*

Interim

Executive Chair

1

Stephen Bird £500,000 £500,000

Chief Executive

Officer

2

Rob Barclay £435,000 –

Chief Financial

Officer

3

Adam Phillips £331,500 £331,500

*Or appointment date where later.

1

Upon appointment as Interim Executive Chair on 3 October 2025, Stephen

Bird’s Non-Executive Chair fee was increased from £150,000 to £500,000. This

additional fee, which reflects his significantly enhanced role, will be payable

until Stephen Bird return to his role of Non-Executive Chair on 27 April 2026.

2

The new Chief Executive will receive a base salary £435,000 from appointment,

significantly lower than the £494,190 paid to the previous incumbent.

3

In addition to his base salary, Adam Phillips will continue to receive a £10,000 per

month acting up allowance which commenced on 3 October 2025 which will

cease upon the appointment of the new Chief Executive. The allowance, which

does not receive the benefit of pension provision. reflects Adam’s significant

additional roles and responsibilities in respect of supporting the Interim

Executive Chair.

4

The Interim Chief Financial Officer, who joined the Group on 12 March 2026, initially

on a below Board role will receive a base salary of £300,000 from appointment.

Pension

Pension contributions will continue to be capped at 8% of

salary for Executive Directors which is comparable to the

majority of employees. The Interim Executive Chair does not

receive a pension contribution.

Annual bonus

The maximum annual bonus opportunity for 2026 will remain at

125% of base salary with a minimum of one-third of any award

deferred into shares for two years. The payment of any annual

bonus awards, which will be pro-rated for new joiners, will be

based on both financial (majority weighting) and key strategic

and ESG-related objectives (minority weighting). Full disclosure

of the targets, which are considered to be commercially

sensitive, will be provided in the 2026 Annual Report and

Accounts. Neither the departing Chief Financial Officer or

Interim Executive Chair will be eligible for a 2026 annual bonus.

The bonus potential for the new Chief Executive Officer will be

pro-rated to reflect the partial year served.

PSP

It is the Committee’s intention to grant PSP awards up to 150%

of salary to Executive Directors in 2026, albeit neither the

departing Chief Financial Officer or Interim Executive Chair

are eligible to receive awards. Vesting will be subject to EPS

targets for the majority of the award and relative TSR targets

for a minority of the award.

Shareholder alignment

The combination of a post-vesting holding period

requirement under the PSP, the deferral into shares under

the annual bonus scheme and the shareholding guidelines

will continue to provide alignment between the interests

of Executive Directors, the shareholders and delivery of the

strategy. Awards will continue to be subject to a two-year

holding period following the date of vesting.

Non-Executive Directors’ fees for 2026

No increases were awarded in respect of the Non-Executive

Director base fees (£50,000), the Senior Independent Non-

Executive Director fee (£10,000) or the additional fees in respect

of Chairing the Audit Committee, Remuneration Committee

and Employee Forum and ESG committee (£7,500 each.)

However, reflecting her significant additional time commitment

following the departures of the Chief Executive and Chief

Customer Officer, Jemima Bird received an additional fee of

£48,000 between 3 October 2025 and 31 December 2025. This

reflects significant additional time commitment in excess of

her Non-Executive Director and SID roles to assist the Interim

Executive Chair in respect of delivering the transformation plan

to return the Group to profitability. This included a review of

the strategy, meetings with one customer to renegotiate key

contractual relationships, a number of shareholder meetings

and specific oversight for the Customer, Marketing, and People

teams. The additional support provided, capped at £8,000 per

month, will cease at the point that the new Chief Executive

is appointed and this additional time commitment is not

considered to have impaired Jemima Bird’s independence. and

Jemima was considered independent on appointment and

throughout 2025 and 2026.

Shareholder views and voting outcomes

Headlam is committed to maintaining good communications

with shareholders. It considers the AGM to be an opportunity to

communicate with shareholders, giving them the opportunity

to raise any issues or concerns they may have. In addition, the

Committee seeks to engage directly with major shareholders

and the main representative bodies, should any material change

be proposed to the Policy. The Committee was pleased to

receive over 99% votes in favour of the Directors’ Remuneration

Report (excluding the Policy) at the 2025 AGM and we hope we

will again receive your support at the forthcoming AGM.

Conclusion

We remain committed to a responsible approach to

executive pay, as I trust this Directors’ Remuneration Report

demonstrates. That said, I would be happy to meet or speak

with shareholders if there are any questions or feedback on

our approach to executive remuneration.

Jemima Bird

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

25 March 2026

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

93

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

93

At a glance remuneration overview

Executive Remuneration for the year ending 31 December 2026

Fixed

Remuneration

Salary Workforce Aligned Pension Benefits

(c.30% of total reward assuming maximum performance)

Variable

Remuneration

Annual Bonus Performance Share Plan

Link to Strategy

Performance measures support Group

strategy to:

– increase profitability for shareholders

– deliver key strategic and ESG-related priorities

Performance measures support Group strategy to

deliver:

– higher returns to shareholders

– increased earnings

Potential

(Maximum 125% of Salary)

1/3rd deferred into shares under the Deferred Bonus

Plan

(Maximum 150% Salary)

Two-year post-vesting holding period

Dividend equivalents accrue to extent awards vest

FY2025 Performance Metrics

Underlying Profit Before Tax - majority (to support

profitability of the business)

Key strategic and ESG-related objectives - minority

(to support business growth and ESG objectives)

Underlying Basic Earnings Per Share (EPS) - majority (to

support the growth of earnings)

Relative Total Shareholder Return (TSR) - minority

(to align the interests of Directors with those of

shareholders)

Shareholder

alignment

In Employment Post Employment

200% of salary Lower of shareholding at cessation of employment and

200% of salary to be held for two years post cessation

9494

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

This part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report sets out the Directors’ Remuneration Policy for the Company.

The three-year term of our current shareholder-approved Directors’ Remuneration Policy expires in 2026 and, as a result, we are

seeking approval for a new Policy at the 2026 AGM. The Policy in this report will therefore be put to a binding shareholder vote

at the AGM on 20 May 2026 and will take formal effect from that date, subject to shareholder approval. The Policy will formally

apply for three years beginning on the date of approval unless a new Policy is presented to shareholders in the interim. Following

approval all payments to Directors will be consistent with the approved Policy.

Considerations when determining the remuneration policy

The overarching objective of the remuneration policy is to promote the long-term success of the Group. In seeking to achieve

this objective the policy has been designed based on the following key principles:

• to operate remuneration arrangements which are simple and transparent, and which help to build and maintain a

sustainable performance culture;

• to appropriately align executive reward with the Group’s strategic objectives and with the best interests of shareholders and

other key stakeholders;

• to promote appropriately the long-term success of the Group, and to not pay more than is necessary in doing so; and

• to have a competitive mix of base salary and short and long-term incentives, with an appropriate proportion of the

package determined by the rigorous application of stretching targets linked to the Group’s performance.

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group

In setting remuneration for the Executive Directors, the Remuneration Committee takes note of the overall approach to reward

for employees in the Group. Salary increases will ordinarily be (in percentage of salary terms) no higher than those of the wider

workforce. The Company operates an Employee Forum at which aspects of remuneration across the Group (including Executive

Director remuneration) is discussed. In addition, the Chair of the Remuneration Committee receives feedback on remuneration

matters directly from the designated workforce engagement Non-Executive Director and the Group People Director updates

the Remuneration Committee periodically on remuneration arrangements and employment conditions across the Group.

Shareholder views

The Remuneration Committee is committed to an ongoing dialogue with shareholders and welcomes feedback on Executive

and Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration. The Remuneration Committee will seek to engage directly with larger shareholders

and their representative bodies should any material changes be made to the Policy. The Remuneration Committee also

considers shareholder feedback received in relation to the remuneration-related resolutions each year following the AGM.

This, plus any additional feedback received from time to time, is then considered as part of the Committee’s annual review of

remuneration policy and its implementation.

Changes to the remuneration policy approved at the 2023 AGM

Shareholders approved our current Remuneration Policy at the 2023 AGM with over 90% of votes cast in favour. Following a

review of the Policy, the Committee determined that it remained fit for purpose and, as such, no changes have been proposed in

respect of the Policy that was approved by shareholders at the 2023 AGM.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

95

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

95

Summary Policy table for Executive Directors

Component

Purpose and link

to strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance measures

Base salary To provide a

competitive base

salary for the market

in which the Group

operates to attract

and retain Executives

of a suitable calibre.

Salaries are usually reviewed annually, with any increases typically effective 1 January.

Salaries are typically set after considering:

• pay and conditions elsewhere in the Group;

• overall Group performance;

• individual performance and experience;

• progression within the role; and

• competitive salary levels in companies of a broadly similar size and complexity

and market forces.

Whilst there is no maximum salary, increases will normally be in line with

the typical range of salary increases awarded (in percentage of salary

terms) to the wider workforce.

Larger salary increases may be awarded to take account of individual

circumstances, such as:

• where an Executive Director has been promoted or has had a

change in scope or responsibility;

• where the Remuneration Committee has set the salary of a new

hire at a discount to the market level initially, a series of planned

increases can be implemented over the following few years to bring

the salary to the appropriate market position, subject to individual

performance;

• where there has been a change in market practice; or

• where there has been a significant change in the scale of the role or

the size and/or complexity of the business.

Increases may be implemented over such time period as the

Remuneration Committee deems appropriate.

Although there are no formal performance

conditions, any increase in base salary is only

implemented after careful consideration of

individual contribution and performance and

having due regard to the factors set out in the

Operation column of this table.

Benefits To provide broadly

market competitive

benefits as part of the

total remuneration

package.

Executive Directors receive benefits in line with market practice, and these

include life assurance, private medical insurance, company car or car allowance

and, where relevant, relocation expenses. Executive Directors are also provided

with the opportunity to join any HMRC approved all-employee share plan

arrangements on the same basis as other employees.

Executive Directors will be eligible for any other benefits which are introduced

for the wider workforce on broadly similar terms and other benefits might

be provided from time to time based on individual circumstances and if the

Committee decides payment of such benefits is appropriate.

Any reasonable business-related expenses can be reimbursed (and any tax

thereon met if determined to be a taxable benefit).

Whilst the Remuneration Committee has not set an absolute maximum

on the level of benefits Executive Directors may receive, the value of

benefits is set at a level that the Remuneration Committee considers

appropriate against the market and provides a sufficient level of

benefits based on individual circumstances.

Not applicable.

Retirement

benefits

To provide employees

with long-term

savings to allow for

retirement planning.

The Group may offer participation in a defined contribution pension plan or may

permit Executive Directors to take a cash supplement in lieu of pension up to the

same value.

Workforce aligned (currently 8% of base salary). Not applicable.

Annual bonus Rewards performance

against targets which

support the strategic

direction of the

Group. Bonus deferral

provides a retention

element through

share ownership and

direct alignment with

shareholders’ interests.

Awards are based on performance typically measured over one year.

Pay-out levels are determined by the Remuneration Committee after the year

end based on performance against pre-set targets.

Executive Directors will defer at least one-third of any bonus award into shares,

typically for a two-year period. The Committee may decide to pay the whole of

the bonus earned in cash where the amount to be deferred would, in the opinion

of the Remuneration Committee, be so small as to make deferral administratively

burdensome. Deferred shares will typically take the form of nil-cost share options

but may be structured as an alternative form of share award.

Deferred bonus awards may be granted on the basis that the participant shall

be entitled to an additional benefit (in cash or shares) in respect of dividends

paid over the deferral period, calculated on such basis as the Committee shall

determine.

The vesting of the deferred shares is not subject to the satisfaction of any

additional performance conditions.

The annual bonus plan includes provisions which enable the Remuneration

Committee (in respect of both the cash and the deferred elements of bonuses)

to recover or withhold value in the event of certain defined circumstances.

125% of base salary. Targets are set annually with measures linked to

the Group’s strategy and aligned with key financial,

strategic and/or individual targets.

The majority, if not all, of the annual bonus will

be assessed against key financial performance

metrics of the business and any balance will be

based on non-financial strategic, ESG-related

and/or personal objectives.

A graduated scale of targets is set for each

measure, with up to 10% of each element payable

for achieving the relevant threshold performance

level and 100% of maximum potential for achieving

stretch performance.

9696

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Summary Policy table for Executive Directors

Component

Purpose and link

to strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance measures

Base salary To provide a

competitive base

salary for the market

in which the Group

operates to attract

and retain Executives

of a suitable calibre.

Salaries are usually reviewed annually, with any increases typically effective 1 January.

Salaries are typically set after considering:

• pay and conditions elsewhere in the Group;

• overall Group performance;

• individual performance and experience;

• progression within the role; and

• competitive salary levels in companies of a broadly similar size and complexity

and market forces.

Whilst there is no maximum salary, increases will normally be in line with

the typical range of salary increases awarded (in percentage of salary

terms) to the wider workforce.

Larger salary increases may be awarded to take account of individual

circumstances, such as:

• where an Executive Director has been promoted or has had a

change in scope or responsibility;

• where the Remuneration Committee has set the salary of a new

hire at a discount to the market level initially, a series of planned

increases can be implemented over the following few years to bring

the salary to the appropriate market position, subject to individual

performance;

• where there has been a change in market practice; or

• where there has been a significant change in the scale of the role or

the size and/or complexity of the business.

Increases may be implemented over such time period as the

Remuneration Committee deems appropriate.

Although there are no formal performance

conditions, any increase in base salary is only

implemented after careful consideration of

individual contribution and performance and

having due regard to the factors set out in the

Operation column of this table.

Benefits To provide broadly

market competitive

benefits as part of the

total remuneration

package.

Executive Directors receive benefits in line with market practice, and these

include life assurance, private medical insurance, company car or car allowance

and, where relevant, relocation expenses. Executive Directors are also provided

with the opportunity to join any HMRC approved all-employee share plan

arrangements on the same basis as other employees.

Executive Directors will be eligible for any other benefits which are introduced

for the wider workforce on broadly similar terms and other benefits might

be provided from time to time based on individual circumstances and if the

Committee decides payment of such benefits is appropriate.

Any reasonable business-related expenses can be reimbursed (and any tax

thereon met if determined to be a taxable benefit).

Whilst the Remuneration Committee has not set an absolute maximum

on the level of benefits Executive Directors may receive, the value of

benefits is set at a level that the Remuneration Committee considers

appropriate against the market and provides a sufficient level of

benefits based on individual circumstances.

Not applicable.

Retirement

benefits

To provide employees

with long-term

savings to allow for

retirement planning.

The Group may offer participation in a defined contribution pension plan or may

permit Executive Directors to take a cash supplement in lieu of pension up to the

same value.

Workforce aligned (currently 8% of base salary). Not applicable.

Annual bonus Rewards performance

against targets which

support the strategic

direction of the

Group. Bonus deferral

provides a retention

element through

share ownership and

direct alignment with

shareholders’ interests.

Awards are based on performance typically measured over one year.

Pay-out levels are determined by the Remuneration Committee after the year

end based on performance against pre-set targets.

Executive Directors will defer at least one-third of any bonus award into shares,

typically for a two-year period. The Committee may decide to pay the whole of

the bonus earned in cash where the amount to be deferred would, in the opinion

of the Remuneration Committee, be so small as to make deferral administratively

burdensome. Deferred shares will typically take the form of nil-cost share options

but may be structured as an alternative form of share award.

Deferred bonus awards may be granted on the basis that the participant shall

be entitled to an additional benefit (in cash or shares) in respect of dividends

paid over the deferral period, calculated on such basis as the Committee shall

determine.

The vesting of the deferred shares is not subject to the satisfaction of any

additional performance conditions.

The annual bonus plan includes provisions which enable the Remuneration

Committee (in respect of both the cash and the deferred elements of bonuses)

to recover or withhold value in the event of certain defined circumstances.

125% of base salary. Targets are set annually with measures linked to

the Group’s strategy and aligned with key financial,

strategic and/or individual targets.

The majority, if not all, of the annual bonus will

be assessed against key financial performance

metrics of the business and any balance will be

based on non-financial strategic, ESG-related

and/or personal objectives.

A graduated scale of targets is set for each

measure, with up to 10% of each element payable

for achieving the relevant threshold performance

level and 100% of maximum potential for achieving

stretch performance.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

97

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

97

Component

Purpose and link to

strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance measures

Performance

Share Plan

(‘PSP’)

To incentivise

Executive Directors,

and to deliver

genuine long-term

performance-related

pay, with a clear line

of sight for Executives

and direct alignment

with shareholders’

interests.

Awards will be in the form of nil-cost share options, conditional shares or other

such form as has the same economic effect.

Awards will be granted with vesting dependent on the achievement of

performance conditions set by the Remuneration Committee, with performance

normally measured over at least a three-year performance period.

The Remuneration Committee retains discretion to adjust vesting levels in

exceptional circumstances, including but not limited to regard of the overall

performance of the Company or the grantee’s personal performance.

Awards will usually be subject to a two-year holding period following the end of

the performance period, and shares will typically not be released to participants

until the end of any such holding period.

Awards under the PSP may be granted on the basis that the participant shall be

entitled to an additional benefit (normally in shares) in respect of dividends paid

over the holding period. This amount shall be calculated on such basis as the

Remuneration Committee determines.

The PSP includes provisions which enable the Remuneration Committee to

recover or withhold value in the event of certain defined circumstances.

150% of salary. PSP performance measures may include, and are

not limited to, relative TSR, EPS, strategic measures

and ESG-related objectives.

A maximum of 25% of any element vests for

achieving the threshold performance target and

100% for maximum performance.

Performance metrics and weightings are reviewed

annually and may be varied for future award cycles

as appropriate to reflect the prevailing strategic

priorities of the Group at that time.

Shareholding

guidelines

To further align the

Executive Directors’

long-term interests

with those of

shareholders.

In employment:

Until the guideline has been reached Executive Directors are required to retain all

of the net number of vested shares from the PSP and DBP. Vested shares which

are subject to a holding period under the PSP and shares which are subject to

DBP awards will count towards the limit (on a net of assumed tax basis).

Post employment:

Executive Directors will normally be required to hold shares at a level equal to the

lower of their shareholding at cessation of employment and 200% of salary for

two years post cessation in respect of any share awards granted after the 2021

AGM and excluding own shares purchased.

200% of salary. Not applicable.

Non-Executive Directors (including the Non-Executive Chair role)

Annual Fee To attract individuals

with appropriate

knowledge and

experience.

Fees are normally reviewed annually taking into account factors such as the time

commitment and contribution of the role and market levels in companies of

comparable size and complexity.

The Chair is paid an all-inclusive fee for all Board responsibilities.

Fees for the other Non-Executive Directors may include a basic fee and

additional fees for further responsibilities (for example, chairing of Board

committees or holding the office of Senior Independent Director).

In exceptional circumstances, if there is a temporary yet material increase in the

time commitments for Non-Executive Directors, the Board may pay extra fees on

a pro rata basis to recognise the additional workload.

Neither the Chair nor the Non-Executive Directors participate in any

of the Group’s performance related schemes (i.e. annual bonus or

incentive arrangements). Nor do they receive any pension or private

medical insurance or taxable benefits, other than the potential to

receive gifts at the end of a long-standing term of appointment.

Non-Executive Directors may be eligible to receive benefits such as the

use of secretarial support, travel costs or other benefits that may be

appropriate and the Company repays any reasonable expenses that a

Non-Executive Director incurs in carrying out their duties as a Director,

including any tax liabilities thereon, if appropriate.

Not applicable.

9898

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Component

Purpose and link to

strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance measures

Performance

Share Plan

(‘PSP’)

To incentivise

Executive Directors,

and to deliver

genuine long-term

performance-related

pay, with a clear line

of sight for Executives

and direct alignment

with shareholders’

interests.

Awards will be in the form of nil-cost share options, conditional shares or other

such form as has the same economic effect.

Awards will be granted with vesting dependent on the achievement of

performance conditions set by the Remuneration Committee, with performance

normally measured over at least a three-year performance period.

The Remuneration Committee retains discretion to adjust vesting levels in

exceptional circumstances, including but not limited to regard of the overall

performance of the Company or the grantee’s personal performance.

Awards will usually be subject to a two-year holding period following the end of

the performance period, and shares will typically not be released to participants

until the end of any such holding period.

Awards under the PSP may be granted on the basis that the participant shall be

entitled to an additional benefit (normally in shares) in respect of dividends paid

over the holding period. This amount shall be calculated on such basis as the

Remuneration Committee determines.

The PSP includes provisions which enable the Remuneration Committee to

recover or withhold value in the event of certain defined circumstances.

150% of salary. PSP performance measures may include, and are

not limited to, relative TSR, EPS, strategic measures

and ESG-related objectives.

A maximum of 25% of any element vests for

achieving the threshold performance target and

100% for maximum performance.

Performance metrics and weightings are reviewed

annually and may be varied for future award cycles

as appropriate to reflect the prevailing strategic

priorities of the Group at that time.

Shareholding

guidelines

To further align the

Executive Directors’

long-term interests

with those of

shareholders.

In employment:

Until the guideline has been reached Executive Directors are required to retain all

of the net number of vested shares from the PSP and DBP. Vested shares which

are subject to a holding period under the PSP and shares which are subject to

DBP awards will count towards the limit (on a net of assumed tax basis).

Post employment:

Executive Directors will normally be required to hold shares at a level equal to the

lower of their shareholding at cessation of employment and 200% of salary for

two years post cessation in respect of any share awards granted after the 2021

AGM and excluding own shares purchased.

200% of salary. Not applicable.

Non-Executive Directors (including the Non-Executive Chair role)

Annual Fee To attract individuals

with appropriate

knowledge and

experience.

Fees are normally reviewed annually taking into account factors such as the time

commitment and contribution of the role and market levels in companies of

comparable size and complexity.

The Chair is paid an all-inclusive fee for all Board responsibilities.

Fees for the other Non-Executive Directors may include a basic fee and

additional fees for further responsibilities (for example, chairing of Board

committees or holding the office of Senior Independent Director).

In exceptional circumstances, if there is a temporary yet material increase in the

time commitments for Non-Executive Directors, the Board may pay extra fees on

a pro rata basis to recognise the additional workload.

Neither the Chair nor the Non-Executive Directors participate in any

of the Group’s performance related schemes (i.e. annual bonus or

incentive arrangements). Nor do they receive any pension or private

medical insurance or taxable benefits, other than the potential to

receive gifts at the end of a long-standing term of appointment.

Non-Executive Directors may be eligible to receive benefits such as the

use of secretarial support, travel costs or other benefits that may be

appropriate and the Company repays any reasonable expenses that a

Non-Executive Director incurs in carrying out their duties as a Director,

including any tax liabilities thereon, if appropriate.

Not applicable.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

99

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

99

Explanation of performance

measures chosen

Performance measures for the annual bonus are selected

annually to align with the KPIs and prevailing strategic

imperatives of the Group, and the interests of shareholders

and other stakeholders. Financial measures (e.g. underlying

profit before tax) will be used for a majority of the bonus with

any remainder based on key strategic, ESG-related and/

or personal objectives designed to ensure that Executive

Directors are incentivised to deliver across a range of

objectives. ‘Target’ performance is typically set in line with the

business plan for the year, with threshold to stretch targets

set around this based on a sliding scale which takes account

of relevant commercial factors. Only modest rewards are

available for delivering threshold performance levels, with

rewards at stretch requiring material outperformance of

the business plan. Details of the specific measures used

for the annual bonus are set out in the annual report on

remuneration.

Performance measures for the PSP are selected in order to

provide a robust and transparent basis on which to measure

the Group’s performance, to demonstrably link remuneration

outcomes to delivery of the business strategy over the longer

term, and to provide strong alignment between senior

management and shareholders. In achievement of these

aims, PSP awards granted in 2025 will be based on underlying

basic Earnings Per Share (‘EPS’), relative Total Shareholder

Return (‘TSR’) and ESG-related metrics. EPS is currently a

critical KPI for the Group, supporting a focus on profitability

and growth; TSR is aligned with the Group’s focus on creating

value for our shareholders; and ESG-related objectives are

being built in to reflect the increasing importance of this

aspect of the Group’s overall strategy. However, the policy

provides for Remuneration Committee discretion to alter the

PSP measures and weightings to ensure they can continue to

facilitate an appropriate measurement of performance over

the life of the policy, taking account of any evolution in the

Group’s strategic ambitions.

When setting performance targets for the bonus and PSP, the

Remuneration Committee will take into account a number

of different reference points, which may include the Group’s

business plans and strategy, external forecasts and the wider

economic environment.

The Remuneration Committee retains discretion to amend

the bonus pay-out and to reduce the PSP vesting level if any

formulaic outcome is not reflective of the Remuneration

Committee’s assessment of overall business performance over

the relevant performance period.

Malus and clawback

The following provisions apply:

• Prior to the payment of an annual bonus or vesting of a

DBP or PSP award, the Remuneration Committee may

operate ‘malus’ (or ‘withholding’) to cancel the award.

• For up to two years following the payment of an annual

bonus award, the Remuneration Committee may operate

‘clawback’ (or ‘recovery’) to require the repayment of

any cash amount paid or may cancel any deferred

bonus award.

• For up to two years after the vesting of a PSP award, the

Remuneration Committee may operate clawback to

cancel the award during the holding period (or require

repayment of the award if it has been released prior to the

end of the holding period); reduce future vesting under the

Company’s share plans; or reduce the number of shares

already vested but unexercised.

The circumstances in which malus and clawback may be

operated are as follows:

• the Company materially misstated its financial results

(excluding any changes resulting from a change in

accounting standards);

• the Executive’s conduct being such that it would entitle

(or, where the Employment has terminated prior to the

date on which the Board becomes aware of such act or

omission, would have entitled) the Group to terminate the

Employment summarily;

• a material error having occurred in determining whether

any corporate or personal performance conditions

relating to the bonus or PSP award have been met (or any

other material error having occurred in calculating the

sum that was awarded as a bonus or the size of the PSP

award);

• circumstances which in the opinion of the Board would

have (or would have if made public) a sufficiently

significant impact on the reputation of the Company

or Group;

• the Company becomes insolvent or otherwise suffers a

corporate failure and the Board determines that such

circumstances arose from events occurring (in whole or

substantial part) during any period in which the relevant

individual was a participant; or

• such other exceptional circumstances which, in the

Remuneration Committee’s absolute discretion, justify

such reimbursement being imposed.

100100

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Discretion retained by the Committee in

operation of the incentive plans

The Remuneration Committee will operate the Company’s

incentive plans according to their respective rules and

consistent with normal market practice, the Listing Rules

and HMRC rules where relevant, including flexibility in a

number of regards. These include making awards and setting

performance criteria each year, dealing with leavers, and

adjustments to awards and performance criteria following

acquisitions, disposals, special dividends, changes in share

capital and to take account of the impact of other merger

and acquisition activity, and to settle awards in cash. The

Remuneration Committee also retains discretion within the

policy to adjust the targets, set different measures and/

or alter weightings for the annual bonus plan and PSP, pay

dividend equivalents on vested shares up to the date those

shares can first reasonably be exercised and, in exceptional

circumstances, under the rules of the long-term incentive

plans to adjust performance conditions to ensure that the

awards fulfil their original purposes (for example, if an external

benchmark or measure is no longer available).

All assessments of performance are ultimately subject to

the Remuneration Committee’s judgement. Any discretion

exercised, and the rationale, will be disclosed in the Annual

Remuneration Report.

Differences in pay policy for

Executive Directors compared to

employees more generally

The Remuneration Policy applied to the Executive Directors

is similar to the policy for the wider senior management

team in that a significant element of remuneration is

dependent on Group performance and the key principles of

the remuneration philosophy are applied consistently across

the Group below this level, taking into account seniority and

market practice. Key features include:

• we aim to provide market competitive levels of

remuneration across the workforce in order to recruit and

retain high calibre employees at all levels;

• we have aligned pension contributions for Executive

Directors with the workforce;

• all UK employees have the opportunity to participate

in an HMRC-approved employee share scheme

arrangement; and

• employees at selected levels participate in an annual

bonus arrangement.

At senior levels, remuneration is increasingly long term, and ‘at

risk’ with an increased emphasis on performance-related pay

and share-based remuneration.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

101

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

101

Illustrations of application of remuneration policy

The chart below sets out for the incoming Chief Executive an illustration of the application for 2026 of the proposed

Remuneration Policy set out above. Data has not been presented for the Chief Financial Officer given that he has resigned from

the role and noting that the incoming Interim Financial Officer will initially join the Group on 12 March 2026 below the Board.

The chart shows the split of remuneration between fixed pay and annual bonus and PSP on the basis of minimum remuneration,

remuneration receivable for performance in line with the Group’s expectations, maximum remuneration (not allowing for any

share price appreciation) and maximum remuneration (assuming 50% share price growth).

Minimum

On-target Maximum

£'000

Chief Executive

Maximum with

share price growth

Share price growth

PSP

Annual bonus

Fixed pay

£0

£500

£1,000

£1,500

£2,000

£2,500

100% 52% 29% 24%

30%

32% 27%

18%

39%

33%

16%

In illustrating the potential reward, the following assumptions have been made.

Fixed pay Annual bonus PSP

Minimum performance

Fixed

elements of

remuneration

only – base

salary (being

the salary at

the date of

joining if later),

an estimated

value for

benefits and

cash in lieu of

pension of 8%

of salary

No annual bonus

reward.

No vesting.

On-target

(performance in line

with expectations)

50% of maximum

awarded

(equivalent

to 62.5% of

salary) for

achieving target

performance.

25% of maximum award vesting (equivalent to 37.5% of

salary) for achieving target performance.

Maximum performance

125% of salary

awarded for

achieving

maximum

performance.

100% of maximum award vesting (equivalent to 150% of

salary) for achieving maximum performance.

Maximum performance

plus 50% share price

growth

100% of maximum award vesting (equivalent to 150%

of salary) for achieving maximum performance plus

hypothetical share price growth of 50%.

Notes to the scenarios methodology:

• Annual bonus includes amounts deferred into shares.

• PSP is measured at face value, i.e. no assumption for dividends or share price growth (other than in the fourth scenario).

• Any potential amounts relating to all-employee share schemes have been excluded.

102102

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Recruitment remuneration

The policy aims to facilitate the appointment of individuals

of sufficient calibre to lead the business, to execute the

Group’s strategy effectively and to promote the long-term

success of the Group for the benefit of shareholders and other

stakeholders. When appointing a new Executive Director, the

Remuneration Committee seeks to ensure that arrangements

are in the best interests of the Group and not to pay more

than is appropriate.

The Remuneration Committee will take into consideration

a number of relevant factors, which may include the calibre

and experience of the individual, the candidate’s existing

remuneration package, and the specific circumstances of the

individual, including the jurisdiction from which the candidate

was recruited.

When hiring a new Executive Director, the Remuneration

Committee will typically align the remuneration package with

the above Policy. The Remuneration Committee may include

other elements of pay which it considers are appropriate;

however, this discretion is capped and is subject to the

principles and the limits referred to below.

• Base salary will be set at a level appropriate to the role

and the experience of the Executive Director being

appointed and the circumstances of the appointment.

This may include agreement on setting the salary at below

the market rate with a series of future staged increases

planned in order to bring the salary up to a market level,

in line with progression in the role, increased experience

and/or responsibilities, and subject to satisfactory

performance, where it is considered appropriate.

• Retirement benefits will be workforce aligned and other

benefits will be provided in line with the above policy.

• If the Executive Director will be required to relocate in

order to take up the position, it is the Group’s policy to

allow reasonable relocation, travel and subsistence

payments. Any such payments will be at the discretion of

the Remuneration Committee.

• The Remuneration Committee will not offer non-

performance related incentive payments (for example a

‘guaranteed sign-on bonus’).

• If an Executive Director is recruited at a time in the year

when it would be inappropriate to provide a bonus or

long-term incentive award for that year as there would

not be sufficient time to assess performance, subject

to the limit on variable remuneration set out below, the

quantum in respect of the months employed during the

year may be transferred to the subsequent year so that

reward is provided on a fair and appropriate basis.

• The Remuneration Committee may also alter the

performance measures, performance period, vesting

period, deferral period and holding period of the annual

bonus or PSP, if the Remuneration Committee determines

that the circumstances of the recruitment merit such

alteration. The rationale will be clearly explained in the

following Directors’ Remuneration Report.

• The maximum level of variable remuneration which may

be granted (excluding ‘buyout’ awards as referred to

below) is 275% of salary.

• The Remuneration Committee may make additional

payments or awards in respect of hiring an employee to

‘buyout’ remuneration arrangements forfeited on leaving

a previous employer. In doing so, the Committee will take

account of relevant factors including any performance

conditions attached to the forfeited arrangements

and the time over which they would have vested. The

Remuneration Committee will generally seek to structure

buyout awards or payments on a like-for-like basis to

the remuneration arrangements forfeited. Any such

payments or awards are limited to the expected value of

the forfeited awards. Where considered appropriate, such

buyout awards will be liable to forfeiture or ‘malus’ and/or

‘clawback’ on early departure.

• Any share awards referred to in this section, including

any buyout awards, will be granted as far as possible

under the Group’s existing share plans. If necessary, and

subject to the limits referred to above, awards in relation

to a recruitment may be granted outside of these plans

as permitted under the Listing Rules which allow for the

grant of awards to facilitate, in unusual circumstances, the

recruitment of an Executive Director.

• Where a position is filled internally, any ongoing

remuneration obligations or outstanding variable pay

elements shall be allowed to continue according to the

original terms.

• Fees payable to a newly appointed Chair or Non-

Executive Director will be in line with the fee policy in place

at the time of appointment.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

103

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

103

Service contracts and letters of appointment

Executive Directors’ service contracts are on a rolling basis and may be terminated on up to 12 months’ notice by the Group or by

the Executive.

All Non-Executive Directors have letters of appointment providing for fixed-term agreements with the Group which may be

terminated by the giving of three months’ notice by either party (Chair six months’ notice). The agreements last for an initial

period of three years and may then be extended for two additional periods of three years, subject to re-election by shareholders

at the relevant AGM.

Copies of Executive Directors’ service contracts and Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment are available for inspection

at the Company’s registered office during normal hours of business.

Payments for loss of office

The principles on which the determination of payments for loss of office will be approached are set out below:

Component Policy

Payment in lieu

of notice

If notice is served by either party, the Executive Director can continue to receive base salary, benefits and

pension for the duration of their notice period, during which time the business may require the individual to

continue to fulfil their current duties or may assign a period of garden leave.

The Group has discretion to make a payment in lieu of notice. Such a payment would include base

salary and, at the election of the Remuneration Committee, compensation for benefits and pension

contributions (if applicable) for the unexpired period of notice.

Annual bonus This will be at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee on an individual basis and the decision as

to whether or not to award an annual bonus award in full or in part will be dependent on a number of

factors, including the circumstances of the individual’s departure (i.e. normal good leaver provisions) and

their contribution to the business during the annual bonus period in question. Any annual bonus award

amounts paid in respect of a good leaver will normally be prorated for time in service during the annual

bonus period and will, subject to performance, be paid at the usual time (although the Remuneration

Committee retains discretion to pay the annual bonus award earlier in appropriate circumstances) and

normally subject to deferral policy. Any bonus earned for the year of departure and, if relevant, for the prior

year may be paid wholly in cash at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

Deferred

bonus awards

The extent to which any unvested deferred bonus award will vest will be determined in accordance with

the rules of the Deferred Bonus Plan (‘DBP’).

If a participant ceases employment for any reason (other than summary dismissal, in which case his award

will lapse), his award will ordinarily continue until the normal vesting date. The Remuneration Committee

retains discretion to release awards when the participant leaves.

Awards (in the form of nil cost options) which have vested and been released but remain unexercised at

the date of cessation may be exercised, for such period as the Remuneration Committee determines, if a

participant leaves for any reason (other than summary dismissal).

PSP The extent to which any unvested award will vest will be determined in accordance with the rules of the

PSP.

Unvested awards will normally lapse on cessation of employment. However, if a participant leaves due

to death, ill health, injury, disability, the sale of his employer or any other reason at the discretion of the

Remuneration Committee, the Remuneration Committee shall determine whether the award will be

released at cessation or on the normal release date or at some other time (such as following the end

of the performance period). In any case, the extent of vesting will be determined by the Remuneration

Committee taking into account the extent to which the performance condition is satisfied and, unless the

Remuneration Committee determines otherwise, the period of time elapsed from the date of grant to the

date of cessation relative to the performance period. Awards may then be exercised during such period as

the Remuneration Committee determines.

If a participant leaves for any reason (other than summary dismissal) after an award has vested but

before it has been released (i.e. during a ‘holding period’), his award will ordinarily continue until the

normal release date when it will be released to the extent it vested. The Remuneration Committee retains

discretion to release awards when the participant leaves.

Awards (in the form of nil cost options) which have vested and been released but remain unexercised at

the date of cessation may be exercised, for such period as the Remuneration Committee determines, if a

participant leaves for any reason (other than summary dismissal).

104104

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Component Policy

Change of

control

The extent to which unvested awards under the DBP and PSP will vest will be determined in accordance

with the rules of the relevant plan.

Awards under the DBP will vest in full in the event of a takeover, merger or other relevant corporate event.

Unvested awards under the PSP will vest early on a takeover, merger or other relevant corporate event. The

Committee will determine the level of vesting taking into account the extent to which the performance

condition is satisfied and, unless the Committee determines otherwise, the period of time elapsed from

the date of grant to the date of the relevant corporate event relative to the performance period.

Awards under the PSP which have vested but not been released (i.e. awards which are subject to a holding

period) will be released, to the extent vested.

Mitigation If an Executive Director’s employment is terminated, any compensation payment will be calculated in

accordance with normal legal principles including the application of mitigation to the extent appropriate

to the circumstances of the termination. Payments will be made in instalments and reduced to the extent

employment is taken up elsewhere.

Other

payments

Payments may be made either in the event of a loss of office or a change of control under any of the

Group’s HMRC-favoured all-employee share plans in line with the associated plan rules. There is no

discretionary treatment for leavers or on a change of control under these schemes.

In appropriate circumstances, payments may also be made in respect of accrued holiday, outplacement

and legal fees and other benefits that may be considered appropriate taking into account the

circumstances of the termination.

The Remuneration Committee reserves the right to make additional exit payments where such payments

are made in good faith in discharge of an existing legal obligation (or by way of damages for breach of

such an obligation) or by way of settlement or compromise of any claim arising in connection with the

termination of a Director’s office or employment.

Where a buy-out award is made under the Listing Rules then the leaver provisions would be determined at the time of

the award.

Where the Remuneration Committee retains discretion, it will be used to provide flexibility in certain situations, taking into

account the particular circumstances of the Director’s departure and performance.

There is no entitlement to any compensation in the event of Non-Executive Directors’ fixed-term agreements not being renewed

or the agreement terminating earlier.

Existing contractual arrangements and historical awards

The Remuneration Committee retains discretion to make any remuneration payment or payment for loss of office outside the

policy in this report (including exercising any discretions available to it in connection with any such payment):

• where the terms of the payment were agreed before the policy came into effect (including the satisfaction of options

granted under the CIP), provided in the case of any payment whose terms were agreed after the previous Directors’

Remuneration Policy was approved and before the policy in this report became effective, the remuneration payment or

payment for loss of office was permitted under that former policy;

• where the terms of the payment were agreed at a time when the relevant individual was not a Director of the Group and, in

the opinion of the Remuneration Committee, the payment was not in consideration of the individual becoming a Director of

the Group.

External appointments

The Board believes that experiences of other companies’ practices and challenges is valuable both for the personal

development of its Executive Directors and for the Group. Any external appointments are subject to Board approval (which

would not be given if the proposed appointment would lead to a material conflict of interest). Fees received by Executive

Directors in respect of external non-executive appointments are retained by the individual Director. Details of such

appointments are included in the Annual Report on Remuneration.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

105

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

105

Annual report on remuneration

Certain information provided in this part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report is subject to audit. This is annotated as audited.

Any information not annotated as audited is unaudited.

Single total figure of remuneration for each Director

The table below reports the total remuneration receivable in respect of qualifying services by each of the Executive Directors for

the years 2025 and 2024.

Directors’ remuneration as a single figure (audited)

Executive Directors

Base

salary/

fees

£000

Non-

salary

benefits

6

£000

Pension

related

benefits

7

£000

Total

fixed

£000

Annual

performance

bonus

£000

Share-

based

incentive

schemes

9

£000

Total

variable

£000

Total

£000

Stephen Bird

1

2025 87.5 1.8 – 89.3 – – – 89.3

2024 – – – – – – – –

Adam Phillips

2

2025 360.6 3.7 16.5 380.8 – – – 380.8

2024 325 1.6 16.2 342.8 – – – 342.8

Non-Executive Directors

Stephen Bird

1

2025 135.7 2.3 – 138 – – – 138

2024 60 0.9 – 60.9 – – – 60.9

Karen Hubbard 2025 57 2.7 – 59.7 – – – 59.7

2024 57 3 – 60 – – – 60

Robin Williams 2025 57 0.6 – 57.6 – – – 57.6

2024 57 0.4 – 57.4 – – – 57.4

Jemima Bird

3

2025 113.9 1.7 – 115.6 – – – 115.6

2024 57 0.9 – 57.9 – – – 57.9

Former Directors

Chris Payne

4

2025 376 7.7 30 413.7 – – – 413.7

2024 484.5 9.2 38.7 532.4 – – – 532.4

Keith Edelman

5

2025 59 4.5 – 63.5 – – – 63.5

2024 150 2.5 – 152.5 – – – 152.5

Total 2025 1,246.7 25 46.5 1317.2 – – – 1,317.2

2024 1,190.5 18.5 54.9 1,263.9 – – – 1,263.9

1

Stephen Bird was appointed Interim Executive Chair and with effect from 3 October 2025 receives a fee of £500,000 per annum for performing this enhanced interim

role and the figures in the table reflect the relevant pro-rata amounts for the remainder of the year ended 31 December 2025. This additional fee, which reflects his

significantly enhanced role, will be payable until the new Chief Executive is appointed. Prior to 3 October 2025, Stephen Bird received fees as Non-Executive Chair.

2

In addition to his base salary, Adam Phillips received a £10,000 per month acting up allowance which commenced on 3 October 2025 and will cease upon the

appointment of the new Chief Executive. The allowance, which does not receive the benefit of pension provision reflects Adam’s significant additional roles and

responsibilities in respect of supporting the Interim Executive Chair.

3

As detailed in the Annual Statement, Jemima Bird received an additional fee of £48,000 between 3 October 2025 and 31 December 2025 to reflect significant additional

support provided to the Company following the departures of the Chief Executive and Chief Commercial Officer.

4

Chris Payne stepped down as Chief Executive and an Executive Director on 3 October 2025.

5

Keith Edelman stepped down as Chair on 28 February 2025 and continued to be paid for a further three months thereafter.

6

Non-salary benefits for Executive Directors include the provision of a company car or car allowance, private medical insurance and other benefits deemed to be an

employment benefit such as some fuel costs. Non-salary benefits for Non-Executive Directors relates to taxable expenses.

7

The amount of employer contribution to a scheme or paid as cash in lieu of retirement benefits based on a fixed percentage of base salary. Chris Payne received

pension contributions from the Company equivalent to 8% of his base salary (£7,599 as pension, (£22,472 as a salary supplement, totalling £30,072) which aligns with the

contribution level (i) received by a significant proportion of our employees and (ii) available to all new joiners under the Headlam Master Trust Pension Scheme. Adam

Philips received pension contributions from the Company equivalent to 5% of his base salary.

8

Details of the annual bonus targets are set out on the following page.

9

Details of the 2023 PSP awards and performance condition assessment is set out in the 2023 PSP award section.

106106

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Annual performance bonus in respect of financial year 2025 (audited)

For 2025, the former Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer had a maximum annual bonus opportunity equal to 125% of

base salary, with 50% of maximum payable for a target level of performance. The bonus was assessed against the Company’s

underlying profit before tax (‘PBT’) (70% of bonus opportunity) and against the achievement of a number of key strategic and

ESG-related objectives (30% of bonus opportunity) as shown in the tables below:

Performance metric Weighting Threshold Target Maximum Actual

Bonus

earned

(% max)

EBITDA 70% £5.6m £6.2m £7.4m Below threshold 0%

Non-Financial 30% See table below 0%

The following non-financial strategic objectives were designed to focus on the achievement of certain key elements of

Company strategy.

Objective Target Maximum

Potential

Bonus

(% of bonus

opportunity)

Key Accounts Growth Target Revenue growth Target Revenue growth plus c10% 5%

Trade Counters Growth Target Revenue growth Target Revenue growth plus c10% 5%

Regional Distribution Market Share Hold market share Grow market share 5%

Buying Set increase in group rebates Set additional buying benefits 5%

Fusion implementation (customer

satisfaction)

NPS maintained NPS growth of at least 1ppt 5%

ESG (colleague engagement) Maintained Growth of at least 1ppt 5%

Total 30%

Noting that the threshold EBITDA target was not met, and notwithstanding any progress against the non-financial targets

above (which were not ultimately assessed in detail) the Remuneration Committee agreed to apply negative discretion to

reduce the 2025 bonus to nil.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

107

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

107

2023 PSP due to vest in 2026 (audited)

Awards granted under the PSP in 29 June 2023 are based on an underlying Basic Earnings Per Share (‘EPS’) performance

condition (70% of the award), a relative Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) performance condition (20% of the award) and an ESG

performance condition (10% of award). The performance targets are shown in the table below:

Performance Target % vesting

Underlying

Basic EPS

growth

(70% of award)

TSR v FTSE

SmallCap

(excluding ITs)

(20% of award)

tCO

2

e%

reduction

(10% of award)

Below Threshold – Less than 32.5p Below median Less than 22%

Threshold 25 32.5p Median 22%

Maximum 100 38.5p Upper quartile 25%

Actual Performance <32.5p Below median n/a

Vesting 0% 0% 0%

Noting that EPS and relative TSR performance was below threshold, the Committee determined that the 2023 PSP awards

should lapse regardless of performance against the ESG targets.

Director Shares granted Shares vesting

Value of shares

vesting

Chris Payne 277,669 0 £0

Share awards granted during the financial period (audited)

PSP awards

PSP awards were granted to the Executive Directors on 17 April 2025 as follows (audited)

Number

of nil-cost

options over

which award

granted

Value of

Award % of salary

% of award

vesting at

threshold

Date of

grant Performance period

Chris Payne 741,285 £741,285 150% 25% 17 April 2025 3 years ending 31.12.2027

Adam Phillips 497,250 £497,250 150% 25% 17 April 2025 3 years ending 31.12.2027

The share price used to determine the number of shares under the PSP was 100 pence, being the share price determined by the

Remuneration Committee. This was significantly above the prevailing share price at the date of grant (82.6 pence). A higher

share price was selected, which effectively reduced award levels by c.83%, to recognise the year on year fall in share price and

aid share usage/dilution management.

108108

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

The Awards are subject to an underlying Basic Earnings Per Share (‘EPS’) performance condition (70% of the award), a relative

Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) performance condition (20% of the award) and an ESG performance condition (10% of award).

The performance targets are shown in the table below:

Performance Target % vesting

Underlying

Basic EPS

for 2026

(70% of

award)

TSR v FTSE

SmallCap

(excluding ITs)

(20% of

award)

tCO

2

e%

reduction

(10% of

award)

Below Threshold – Less than 0p Below median Less than 25%

Threshold 25 >0p Median 25%

Maximum 100 ≥13.1p Upper quartile 29%

The vesting of the awards is additionally subject to a financial underpin whereby the extent of vesting may be adjusted to reflect

the overall financial performance of the Company over the three-year performance period. The Remuneration Committee

also has full discretion to ensure that the final outcome is warranted based on the performance of the Company in the light of

all relevant factors and to ensure there have been no windfall gains. Any awards vesting are additionally subject to a two-year

holding period following the date of vesting.

DBP awards (audited)

No DBP awards were granted to Executive Directors during the year ended 31 December 2025.

Payment for loss of office (audited)

Keith Edelman stepped down from the Board on 28 February 2025. He continued to be paid for three months thereafter in

respect of his notice period.

Chris Payne stepped down as an Executive Director on 3 October 2025. In respect of his leaving arrangements, he will continue

to receive his salary, pension and benefit provision up to 16 May 2026. Chris received salary, pension and benefits of £118,176,

£9,456 and £2,503 between stepping down from the Board and 31 December 2025. There will be no entitlement to an annual

bonus for 2025 or 2026 and all of his existing PSP and DBP awards will lapse.

As announced on 5 February 2026, Adam Phillips resigned and is expected to leave the Group after an orderly handover has

been completed. Adam will not be entitled to any bonus for 2025 or 2026 and his outstanding PSPs will lapse. He will retain his

2024 DBP awards (29,583 shares under award plus 975 shares in respect of dividend equivalents), which will continue to vest at

the normal vesting date. No legal fees were incurred.

Payments made to past Directors (audited)

No payments were made for past directors to be reported for the year under review.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

109

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

109

Executive Directors’ share awards outstanding (audited)

Scheme

Number of shares

/options as at

1 January 2025

Shares/options

granted

Shares/options

lapsed

Shares/options

exercised

Number of

shares/options at

31 December 2025

Date of grant

Share price at

grant (pence)

Exercise Price

(pence)

Market price on

exercise date

(pence)

Vesting date

Expiry date

Chris Payne

PSP - 741,285 – – 741,285 17 April 2025 100 Nil - April 2028 April 2035

PSP 395,402 – – – 395,402 18 March 2024 183.80 Nil – March 2027

1

March 2034

DBP 64,608⁴ – – – 64,608 18 March 2024 183.80 Nil – March 2026 March 2034

PSP 277,669 – – – 277,669 29 June 2023 257 Nil – June 2026

1

June 2033

DBP 22,563 – – 24,748

2

– 13 April 2023 301 Nil – April 2025 April 2033

PSP 111,548 – 111,548 – – 8 April 2022 381 Nil – April 2025

1

April 2032

SAYE 12,513 – – – 12,513 16 Oct 2024 143.42 114.74 – Nov 2027 April 2028

Adam Phillips

PSP 497,250 – – 497,250 17 April 2025 100 Nil - April 2028 April 2035

PSP 265,233 – – – 265,233 18 March 2024 183.80 Nil – March 2027

1

March 2034

DBP 29,583 – – – 29,583 18 March 2024 183.80 Nil – March 2026 March 2034

PSP 127,143 – – – 127,143 29 June 2023 257 Nil – June 2026

1

June 2033

SAYE 6,272 – – – 6,272 16 Oct 2024 143.42 114.74 – Nov 2027 May 2028

1

Award vests on date shown but is subject to a further two-year holding period during which time the option may not be exercised.

2

Chris Payne exercised his 2023 nil-cost option to acquire 24,748 shares on 1 May 2025 which reflects the addition of dividend equivalents in Shares, calculated on a

reinvestment basis.

3

SAYE awards are granted with an exercise price at a 20% discount to the market value of the shares at the time the invitation is made, as permitted under HMRC

regulations.

4

Further to the payments for loss of office disclosure on page 109, all of Chris Payne’s shares/options as at 31 December 2025 lapsed on 16 March 2026. Similarly, in respect

of Adam Phillips all awards (except for his 2024 DBP share awards which vested on 18 March 2026) will lapse on his departure from the Group later in 2026.

110110

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests (audited)

The interests of Directors and their connected persons in the Company’s ordinary shares as at 31 December 2025 were as set

out below. There have been no changes to those interests between 31 December 2025 and the date of signing of these financial

statements and reports.

Owned

Shares at 31

December

2025

1

PSP

Deferred

Bonus

Vested

but not

exercised SAYE

Shares under

Shareholding

Guidelines

2

Guidelines

achieved

3

(%)

Chris Payne⁴ 103,366 1,525,904 64,608 0 12,513 103,366 7%

Adam Phillips⁴ 2,168 889,626 29,583 0 6,272 15,679 1%

Keith Edelman 37,415 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Jemima Bird 19,794 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Stephen Bird 55,000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Karen Hubbard 12,008 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Robin Williams 23,000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1

Date of leaving in respect of Keith Edelman.

2

PSP awards are subject to performance conditions and continued service. Deferred Bonus shares are subject to continued service only.

3

This includes all owned shares plus, on a net of tax basis: (i) vested scheme interests; and (ii) deferred bonus awards which vest based on continued service only, as

permitted under the Company’s share ownership policy.

4

Please refer to footnote 4 of the Executive Directors’ share awards outstanding table on page 110 in respect of the treatment of Chris Payne and Adam Phillips’

outstanding share awards.

TSR graph

The graph below shows the value at 31 December 2025 of £100 invested in the Company on 1 January 2016 compared to the

value of £100 invested in the FTSE SmallCap Index, making the assumption that dividends are reinvested to purchase additional

equity. The SmallCap has been chosen given that the Company is a constituent of this index and has been over the period

presented.

31 Dec 1631 Dec 15 31 Dec 17 31 Dec 18 31 Dec 19 31 Dec 20 31 Dec 21 31 Dec 22 31 Dec 23 31 Dec 24 31 Dec 25

Headlam Group plc FTSE SmallCap Index

250

200

150

100

50

0

Total Shareholder Return (restated to 100)

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

111

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

111

Chief Executive remuneration table

The table below sets out the remuneration of the Chief Executive for the last ten financial year periods.

Period

Chief

Executive

single figure

of total

remuneration

(£000)

Annual

bonus (% of

maximum

opportunity)

Long-term

incentive

vesting (%

of maximum

opportunity)

2025 Chris Payne 414

1

– –

2024 Chris Payne 532 – –

2023 Chris Payne 644 20 –

2022 Chris Payne 674 38 –

2021 Chris Payne 205

2

100 –

2021 Steve Wilson 864

3

100 –

2020 Steve Wilson 514 – –

2019 Steve Wilson 798 45.5 5.7

2018 Steve Wilson 588 – 53.5

2017 Steve Wilson 1,069 65.8 97.5

2016 Steve Wilson 1,067

4

76.8 98.6

2016 Tony Brewer 737

5

N/A 88.9

1

Reflects remuneration received by Chris Payne up until the 3 October 2025 when he stepped down as Chief Executive and an Executive Director.

2

The remuneration shown is on a pro-rated basis for the period Chris Payne was Interim Chief Executive from 7 October 2021 to 31 December 2021 only.

3

Steve Wilson stepped down as Chief Executive and a Director on 6 October 2021. The 2021 figures reflect his remuneration earned from the start of 2021 until the date of

his resignation as a Director. This remuneration is for a part year and does not include a termination payment.

4

The remuneration shown is for the full year and incorporates his remuneration as Group Finance Director from 1 January 2016 until 14 September 2016 when he became

Chief Executive.

5

Tony Brewer stepped down as Chief Executive and a Director on 14 September 2016. The 2016 figures reflect his remuneration earned from the start of 2016 until the date

of his resignation as a Director. This remuneration is for a part year and does not include a termination payment.

112112

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Percentage change in remuneration of Directors compared with other employees

The table below shows the percentage increase/(decrease) in each Executive and Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration

compared with the Company’s employees as a whole between the financial periods 2020, 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024 and 2025.

2025 2024 2023 2022 2021

Director

Salary and fees

(% change)

All taxable benefits

(% change)

Annual Bonuses

2

(% change)

Salary and fees

(% change)

All taxable benefits

(% change)

Annual Bonuses

2

(% change)

Salary and fees

(% change)

All taxable benefits

(% change)

Annual Bonuses

2

(% change)

Salary and fees

(% change)

All taxable benefits

(% change)

Annual Bonuses

2

(% change)

Salary and fees

(% change)

All taxable benefits

(% change)

Annual Bonuses

2

(% change)

Executive Directors

Stephen Bird N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Adam Phillips

8

11 127 0 41.9 60 -100 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Non-Executive Directors

Stephen Bird

3

126 156 0 0 0 N/A 15 -73 N/A 282 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Jemima Bird

6 9

98 89 N/A 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Karen Hubbard

6

0 -10 N/A 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Robin Williams

6

0 50 N/A 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Former Directors

Chris Payne N/A N/A N/A 2 -23.3 -100 14 -37 -42 25 27 (55) – (10) 100

Keith Edelman

5

N/A N/A N/A 0 0 N/A 27 -72 N/A 95 N/A N/A – N/A N/A

Philip Lawrence N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A (60) N/A N/A – N/A N/A

Amanda Aldridge

7

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 12 N/A N/A – N/A N/A

Simon King

3

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 120 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Steve Wilson

4

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A (23) (24) 100

Alison Littley

4

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A (75) N/A N/A

All employees

1

8 6 0 12 8 0 7 -3 -100 3 (6) (74) – 5 100

1

Reflects the average percentage change in salary, benefits and bonus for all employees who were employed in 2024 and 2025.

2

This reflects annual bonus paid in respect of the financial year as per the single figure table.

3

Stephen Bird has been included twice in the above table in respect of his Non-Executive Chair role and his Interim Executive Chair role..

4

Alison Littley and Steve Wilson left the Board on 31 March 2021 and 6 October 2021 respectively and their pro-rated salary is reflected in the percentage change shown.

5

Keith Edelman stepped down from the Board 28 February 2025.

6

Jemima Bird and Robin Williams joined the Board on 11 October 2022 and Karen Hubbard joined the Board on 1 September 2022..

7

Philip Lawrence stepped down from the Board on 19 May 2022 and Amanda Aldridge stepped down from the Board on 11 October 2022.

8

Adam Phillips joined the Board on 20 March 2023.

9

Includes fees paid to Jemima Bird associated with significant additional time commitment.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

113

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

113

Relative importance of spend on pay

The table below shows the overall expenditure on dividends and on pay as a whole across the Company along with the

percentage change between each

2025

£000

2024

£000 % change

Dividends

1

Nil Nil –

Pay 103,057 105,530 -2.3%

1

Includes dividends paid during the financial year.

CEO pay ratio

The data shows how the Chief Executive’s single figure remuneration for 2025 (as taken from the single figure remuneration

table) compares to equivalent single figure remuneration for the year ended 31 December 2025 for full-time equivalent UK

employees as at 31 December 2025, on a Group basis, ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile.

Period Method

25th

percentile

ratio

Median (50th

percentile)

ratio

75th

percentile

ratio

2025 Option A 15.5:1 13.6:1 9.84:1

2024 Option A 21.5:1 18.3:1 13.5:1

2023 Option A 27.3:1 22.7:1 16.6:1

2022 Option A 29.2:1 24.0:1 16.9:1

2021

1

Option A 51.1:1 38.9:1 26.5:1

2020 Option A 25.8:1 20.7:1 14.4:1

2019 Option A 39.3:1 31.8:1 22.7:1

1

The remuneration for comparison for 2021 reflects the total remuneration included in the single total figure of remuneration table paid to Steve Wilson and Chris Payne

in relation to the period that each were undertaking the role of Chief Executive. Pension payments have been omitted from the CEO pay ratio calculation for the period

that Steve Wilson was Chief Executive to maintain consistency as he did not receive a pension payment. Pension payments have been included for the period in which

Chris Payne was Chief Executive to align with his pay package.

Option A was selected given that this method of calculation was considered to be the most efficient and robust approach in

respect of gathering the required data and was consistent with reporting for previous years.

The salary and total pay and benefits for the UK employees at the relevant percentiles, and upon which the pay ratios have

been calculated, are as follows:

Year Percentile Salary (£)

Total pay and

benefits (£)

2025 25th percentile 26,559 26,559

Median 30,436 30,436

75th percentile 40,545 42,049

The CEO pay ratios for 2025 are significantly lower than those for 2024. This is primarily due to the CEO single figure only including

nine months of the year due to the CEO standing down in October. However, the single figure has continued to reduce year on

year which reflects the zero annual bonus award for 2025. Even so, excluding the reduced quantity of months the median CEO

pay ratio is still representative of the UK employee base and not inconsistent with the Company’s pay, reward and progression

policies. The median pay ratio has shown a steady upward trend over the past four years, increasing by 2% from 2021 to 2022,

1% from 2022 to 2023, 3% from 2023 to 2024 and would be 4.5% from 2024 to 2025 if comparable to a full 12 months of CEO pay.

Whilst the fluctuation in growth rates suggests some variability, the overall trajectory indicates a continued rise. This reflects

adjustments in compensation structures, changes in workforce composition, and broader economic factors influencing pay

distribution.

114114

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Executive Directors’ service contracts

Chris Payne was appointed on 13 September 2017 and the date of his current service contract was 8 March 2022.

Chris Payne stepped down as an Executive Director on 3 October 2025.

Adam Phillips was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 20 March 2023 (and was appointed as a Board Director with effect

from 25 May 2023), and the date of his current service contract is 14 November 2022.

Stephen Bird was appointed Interim Executive Chair on 3 October 2025 and the date of his current terms of appointment is

7 October 2025.

Rob Barclay joined the Board as Designate Chief Executive Officer on 9 March 2026 and will assume the role of Chief Executive

Officer on 27 April 2026. The date of his service contract is 3 February 2026.

The service contracts for Chris Payne, Adam Phillips and Rob Barclay contain a 12-month notice period.

Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment

Details of the current Non-Executive Directors’ appointment dates are set out below:

Non-Executive Director Date of appointment Expiry of current term

Keith Edelman 1 October 2018 n/a

Jemima Bird 10 October 2022 10 October 2028

Stephen Bird 13 September 2021 12 September 2027

Karen Hubbard 1 September 2022 31 August 2028

Robin Williams 10 October 2022 10 October 2028

Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2026

Details of how the Company will operate the Remuneration Policy in 2026 are set out in the Annual Statement.

Remuneration Committee activity

The Board approved the terms of reference, delegating certain responsibilities to the Remuneration Committee, most recently

on 15 December 2025. The terms of reference are reviewed periodically and are available on the Company’s website within the

Governance section at www.headlam.com. The Remuneration Committee comprises the Chairman and each of the other Non-

Executive Directors. Attendance at scheduled meetings of the Committee during the year was as follows:

Members

Meetings

attended

Eligible to

attend

Jemima Bird 4 4

Stephen Bird 3 4

1

Karen Hubbard 4 4

Robin Williams 4 4

Members additionally correspond on urgent matters between formal Remuneration Committee meetings. Other Directors

may attend Remuneration Committee meetings by invitation, including the Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer where

appropriate. The Remuneration Committee also receives assistance from the Interim Chief People Officer, the General Counsel

& Company Secretary and from independent external advisers, FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP. The General Counsel &

Company Secretary acts as Secretary to the Remuneration Committee.

No one attending a Remuneration Committee meeting may participate in discussions relating to their own terms and

conditions of service or remuneration.

1

Stephen Bird did not attend one meeting where discussions were about remuneration changes relating to his change in role as it was not appropriate for him to attend.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

115

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

115

Main role and key responsibilities

The Remuneration Committee’s main responsibilities include:

• designing the framework and policy for Executive Directors’ remuneration and determining remuneration packages for

the Executive Directors, Chair and Senior Management, including the Company Secretary, to promote the achievement of

the Group’s strategy and long-term sustainable success. When setting executive remuneration, take into account the link

between Executive Director and senior manager remuneration and that provided to the wider workforce;

• establishing remuneration schemes that promote long-term shareholding by Executive Directors and that support

alignment with Shareholders’ interests, both in post and post cessation;

• approving the design and operation of the Company’s short-term and long-term incentive arrangements. This includes

agreeing the targets that are applied to awards made to Executive Directors and the Senior Management Team;

• oversight of the administration of share plans as required;

• reviewing workforce remuneration and related policies; and

• determining the policy for and scope of pension arrangements for Executive Directors and Senior Management.

Remuneration Committee activities

The key matters discussed at the meetings of the Remuneration Committee in 2025 were as follows:

Remuneration

• considered the Company’s culture, wider workforce remuneration arrangements, and Company-wide annual bonus

schemes and considered these when setting pay strategy for Executive Directors and Senior Management;

• reviewed wider workforce remuneration arrangements, and annual bonus scheme and considered in conjunction with pay

strategy for Executive Directors and Senior Management;

• considered pay awards for Executive Directors and Senior Management;

• considered Annual Bonus payments;

• reviewed and confirmed that no vesting would occur for the 2022 PSP;

• approved the Annual Bonus payments for 2024;

• approved the 2025 PSP Award and targets;

• considered remuneration for Executive Directors, Senior Management and the Interim Executive Chair; using market data

where appropriate;

• considered Executive Director leaver arrangements;

• reviewed the Directors Remuneration Policy ahead of its renewal at the 2026 AGM; and

• considered actual remuneration (in respect of the year ended 31 December 2024) and expected remuneration (for the year

ending 31 December 2025) and concluded that actual/expected executive pay outcomes were appropriate in light of: (i)

Company performance (fixed pay only); (ii) market norms; and (iii) the approach to pay across the workforce (noting CEO

Pay Ratio and Gender Pay Gap data).

Governance

• received feedback from the Employee Forum on matters relating to remuneration;

• reviewed recommendations made by the voting agencies in their AGM reports;

• reviewed its own terms of reference; and

• approved its annual workplan.

Reporting

• approved the Remuneration Report (including CEO pay ratio and Gender Pay Gap disclosure).

Effectiveness

• reviewed the Committee’s effectiveness; and

• reviewed the performance of its independent advisor FIT Remuneration and determined that they should remain in office.

116116

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT CONTINUED

Remuneration Committee effectiveness

The effectiveness of the Remuneration Committee was evaluated as part of the Board performance evaluation process.

The review found that the Remuneration Committee is operating effectively.

Advisers

FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP (FIT) has served as independent adviser to the Remuneration Committee throughout the

year under review. FIT was appointed by the Committee in 2019 following a competitive tender process. FIT also provided

additional related advice to the Company in relation to drafting this report, share plan operation and Non-Executive Director

fee benchmarking. FIT’s fees in respect of advice provided during the year ended 31 December 2025 were £27,028 (excluding

VAT) and were charged on a time and disbursements basis. FIT is a member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and as such

voluntarily operates under its Code of Conduct in relation to executive remuneration in the UK. The Remuneration Committee

reviewed the performance of the FIT and was satisfied that all advice received was of good quality, objective and independent.

Statement of shareholders’ votes

The following table sets out the results of the binding vote on the Directors’ Remuneration Policy at the 2023 AGM and the vote

on the 2024 Directors’ Remuneration Report at the 2025 AGM.

% of votes

cast

For

% of votes

cast

Against

Number of

Shares

Withheld

2023 Remuneration Policy 90.72 9.28 1,903,961

2024 Annual Report on Remuneration 99.74 0.26 1,161,285

This report has been approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by Jemima Bird, Chair of the

Remuneration Committee.

Jemima Bird

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

25 March 2026

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

117

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

117

The Directors present their report, together with the audited

financial statements for the Group, for the year ended

31 December 2025. This report contains additional information

which the Directors are required by law and regulation to

include within the Annual Report and Accounts. In conjunction

with the information from the Chair’s Statement on page 2 to

the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities on page 123, this

section constitutes the Directors’ Report in accordance with

the Companies Act 2006 and the Management Report as

required by DTR 4.1.5 R(2).

Principal activities

The principal activities of the Group are the sales, marketing,

supply and distribution of floorcoverings and certain other

ancillary products in the UK and certain Continental Europe

territories. The principal activity of the Company is that of a

holding company and its subsidiaries are listed on page 188.

Further details of the Group’s activities and future plans are

set out in the Strategic Report on pages 7 to 53.

Headlam Group plc is a company incorporated and domiciled

in the UK, company number 00460129. The address of the

registered office is Gorsey Lane, Coleshill, Birmingham B46 1JU.

Strategic report and future

developments

The Group is required by the Companies Act 2006 to include

a Strategic Report in this document. The information that

fulfils the requirements of the Strategic Report, and which

is incorporated in this report by reference, can be found

on pages 7 to 53. The Strategic Report includes certain

disclosures required to be contained in the Directors’ Report

as follows: the viability statement (page 51), approach to

diversity (pages 34, 87 and 88), workforce engagement (pages

32 to 34 and 69), an indication of likely future developments

(page 2 onwards, Strategic Report), and the approach to risk

management (pages 46 to 50).

Directors

The following were Directors of the Company during the

period ended 31 December 2025 and at the date of this report

unless otherwise stated:

• Keith Edelman (27 February 2025)

• Chris Payne (until 3 October 2025)

• Adam Phillips

• Stephen Bird

• Jemima Bird

• Karen Hubbard

• Robin Williams

Corporate governance statement

The corporate governance statement as required by the

Financial Conduct Authority’s Disclosure and Transparency

Rules (DTR) 7.2.1 is set out on pages 56 and 57 and is

incorporated into this report by reference.

Acquisitions

There have been no acquisitions during the year.

Property disposals

During the year, as part of the Company’s transformation

programme, it sold and leaseback its Tamworth property for

a total of £21.7 million (excluding VAT) which was a significant

transaction under the Listing Rules. Please also see page

2 for more information of the Company’s transformation

programme.

Financial results and ordinary dividends

The results for the year and financial position at

31 December 2025 are shown in the Consolidated Income

Statement on page 134 and Statements of Financial Position

on page 136.

No interim dividend was paid in 2025 per ordinary share (2024:

Nil) to shareholders and the Directors propose no final dividend

is paid per ordinary share (2024: Nil) in respect of the financial

year ended 31 December 2025 which means the total dividend

for FY25 will be nil p per ordinary share.

Going Concern

The Directors concluded that it remains appropriate to

prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis.

In doing so, it is recognised that, whilst the transformation

plan, which is underway, is expected to be net cash positive,

there are elements of the cash inflows that are not wholly

within the Group’s or the Directors’ control. Whilst the Directors

are confident that the plan, or sufficient mitigating actions,

can be executed, in the event that both a) property sales are

delayed and b) sufficient mitigating options are unable to be

implemented, the Group would need to seek amendments to

its liquidity covenants in the ABL which, given previous strong

support from its prior lender group, the Directors believe

would be achievable as required. Given that neither such

completion of property transactions nor further mitigations

are wholly within the Group’s control this, in the Directors’

view, is considered to constitute the existence of a material

uncertainty, as disclosed in note 1 to the financial statements.

Share capital

As at 31 December 2025, the issued share capital of the

Company comprised a single class of ordinary shares of 5p

each (‘Ordinary Shares’).

The Company’s Ordinary Shares are listed on the Main Market

of the London Stock Exchange. No new Ordinary Shares were

issued during the year. The Company’s total issued share

capital therefore remains 85,639,209 Ordinary Shares as at

31 December 2025.

The balance of shares in treasury stock as at

31 December 2025 was 4,767,467 Ordinary Shares (5.6% of the

Company’s total issued share capital).

Details of the Company’s share capital are set out in note

23 to the financial statements, which should be treated as

forming part of this report. Subject to the provisions of the

Articles of Association and the Companies Act 2006, shares

may be issued with such rights or restrictions as the Company

may by ordinary resolution determine or, if the Company has

not so determined, as the Directors may decide. There are,

however, no restrictions on the transfer of securities in the

Company, except that certain restrictions may from time to

time be imposed by law or regulation, for example, insider

trading laws, and pursuant to the Listing Rules of the Financial

Conduct Authority (the ‘Listing Rules’), and the UK Market

Abuse Regulation, whereby certain employees require the

approval of the Company to deal in the Company’s shares.

118118

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

On a show of hands at a general meeting of the Company

every holder of ordinary shares present in person and entitled

to vote shall have one vote, and on a poll every member

present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote shall have

one vote for every ordinary share held. The Notice of AGM

specifies deadlines for exercising voting rights and appointing

a proxy or proxies to vote in relation to resolutions to be

passed at the AGM. All proxy votes are counted and the

numbers for, against or withheld in relation to each resolution

are announced at the AGM and published on the Company’s

website by the next business day after the meeting. The

holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive the Annual

Report and Accounts, to attend and speak at general

meetings of the Company, to appoint proxies and to exercise

voting rights. The Company is not aware of any agreements

between holders of securities that may result in restrictions

on voting rights. Further shareholder information is available

in the Notice of AGM which contains explanations as to the

resolutions proposed.

Subject to certain limits, at the AGM on 23 May 2025, the

Directors were granted general authority to allot shares in

the Company together with an authority to allot shares in

the Company in connection with a rights issue and in respect

of cash without first offering them to existing shareholders.

The Directors will be seeking to renew these authorities to

allot unissued shares and to disapply statutory pre-emption

rights at the forthcoming AGM. Full details are set out in the

Notice of AGM which is contained in a separate circular to

shareholders.

In line with usual practice, the Directors will also seek to renew

the authority to purchase shares under the at the forthcoming

AGM. The Company intends to exercise this authority: (i) to

purchase and hold shares in treasury to fulfil the Company’s

future obligations under its employee share schemes; and/

or (ii) after following its capital allocation priorities and

considering market conditions and the share price prevailing

at the time, where the Board believes that the purchase

and subsequent cancellation of shares would be in the best

interest of shareholders generally. A full explanation and

details are set out in the Notice of AGM sent in a separate

circular to shareholders and which is also available on the

Company’s website, www.headlam.com

Directors

Biographies of Directors currently serving on the Board are set out on pages 60 and 61.

Changes to the Board in 2025 are set out on page 86. Details of the Directors’ service agreements are set out below:

Director

Date of appointment

Date of original letter

of appointment/

service agreement

Effective date of

current letter of

appointment/service

agreement

Next due for

election/re-election

Executive Director

Chris Payne 13 September 2017 N/A 8 March 2022 N/A

Adam Phillips 20 March 2023 14 November 2022 N/A

Non-Executive Director

Stephen Bird (Chair from

27 Feb 2025 and Interim

Executive Chair from

3 October 2025) 13 September 2021 10 August 2021 13 September 2024 20 May 2026

Jemima Bird 11 October 2022 10 October 2022 10 October 2022 20 May 2026

Karen Hubbard 1 September 2022 1 September 2022 1 September 2022 20 May 2026

Robin Williams 10 October 2022 10 October 2022 10 October 2022 20 May 2026

Remaining service agreement term for Non-Executive Directors as at 31 December 2025 (in whole months)

• Stephen Bird – 20 months

• Jemima Bird – 33 months

• Karen Hubbard – 32 months

• Robin Williams – 33 months

As Keith Edelman stepped down from the Board on 27 February 2025 there is no remaining service agreement term for him.

The Directors shall be not less than three and not more than eight in number, although the Company may by ordinary resolution

vary these numbers. Directors may be appointed by the ordinary resolution of the shareholders or by the Board. A Director

appointed by the Board holds office only until the next AGM of the Company after their appointment, at which they are then

eligible to stand for election. The AGM Notice of Meeting will set out the Board Directors who are standing for re-election and in

addition, Rob Barclay and Richard Jones will be standing for election as Directors at the 2026 AGM.

As noted elsewhere in this report, all Directors are subject to annual election by shareholders at the AGM in line with the

provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code.

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

119

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

119

Related party transactions

The Board and certain members of Senior Management are

related parties within the definition of IAS 24 (Revised) ‘Related

Party Disclosures’ (‘IAS 24’) and the Board are related parties

within the definition of Chapter 8 of the UK Listing Rules. There

is no difference between transactions with key personnel of

the Company and transactions with key personnel of the

Group. During the year, the Group did not enter into any

transaction which, for the purposes of IAS 24, is considered to

be a ‘related party transaction’. No related party transactions

that require disclosure have been entered into during the year

under review. See page 105 for information on the Board’s

conflict of interest process.

Directors’ powers

Subject to the Company’s Articles of Association, the

Companies Act 2006 and any directions given by the

Company by special resolution, the business of the Company

will be managed by the Board which may exercise all

the powers of the Company, whether relating to the

management of the business of the Company or otherwise.

The matters reserved for the Board are detailed in a specific

schedule, which is reviewed annually and is available on the

Company’s website, www.headlam.com.

Change of control

The Group has entered into certain agreements that may

take effect, alter or terminate upon a change of control of the

Company following a successful takeover bid. The significant

agreements in this respect are the Group’s asset backed

banking facility and certain of its employee share schemes.

The Group’s asset backed lending facilities include a provision

such that, in the event of a change of control, the lender may

cancel all or any part of the facility and/or declare that all

amounts outstanding under the facility are immediately due

and payable by the Group. Outstanding options granted

under the SAYE scheme may be exercised within a period of six

months from a change of control of the Company following a

takeover taking place.

Rights under employees’ share schemes

As at 31 December 2025, JTC Trust Company (CI) Limited,

as trustee of the Headlam Group Employee Trust Company

Limited (‘Trust’) held 589,077 shares, approximately 0.7% of

the issued share capital of the Company (excluding treasury

shares) for the purpose of satisfying options and awards

under the various employee share schemes operated by the

Company. JTC Trust Company (CI) Limited waives dividends

due on all but 0.01p per share of their total holding.

Details of employee share schemes are set out in note 22

to the Financial Statements. Details of long-term incentive

schemes for the Directors are shown in the Remuneration

Report starting on page 92.

Securities carrying special rights

There are no requirements for prior approval of any transfers

and no person holds securities in the Company carrying

special rights with regard to control of the Company.

Substantial interests in voting rights

Notifications of the following voting interests in the

Company’s ordinary share capital had been received by the

Company (in accordance with Chapter 5 of the DTR), with the

information received from the discloser stated to be correct

at the time of disclosure.

As at and up to 31 December 2025, the persons set out in the

table below have notified the Company, pursuant to DTR 5.1,

of their interests in the voting rights in the Company’s issued

share capital.

Ordinary shares of 5p each

Number of

shares

1

% of total

voting

rights

2

Perpetual Limited 9,007,692 11.14%

Heronbridge Investment

Management LLP 4,034,568 4.99%

First Seagull 4,214,257 5.21%

1

Represents the number of voting rights last notified to the Company by the

respective shareholder in accordance with DTR 5.1.

2

Based on the Total Voting Rights in the Company as at 31 December 2025.

Since 31 December 2025, there have been the following

notifications since 31 December 2025 to 24 March 2026:

Ordinary shares of 5p each

Number of

shares

1

% of total

voting

rights

2

FIL Limited 3,004,791 3.71%

First Seagull AS 7,502,588 9.28%

Lombard Odier Asset

Management (Europe) Limited 3,654,603 4.52%

IG Markets Limited 2,359,365 2.91%

1

Represents the number of voting rights last notified to the Company by the

respective shareholder in accordance with DTR 5.1.

2

Based on the Total Voting Rights in the Company as at 31 December 2025.

Directors’ interests and indemnity

arrangements

During the year, no Director held any material interest in

any contract of significance with the Company or any of

its subsidiary undertakings, other than service agreements

between each Executive Director and the Company. In

addition, the Company has purchased and maintained

throughout the year and up to the date of approval of the

financial statements, Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance

in respect of itself and its Directors. The Directors also have the

benefit of the indemnity provision contained in the Company’s

Articles of Association. This provision extends to include the

Directors of Headlam Group Pension Trustees Limited, a

corporate trustee of the Scheme, in respect of liabilities that

may attach to them in their capacity as Directors of that

corporate trustee. These provisions were in force throughout

the year and are currently in force. Details of Directors

remuneration, service agreements, and interests in the shares

of the Company are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration

Report.

120120

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

Anti-corruption and bribery

It is the Company’s policy to conduct all business in an honest

and ethical manner. The Company takes a zero-tolerance

approach to bribery and corruption and is committed to

acting professionally, fairly and with integrity in all business

dealings and relationships. The policy is detailed on the

Company’s website, www.headlam.com

Modern Slavery Act

The Board fully supports the aims of the Modern Slavery Act

and the Company has a zero-tolerance approach to slavery

and human trafficking. The Company issues a supplier Code

of Conduct which our suppliers are expected to engage

and adhere to. Headlam works with all suppliers to ensure

compliance. However, if any supplier is found to be involved

in any form of Modern Slavery or unethical behaviour, the

Company will look to suspend or cease trading with that

supplier.

Full information can be found in the Company’s Modern

Slavery Statement which is published annually on the

Company’s website and which details the actions undertaken

to prevent slavery and human trafficking in both the

Company’s organisation and its supply chain.

Human rights

We have policies and processes in place to ensure that we

act in accordance with our cultural values which encompass

areas such as equal opportunities, diversity, inclusion and

respect, anti-corruption and bribery, whistleblowing and

fraud. We do not believe this to be a material issue in our

business.

Employment policies

The Group is an equal opportunities employer and we

are committed to the elimination of unlawful and unfair

discrimination and the fair and equal treatment of all

colleagues and applicants during the recruitment and

selection process, training and career development. We have

a zero-tolerance approach to matters of discrimination,

harassment and bullying across the business. Polices are in

place for reporting and dealing with such matters.

This commitment applies regardless of anyone’s physical

ability, sexual orientation or gender identity, pregnancy and

maternity, race, religious beliefs, age, nationality or ethnic

origin. Our Company policies ensure this is reflected in the

culture of the business and include an Inclusion and Respect

at Work policy. Full consideration is given to employment

applications from people with diverse backgrounds, including

disabilities whenever suitable vacancies exist. If a colleague

becomes disabled efforts are made to ensure their continued

employment within the company with appropriate training as

required.

Further details on diversity are included in the

Nomination Committee Report on page 86.

Colleague engagement

We are committed to keeping our colleagues informed and

communicating with them on matters of importance relating

to our company performance and their employment. We

also recognise that communication should be two-way

and we actively encourage feedback and involvement

from our colleagues, either through formal channels such

as our Employee Forum (page 69), our engagement survey,

or more informal methods such as the dedicated internal

communications email address or MyHub portal. Further

information on colleague engagement can be found on

pages 32, 33 and 69.

A summary of how Directors have engaged with employees

and had regard to employee interests and the effect of that

regard on the principal decisions taken by the Company

during the financial year is provided on pages 18, 68, 74 and 75.

Sharesave and long service awards

During the year, the Company invited all eligible employees to

participate in:

a. its HMRC approved Sharesave Scheme, (this Scheme

allows eligible employees to save up to £500 per month in

one or a combination of Sharesave Schemes in order to

further align their interests with the performance of the

Group); and

b. its long service award scheme which awards colleagues

after certain milestones of service with a monetary gift

and, for longer serving employees, an award of ordinary

shares in the Company to be granted bi-annually

under the scheme using service milestones and as at

31 December 2025, a total of 12,100 ordinary shares of 5

pence each were awarded in 2025 to eligible employees

at nil cost under the scheme

Management long-term incentive plan

During the year, to allow eligible employees to further align

their interests with the performance of the Group, the

Company granted a number of Open Market Value share

options to eligible employees being:

a. senior leadership teams (a total of 2,010,639 Open Market

Value Options over ordinary shares of 5 pence each

were awarded in 2025 to a select group of senior leaders

approved by the Remuneration Committee and typically

granted once per year; and

b. the Company’s sales force, they were awarded Open

Market Value Options as a one-off exercise (a total of

81,381 Open Market Value Options over ordinary shares of

5 pence each were awarded to eligible employees within

this group approved by the Remuneration Committee).

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

121

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

121

Stakeholder engagement

The Directors understand the need to develop good

business relationships with its suppliers, customers and other

stakeholders and the success with which this is achieved is

paramount to business success. Further information on the

Company’s approach to engagement with its stakeholders

and how this feeds through into the decision-making process

can be found on pages 18 to 20.

Directors’ and auditor’s responsibilities

A statement by the Directors on their responsibilities in respect

of the Annual Report and Accounts is given on page 123 and

a statement by the Auditor on their responsibilities is given on

page 126.

Political donations and expenditure

The Company’s policy is not to make any donations for

political purposes in the UK or to donate to political parties

or incur political expenditure outside of the UK. Accordingly,

neither the Company nor its subsidiaries made any political

donations or incurred political expenditure in the financial

period under review (2024: £nil).

Charitable donations

Charitable giving is undertaken through both monetary and

product donations to good local causes. Monetary donations

made during the year in support of charitable causes

nationally, and those of interest to employees amounted to

£23,029 (2024: £63,518).

Amendments to the Articles of

Association

The Company’s Articles of Association may only be amended

by a special resolution at a general meeting of shareholders.

The Company’s Articles of Association were last amended at

the general meeting held on 21 May 2021 with the updated

articles being filed with the Registrar of Companies.

Financial instruments

The disclosures required in relation to the use of financial

instruments by the Group together with details of our treasury

policy and management are set out in note 23 to the financial

statements.

External auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have indicated their willingness

to continue as Auditor and their reappointment has been

approved by the Audit Committee. Resolutions to reappoint

them and to authorise the Directors to determine their

remuneration will be proposed at the 2026 AGM.

AGM

This year’s AGM will be held at the Company’s head office in

Coleshill on Wednesday 20 May 2026 at 10.00am. The notice

convening this meeting is in a separate document to this

Annual Report and Accounts along with the explanatory

notes regarding the resolutions that will be proposed at the

meeting. A copy of the Notice of Meeting will be available on

the Company’s website: www.headlam.com

Other disclosures

Certain information that is required to be included in the

Directors’ Report can be found elsewhere in this document as

referred to below, each of which is incorporated by reference

into the Directors’ Report:

• Information on greenhouse gas emissions can be found on

page 43.

• Information on energy consumption can be found on

page 43.

• Information on energy efficiency can be found on

page 28.

• For the purposes of Listing Rule (LR) 9.8.6R(8) the

information on climate-related financial disclosures

consistent with the TCFD recommendation and the TCFD

recommended disclosure can be found on pages 38 to 42.

• Further details of the actions which the Group is taking to

reduce emissions can also be found in the Sustainability

Report starting on page 28.

• An indication of likely future developments in the Group’s

business can be found throughout the Strategic Report,

starting on page 12.

• The long-term viability statement can be found on

page 51.

• Our approach to risk management can be found on

pages 46 to 48.

• Information for shareholders can be found on the

Company’s website.

• A list of the Company’s overseas subsidiaries is on

page 188.

This report was approved by the Board and signed on its

behalf by:

Alison Hughes

General Counsel & Company Secretary

25 March 2026

Company registration number: 00460129

122122

DIRECTORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

Listing Rule (LR)

6.6.1R information section

(1) Capitalised interest Not applicable

(2)

Publication of unaudited

financial information Not applicable

(3)

Details of long-term

incentive schemes

established specifically to

recruit or retain a Director Pages 92 to 117

(4) (5)

Waiver of emoluments

by a Director Not applicable

(6) (7)

Allotments of equity

securities for cash Not applicable

(8)

Participation in a placing of

equity securities Not applicable

(9) Contracts of significance Not applicable

(10) (13)

Controlling shareholder

disclosure Not applicable

(11) (12) Dividend waiver Page 179

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report

and Accounts and the financial statements in accordance

with applicable law and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial

statements for each financial year. Under that law the

Directors have prepared the Group and the Company

financial statements in accordance with UK-adopted

international accounting standards.

Under company law, Directors must not approve the

financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give

a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and

Company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that

period. In preparing the financial statements, the directors are

required to:

• select suitable accounting policies and then apply

them consistently;

• state whether applicable UK-adopted international

accounting standards have been followed, subject to

any material departures disclosed and explained in the

financial statements;

• make judgments and accounting estimates that are

reasonable and prudent; and

• prepare the financial statements on the going concern

basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group

and Company will continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for safeguarding the assets of

the Group and Company and hence for taking reasonable

steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other

irregularities.

The Directors are also responsible for keeping adequate

accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain

the Group’s and Company’s transactions and disclose with

reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the

Group and Company and enable them to ensure that the

financial statements and the Directors’ Remuneration Report

comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and

integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the United

Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of

financial statements may differ from legislation in other

jurisdictions.

Directors’ confirmations

The Directors consider that the Annual Report and Accounts,

taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and

provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess

the Group’s and Company’s position and performance,

business model and strategy.

Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed in

the Annual Report and Accounts confirm that, to the best of

their knowledge:

• the Group and Company financial statements, which

have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted

international accounting standards, give a true and fair

view of the assets, liabilities and financial position of the

Group and Company, and of the loss of the Group; and

• the Strategic Report includes a fair review of the

development and performance of the business and the

position of the Group and Company, together with a

description of the principal risks and uncertainties that

it faces.

In the case of each Director in office at the date the Directors’

report is approved:

• so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit

information of which the Group’s and Company’s auditors

are unaware; and

• they have taken all the steps that they ought to have

taken as a Director in order to make themselves aware

of any relevant audit information and to establish that

the Group’s and Company’s auditors are aware of that

information.

Stephen Bird

Director

25 March 2026

Strategic Report

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

123

Governance

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

123

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’

RESPONSIBILITIES

124124

FINANCIAL

STATEMENTS

Independent Auditors’ Report

126

Consolidated Income Statement

134

Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income

135

Statements of Financial Position

136

Statement of Changes in Equity – Group

137

Statement of Changes in Equity – Company

138

Cash Flow Statements

139

Notes to the Financial Statements

140

Alternative Performance Measures

189

Financial Record

193

Additional Information

195

125125

Financial Statements

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

125

Financial Statements

Report on the audit of the financial statements

Opinion

In our opinion, Headlam Group Plc’s group financial statements and company financial statements (the “financial statements”):

• give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the company’s affairs as at 31 December 2025 and of the group’s

loss and the group’s and company’s cash flows for the year then ended;

• have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards as applied in accordance

with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

• have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual Report and Accounts (the “Annual Report”), which

comprise:

• the Statements of Financial Position as at 31 December 2025;

• the Consolidated Income Statement for the year then ended;

• the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year then ended;

• the Statement of Changes in Equity – Group for the year then ended;

• the Statement of Changes in Equity – Company for the year then ended;

• the Cash Flow Statements for the year then ended; and

• the notes to the financial statements, comprising material accounting policy information and other explanatory

information.

Our opinion is consistent with our reporting to the Audit Committee.

Basis for opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our

responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for

our opinion.

Independence

We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the

financial statements in the UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to listed public interest entities, and we

have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not

provided.

We have provided no non-audit services to the company or its controlled undertakings in the period under audit.

Material uncertainty related to going concern

In forming our opinion on the financial statements, which is not modified, we have considered the adequacy of the disclosure

made in note 1 to the financial statements concerning the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern.

The Directors have performed their going concern assessment for the period to the end of March 2027 which includes the

planned sale of certain properties. In the event that these sales are delayed; and that sufficient mitigating actions are unable

to be implemented, the Group and Company would need to seek amendments to the liquidity covenants contained within their

banking facilities. These conditions, along with the other matters explained in note 1 to the financial statements, indicate the

existence of a material uncertainty which may cast significant doubt about the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as

a going concern. The financial statements do not include the adjustments that would result if the group and the company were

unable to continue as a going concern.

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the

preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and the company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern

basis of accounting included:

• Confirming the loans and borrowings balance outstanding as at 31 December 2025.

• Obtaining the new asset backed lending (“ABL”) facility agreement entered into in January 2026 and confirming that the

key aspects of the agreement being borrowing limits, financial covenants and operational covenants were appropriately

considered within managements going concern assessment.

• Assisted by our business viability experts, we evaluated management’s detailed cash flow forecasts, liquidity headroom and

covenant headroom under both base case and downside scenarios.

126126

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT

TO THE MEMBERS OF HEADLAM GROUP PLC

• Testing the cash flows were consistent with board approved forecasts. We also obtained corroborating evidence for the

margin improvements and cost savings associated with managements transformation plan.

• We have assessed management’s downside scenarios to determine whether these reflect a severe and plausible

deterioration of the group’s performance and cash generation during the going concern period.

• Performed sensitivity analysis to determine what level of further revenue and margin decline would be required to result in a

breach of the group’s banking covenants and assessed whether such declines were considered plausible.

• In respect of the proposed property disposals we have assessed management’s ability to complete the transactions in the

timeframes and for the values included in the forecasts including consideration of the group’s track record of executing

similar recent transactions, the results of recent marketing activities related to the properties and offers received from

interested parties.

• Assessing potential mitigating actions available to management including the extent they could be used to avoid a breach

of banking covenants and whether they are dependant on factors which are outside of the control of management.

• Assessing the adequacy of disclosures included in note 1 of the notes to the financial statements.

In relation to the directors’ reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, other than the material

uncertainty identified in note 1 to the financial statements, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation

to the directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the

going concern basis of accounting, or in respect of the directors’ identification in the financial statements of any other material

uncertainties to the group’s and the company’s ability to continue to do so over a period of at least twelve months from the

date of approval of the financial statements.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections

of this report.

Our audit approach

Overview

Audit scope

• The group financial statements are a consolidation of a number of reporting components, comprising the group’s operating

businesses, centralised functions and non-trading entities.

• We performed full scope audits on the financial information of one component due to it’s size and risk characteristics.

• In addition, we targeted significant balances in other components. This was identified as property, plant and equipment,

notes payable, interest expense, other creditors and provisions across two components. We also performed centralised

testing over balances and transactions such as intangible assets, cash and cash equivalents, leases, taxes, equity and the

consolidation.

• All work was performed by the group team and no reliance was placed upon the work of component auditors.

• Our audit of the company Financial Statements included substantive procedures over all material balances and

transactions.

• Finally, we performed analytical procedures on non-significant components for group reporting purposes.

Key audit matters

• Material uncertainty related to going concern

• Recoverability of Supplier arrangements (group)

• Recoverability of investments in subsidiary undertakings (company)

Materiality

• Overall group materiality: £2,447,000 (2024: £1,710,000) based on 0.5% of Revenue (2024 basis: 5% of underlying loss

before tax).

• Overall company materiality: £2,539,000 (2024: £1,624,000) based on 1% of total assets.

• Performance materiality: £1,835,000 (2024: £1,282,000) (group) and £1,904,000 (2024: £1,218,000) (company).

The scope of our audit

As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial

statements.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

127

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

127

Financial Statements

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the

financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether

or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the

allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters, and any comments we

make on the results of our procedures thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole,

and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

In addition to going concern, described in the Material uncertainty related to going concern section above, we determined

the matters described below to be the key audit matters to be communicated in our report. This is not a complete list of all risks

identified by our audit.

The key audit matters below are consistent with last year.

Key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Recoverability of Supplier arrangements (group)

Refer to the Audit Committee Report and the use

of estimates and judgements in note 1(b) to the

financial statements. The group has a significant

number of rebate agreements with suppliers with

the majority being co-terminous with the financial

year end, meaning there are significant amounts

of rebates receivable subject to recovery at the

year end.

We tested a sample of rebate receivable balances based on risk and size.

For those tested we agreed post year end settlements to evidence of cash

receipt or credit notes received, to provide evidence over the recoverability

of the balances. For any amounts not yet settled we assessed the

recoverability through consideration of any evidence to suggest the

counterparty was not able to pay the amounts due and the timing of

payments received in previous years.

We also performed lookback procedures over management’s historical

recovery rates which showed an average recovery rate of 98%.

Recoverability of investments in subsidiary

undertakings (company)

Refer to the Audit Committee Report and note 11

to the financial statements. Annually, the Directors

consider whether any events or circumstances have

occurred that could indicate that the company’s

carrying amount of investments may not be

recoverable. There was an indicator of impairment

present for HFD Limited given the net assets of

the subsidiary was below the carrying value of the

investment. Furthermore, the market capitalisation

of the group has decreased significantly during

the year, implying a valuation of the underlying

subsidiaries below the carrying value. Management

have assessed the recoverable amount, being the

higher of value in use and fair value, to determine

whether an impairment is required. This resulted in

the investment in HFD Limited being impaired by

£83.8m to nil.

We evaluated management’s assessment of impairment triggers across

all investments. Where an impairment trigger was identified, management

used a value in use model to determine the recoverable amount. We

obtained this model and tested its integrity and accuracy.

We agreed the revenue and cash flows used as the basis of the model

back to board approved forecasts and verified consistency of 2026 and

2027 with the underlying cash flow forecasts used for going concern. For

2028 onwards we reviewed corroborative and contradictory evidence

available for growth rates by performing independent research for market

and wider economic forecasts.

We reviewed gross margins and confirmed they were consistent with the

margin improvements and cost savings associated with managements

transformation plan.

We reviewed adjustments made to the underlying cash flows to reflect

amounts capable of being extracted as dividends by the parent company,

for example settlement of intercompany balances.

We engaged valuation experts to benchmark the discount rate and

terminal growth rate calculated by management.

We considered sensitivity of the conclusion to reasonably possible changes

in key assumptions.

We considered 2026 actual results to date against management’s forecasts.

We reviewed the associated disclosures within the financial statements.

128128

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

TO THE MEMBERS OF HEADLAM GROUP PLC

How we tailored the audit scope

We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial

statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the group and the company, the accounting processes and controls,

and the industry in which they operate.

The Group operates as a supplier and distributor of floorcovering products. The Group financial statements are a consolidation

of a number of reporting companies, comprising the group’s operating businesses, centralised functions and non-trading group

companies.

In establishing the overall approach to the group audit, we identified one UK reporting component which, in our view, required

an audit of their complete financial information both due to its size and risk characteristics. This reporting component was

audited by the group engagement team.

In addition, we targeted significant balances in other components. This was identified as property, plant and equipment, notes

payable, interest expense, other creditors and provisions across two components. We also performed centralised testing over

balances and transactions such as intangible assets, cash and cash equivalents, leases, taxes, equity and the consolidation.

The work on the full scope component, significant balance testing, together with additional procedures performed at the Group

level, including analytical procedures and specific testing of the consolidation, gave us the evidence we needed for our opinion

on the Group financial statements as a whole.

Our audit of the company Financial Statements was undertaken by the group audit team and included substantive procedures

over all material balances and transactions.

The impact of climate risk on our audit

As part of our audit, we made enquiries of management to understand their process to assess the extent of the potential impact

of climate change risks on the Group and its financial statements. Management’s assessment has considered the climate-

related risks disclosed in the Annual Report including the Group’s transition to its net zero emissions targets by 2040 (Scope 1,

2 & 3), and potential exposure to changing consumer preferences and potential new legislation. In particular, management

considered the extent to which:

– The group may incur costs in the transition to net zero, for example, replacements to renewable energy, buildings and

vehicles;

– The group may be exposed to government imposed end-of-life disposal taxes on bulky waste (extended producer

responsibility); and

– The group may be exposed to changing consumer preferences towards more sustainable flooring products.

As disclosed within notes 1 and 10 of the financial statements, management considers that the impact of climate change does

not give rise to a material financial statement impact based on the assumption that the increased cost of sustainable products

is passed onto consumers as consumer preferences shift towards more sustainable products in the medium term.

In response, we used our understanding of the Group to evaluate management’s assessment; in particular, we considered

how climate change risks, both physical and transitional, would impact the assumptions made in the forecasts prepared by

management used in their impairment analyses and in their going concern and viability assessments. We concluded that

climate change risks do not materially impact the Group’s financial statements. We also read the disclosures made in relation

to climate change in the other information within the Annual Report, and considered their consistency with the financial

statements and our knowledge from the audit.

Materiality

The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality.

These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and

extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect of

misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as a whole.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

129

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

129

Financial Statements

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Financial statements – group Financial statements – company

Overall materiality £2,447,000 (2024: £1,710,000). £2,539,000 (2024: £1,624,000).

How we

determined it

Based on 0.5% of Revenue (2024 basis: 5% of underlying loss

before tax)

Based on 1% of total assets

Rationale for

benchmark

applied

Revenue is considered an appropriate benchmark as it

reflects a more accurate and consistent representation of

the scale of the Group’s trading activities as management

execute the restructuring of the business. Revenue also

represents one of the Group’s key KPIs and is a benchmark

which is regularly reported by industry peers. An underlying

loss benchmark was used in the prior year.

The Company's primary activity is to act

as an investment holding entity for the

Group’s trading subsidiaries. Therefore

total assets is seen as the primary

measure of the Company’s activities.

For each component in the scope of our group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall group materiality.

The range of materiality allocated across components was between £2,000,000 and £2,324,000.

We use performance materiality to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and

undetected misstatements exceeds overall materiality. Specifically, we use performance materiality in determining the scope

of our audit and the nature and extent of our testing of account balances, classes of transactions and disclosures, for example

in determining sample sizes. Our performance materiality was 75% (2024: 75%) of overall materiality, amounting to £1,835,000

(2024: £1,282,000) for the group financial statements and £1,904,000 (2024: £1,218,000) for the company financial statements.

In determining the performance materiality, we considered a number of factors – the history of misstatements, risk assessment

and aggregation risk and the effectiveness of controls – and concluded that an amount at the upper end of our normal range

was appropriate.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £244,000

(group audit) (2024: £85,000) and £253,000 (company audit) (2024: £81,000) as well as misstatements below those amounts that,

in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.

Reporting on other information

The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our

auditors’ report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements does

not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except to the extent otherwise explicitly

stated in this report, any form of assurance thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so,

consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained

in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify an apparent material inconsistency or material

misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to conclude whether there is a material misstatement of the financial

statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that

there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report based

on these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic report and Directors’ report, we also considered whether the disclosures required by the UK

Companies Act 2006 have been included.

Based on our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006 requires us also to report certain opinions and

matters as described below.

Strategic report and Directors’ Report

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic report and

Directors’ report for the year ended 31 December 2025 is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared in

accordance with applicable legal requirements.

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the

audit, we did not identify any material misstatements in the Strategic report and Directors’ report.

Directors’ Remuneration

In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the

Companies Act 2006.

130130

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

TO THE MEMBERS OF HEADLAM GROUP PLC

Corporate governance statement

The Listing Rules require us to review the directors’ statements in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that

part of the corporate governance statement relating to the company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate

Governance Code specified for our review. Our additional responsibilities with respect to the corporate governance statement

as other information are described in the Reporting on other information section of this report.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the corporate

governance statement, included within the Governance section is materially consistent with the financial statements and our

knowledge obtained during the audit, and, except for the matters reported in the section headed ‘Material uncertainty related

to going concern’, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to:

• The directors’ confirmation that they have carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks;

• The disclosures in the Annual Report that describe those principal risks, what procedures are in place to identify emerging

risks and an explanation of how these are being managed or mitigated;

• The directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt the going

concern basis of accounting in preparing them, and their identification of any material uncertainties to the group’s and

company’s ability to continue to do so over a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial

statements;

• The directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the group’s and company’s prospects, the period this assessment covers

and why the period is appropriate; and

• The directors’ statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the company will be able to continue in

operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of its assessment, including any related disclosures drawing

attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

Our review of the directors’ statement regarding the longer-term viability of the group and company was substantially less in

scope than an audit and only consisted of making inquiries and considering the directors’ process supporting their statement;

checking that the statement is in alignment with the relevant provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code; and considering

whether the statement is consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge and understanding of the group and

company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit.

In addition, based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the

corporate governance statement is materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during

the audit:

• The directors’ statement that they consider the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable, and

provides the information necessary for the members to assess the group’s and company’s position, performance, business

model and strategy;

• The section of the Annual Report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control

systems; and

• The section of the Annual Report describing the work of the Audit Committee.

We have nothing to report in respect of our responsibility to report when the directors’ statement relating to the company’s

compliance with the Code does not properly disclose a departure from a relevant provision of the Code specified under the

Listing Rules for review by the auditors.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

131

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

131

Financial Statements

Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit

Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements

As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the

financial statements in accordance with the applicable framework and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view.

The directors are also responsible for such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial

statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the company’s ability to

continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of

accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the company or to cease operations, or have no realistic

alternative but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material

misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance

is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a

material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or

in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these

financial statements.

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our

responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which

our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below.

Based on our understanding of the group and industry, we identified that the principal risks of non-compliance with laws

and regulations related to employment regulation, health and safety legislation and the Listing Rules, and we considered the

extent to which non-compliance might have a material effect on the financial statements. We also considered those laws and

regulations that have a direct impact on the financial statements such as the Companies Act 2006 and tax regulations. We

evaluated management’s incentives and opportunities for fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including the

risk of override of controls), and determined that the principal risks were related to posting of inappropriate journal entries and

management bias in accounting estimates. Audit procedures performed by the engagement team included:

• Reviewing board minutes and making inquiries of management, those charged with governance, internal audit and general

counsel regarding any known or suspected instances of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations.

• Regarding a specific legal claim for which the Group has made provision for in the financial statements, we reviewed

correspondence with external legal counsel, court filings made by the Group and considered publically available guidance in

evaluating the provision recorded in the financial statements.

• Challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in their significant accounting estimates and

judgements; and

• Testing of journals posted to revenue and non-underlying items that have unusual account combinations, including

immaterial journals below our usual threshold for testing.

There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described above. We are less likely to become aware of instances of

non-compliance with laws and regulations that are not closely related to events and transactions reflected in the financial

statements. Also, the risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one

resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or

through collusion.

Our audit testing might include testing complete populations of certain transactions and balances, possibly using data

auditing techniques. However, it typically involves selecting a limited number of items for testing, rather than testing complete

populations. We will often seek to target particular items for testing based on their size or risk characteristics. In other cases, we

will use audit sampling to enable us to draw a conclusion about the population from which the sample is selected.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at:

www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors’ report.

Use of this report

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in accordance with

Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume

responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save

where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

132132

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

TO THE MEMBERS OF HEADLAM GROUP PLC

Other required reporting

Companies Act 2006 exception reporting

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

• we have not obtained all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or

• adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been

received from branches not visited by us; or

• certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

• the company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement

with the accounting records and returns.

We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility.

Appointment

We were first appointed by the company for the financial year ended 31 December 2016. Our uninterrupted engagement covers

ten financial years.

Other matter

The company is required by the Financial Conduct Authority Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules to include these

financial statements in an annual financial report prepared under the structured digital format required by DTR 4.1.15R – 4.1.18R

and filed on the National Storage Mechanism of the Financial Conduct Authority. This auditors’ report provides no assurance

over whether the structured digital format annual financial report has been prepared in accordance with those requirements.

Laura Hill (Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors

Birmingham

25 March 2026

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

133

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

133

Financial Statements

Re-presented

1

Note

Underlying

2025

£M

Non-

underlying

(note 3)

2025

£M

Total

2025

£M

Underlying

2024

£M

Non-

underlying

(note 3)

2024

£M

Total

2024

£M

Revenue 2 498.7 – 498.7 525.7 – 525.7

Cost of sales 2 (351.4) (3.6) (355.0) (369.7) (10.6) (380.3)

Gross profit 2 147.3 (3.6) 143.7 156.0 (10.6) 145.4

Distribution costs (121.2) (10.0) (131.2) (119.8) (4.4) (124.2)

Administrative expenses (58.9) (22.7) (81.6) (59.8) (11.2) (71.0)

Net impairment losses on trade

receivables (0.6) – (0.6) (1.3) (1.3) (2.6)

Other operating income – 6.2 6.2 – 21.1 21.1

Operating loss 2 (33.4) (30.1) (63.5) (24.9) (6.4) (31.3)

Finance income 6 0.6 – 0.6 0.1 – 0.1

Finance expenses 6 (6.7) – (6.7) (6.9) – (6.9)

Net finance costs (6.1) – (6.1) (6.8) – (6.8)

Loss before tax 3 (39.5) (30.1) (69.6) (31.7) (6.4) (38.1)

Taxation 7 4.1 0.7 4.8 6.8 10.2 17.0

Loss from continuing

operations 2 (35.4) (29.4) (64.8) (24.9) 3.8 (21.1)

Loss from discontinued

operations 25 (4.4) (12.7) (17.1) (3.2) (0.7) (3.9)

Loss for the year attributable

to the equity shareholders (39.8) (42.1) (81.9) (28.1) 3.1 (25.0)

Loss per share from

continuing operations

Basic 8 (44.1)p (80.7)p (31.0)p (26.3)p

Diluted 8 (44.1)p (80.7)p (31.0)p (26.3)p

Total loss per share

Basic 8 (49.6)p (102.0)p (35.0)p (31.2)p

Diluted 8 (49.6)p (102.0)p (35.0)p (31.2)p

1

The results for the year ended 31 December 2024 have been re-presented to reflect the presentation of the Continental European businesses as discontinued (see note

25 for further information).

134134

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2025

Note

2025

£M

2024

£M

Loss for the year attributable to the equity shareholders (81.9) (25.0)

Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Items that will never be reclassified to profit or loss

Remeasurement of defined benefit plans 21 0.1 (0.5)

Related tax – 0.1

0.1 (0.4)

Items that are or may be reclassified to profit or loss

Exchange differences arising on translation of overseas operations 0.1 (0.2)

0.1 (0.2)

Other comprehensive income/(expense) for the year 0.2 (0.6)

Total comprehensive expense attributable to the equity shareholders for the year (81.7) (25.6)

Total comprehensive expense attributable to the equity shareholders for the year

arises from:

Continuing operations (64.7) (21.5)

Discontinued operations 25 (17.0) (4.1)

(81.7) (25.6)

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

135

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

135

Financial Statements

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT

OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2025

Group Company

Note

2025

£M

2024

£M

2025

£M

Restated

1

2024

£M

Restated

1

1 January

2024

£M

Assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment 9 68.8 86.9 1.8 2.2 3.2

Investment properties 9 – – 33.7 46.1 87.7

Right of use assets 18 53.6 55.1 6.4 3.2 0.8

Intangible assets 10 11.3 17.6 0.1 0.1 0.1

Deferred tax assets 12 8.2 3.9 – – –

Trade and other receivables 14 – – 105.2 107.8 74.6

Investments in subsidiary undertakings 11 – – 12.6 102.4 101.7

141.9 163.5 159.8 261.8 268.1

Current assets

Inventories 13 77.4 102.8 – – –

Trade and other receivables 14 86.6 111.0 60.5 20.8 19.4

Income tax receivable – 3.6 – 0.6 1.5

Cash and cash equivalents 15 26.1 12.0 25.5 7.5 15.1

Assets classified as held for sale 16 22.7 4.8 8.1 4.8 –

212.8 234.2 94.1 33.7 36.0

Total assets 354.7 397.7 253.9 295.5 304.1

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Bank overdrafts 17 – (1.1) – – –

Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings 17 (59.0) – (59.0) – (50.0)

Lease liabilities 18 (12.6) (13.8) (2.7) (1.8) (0.1)

Trade and other payables 19 (97.2) (139.2) (66.2) (74.3) (61.9)

Income tax payable (0.4) – (2.7) – (1.1)

Provisions 20 (1.6) – – – –

Liabilities relating to assets held for sale 25 (14.7) – – – –

(185.5) (154.1) (130.6) (76.1) (113.1)

Non-current liabilities

Lease liabilities 18 (54.1) (47.4) (12.1) (4.6) (0.8)

Provisions 20 (3.3) (3.1) (0.1) – –

Deferred tax liabilities 12 – – (2.6) (3.9) (7.7)

Employee benefits 21 (1.8) (2.1) (1.8) (1.5) (1.2)

(59.2) (52.6) (16.6) (10.0) (9.7)

Total liabilities (244.7) (206.7) (147.2) (86.1) (122.8)

Net assets 110.0 191.0 106.7 209.4 181.3

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent

Share capital 23 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3

Share premium 53.5 53.5 53.5 53.5 53.5

Other reserves 23 (15.3) (15.5) 3.5 3.4 3.2

Retained earnings 67.5 148.7 45.4 148.2 120.3

Total equity 110.0 191.0 106.7 209.4 181.3

The notes on pages 140 to 188 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

The Company is taking advantage of the exemption in s408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its individual income

statement, however the loss for the year attributable to the equity shareholders is £103.4 million (profit in 2024: £32.3 million).

The financial statements on pages 134 to 194 were approved by the Board of Directors on 25 March 2026 and were signed on its

behalf by

Adam Phillips

Director

Company Number: 00460129

1

See note 1 for details regarding the restatement.

136136

STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2025

Note

Share

capital

£M

Share

premium

£M

Capital

redemption

reserve

£M

Special

reserve

£M

Translation

reserve

£M

Treasury

reserve

£M

Retained

earnings

£M

Total

equity

£M

Balance at 1 January 2024 4.3 53.5 0.1 1.5 1.9 (19.0) 178.1 220.4

Loss for the year

attributable to the equity

shareholders – – – – – – (25.0) (25.0)

Other comprehensive

expense – – – – (0.2) – (0.4) (0.6)

Total comprehensive

expense for the year – – – – (0.2) – (25.4) (25.6)

Transactions with equity

shareholders, recorded

directly in equity

Share-based payments 22 – – – – – – 1.0 1.0

Share options exercised by

employees – – – – – 0.2 (0.2) –

Dividends to equity holders 23 – – – – – – (4.8) (4.8)

Total contributions by

and distributions to equity

shareholders – – – – – 0.2 (4.0) (3.8)

Balance at

31 December 2024 4.3 53.5 0.1 1.5 1.7 (18.8) 148.7 191.0

Balance at 1 January 2025 4.3 53.5 0.1 1.5 1.7 (18.8) 148.7 191.0

Loss for the year

attributable to the equity

shareholders – – – – – – (81.9) (81.9)

Other

comprehensive income – – – – 0.1 – 0.1 0.2

Total comprehensive

income/(expense) for

the year – – – – 0.1 – (81.8) (81.7)

Transactions with equity

shareholders, recorded

directly in equity

Share-based payments 22 – – – – – – 0.7 0.7

Share options exercised by

employees – – – – – 0.1 (0.1) –

Total contributions by

and distributions to equity

shareholders – – – – – 0.1 0.6 0.7

Balance at

31 December 2025 4.3 53.5 0.1 1.5 1.8 (18.7) 67.5 110.0

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

137

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

137

Financial Statements

STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN

EQUITY – GROUP

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2025

Note

Share

capital

£M

Share

premium

£M

Capital

redemption

reserve

£M

Special

reserve

£M

Treasury

reserve

£M

Retained

earnings

£M

Total

equity

£M

Balance at 1 January 2024 4.3 53.5 0.1 22.1 (19.0) 120.3 181.3

Profit for the year attributable

to the equity shareholders – – – – – 32.3 32.3

Other comprehensive

expense – – – – – (0.4) (0.4)

Total comprehensive

income for the year – – – – – 31.9 31.9

Transactions with equity

shareholders, recorded

directly in equity

Share-based payments 22 – – – – – 1.0 1.0

Share options exercised by

employees – – – – 0.2 (0.2) –

Dividends to equity holders 23 – – – – – (4.8) (4.8)

Total contributions by

and distributions to equity

shareholders – – – – 0.2 (4.0) (3.8)

Balance at 31 December 2024 4.3 53.5 0.1 22.1 (18.8) 148.2 209.4

Balance at 1 January 2025 4.3 53.5 0.1 22.1 (18.8) 148.2 209.4

Loss for the year attributable

to the equity shareholders – – – – – (103.4) (103.4)

Other comprehensive

expense – – – – – – –

Total comprehensive

expense for the year – – – – – (103.4) (103.4)

Transactions with equity

shareholders, recorded

directly in equity

Share-based payments 22 – – – – – 0.7 0.7

Share options exercised by

employees – – – – 0.1 (0.1) –

Total contributions by

and distributions to equity

shareholders – – – – 0.1 0.6 0.7

Balance at 31 December 2025 4.3 53.5 0.1 22.1 (18.7) 45.4 106.7

138138

STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY  COMPANY

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2025

Group Company

Note

2025

£M

2024

£M

2025

£M

Restated

1

2024

£M

Cash flows from operating activities

Continuing operations (69.6) (38.1) (101.9) 31.6

Discontinued operations (16.5) (3.4) – –

(Loss)/profit before tax for the year (86.1) (41.5) (101.9) 31.6

Adjustments for:

Depreciation and impairment of property, plant and

equipment, amortisation and impairment of intangible assets 13.9 11.0 0.9 1.8

Depreciation, impairment and termination of right of use

assets 14.9 14.1 1.1 0.1

Finance income 6 (0.6) (0.1) (10.5) (12.4)

Finance expense 6.9 7.1 3.9 4.6

Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment 3 (6.2) (21.1) (6.2) (21.4)

Impairment of disposal group classified as held for sale 25 12.6 – 6.4 –

Impairment of investments 11 – – 83.8 –

Impairment of intercompany receivables – – 22.2 –

Share-based payments 22 0.7 1.0 0.3 0.3

Operating cash flows before changes in working capital

and other payables (43.9) (29.5) – 4.6

Change in inventories 16.2 28.2 – –

Change in trade and other receivables 15.0 5.4 (49.5) (27.6)

Change in trade and other payables (30.1) 10.7 (20.4) 4.8

Cash (used in)/generated from the operations (42.8) 14.8 (69.9) (18.2)

Interest paid (7.0) (7.2) (3.7) (4.7)

Interest received 0.6 0.1 9.9 9.7

Tax received/(paid) 4.0 (0.1) 3.6 –

Net cash flow from operating activities (45.2) 7.6 (60.1) (13.2)

Cash flows from investing activities

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 21.2 61.3 21.2 61.3

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment (4.4) (10.5) – (0.8)

Acquisition of intangible assets 10 (0.2) (0.1) – –

Net cash flow from investing activities 16.6 50.7 21.2 60.5

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from borrowings 93.0 40.0 93.0 40.0

Repayment of borrowings (34.0) (90.0) (34.0) (90.0)

Principal elements of lease payments (13.8) (12.9) (2.1) (0.1)

Dividends paid 23 – (4.8) – (4.8)

Net cash flow from financing activities 45.2 (67.7) 56.9 (54.9)

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 16.6 (9.4) 18.0 (7.6)

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 10.9 20.4 7.5 15.1

Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held 0.1 (0.1) – –

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 15 27.6 10.9 25.5 7.5

1

See note 1 for details regarding the restatement.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

139

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

139

Financial Statements

CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2025

1 Presentation of the Financial Statements and Accounting Policies

Reporting entity

Headlam Group PLC (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company which is listed on the London Stock Exchange and

incorporated and domiciled in the UK. The address of its registered office is Gorsey Lane, Coleshill, Birmingham, B46 1JU.

Statement of compliance

Both the Company’s and the Group’s financial statements have been prepared and approved by the Directors in accordance

with UK adopted International Accounting Standards and with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 as applicable to

companies reporting under those standards. On publishing the Company’s financial statements here together with the Group

financial statements, the Company is taking advantage of the exemption in s408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its

individual income statement and related notes that form a part of these approved financial statements.

The Company and Group financial statements were authorised for issuance on 25 March 2026.

Basis of preparation

The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the financial statements of the Company and the financial statements

of the Group are set out below. These policies have been applied consistently to all years presented, unless otherwise stated.

Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies that have a significant effect on the

financial statements and estimates with a significant risk of material adjustment in the next year, are discussed below.

(a) Measurement convention

These financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the Company’s functional currency. All financial

information presented in pounds sterling has been rounded to the nearest hundred thousand.

The Company and Group financial statements are prepared on the historical cost basis with the exception of derivative

financial instruments and pension scheme assets and liabilities, both of which are stated at fair value.

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis. In determining the appropriate basis of preparation of

the financial statements the Directors are required to consider whether the Group and Company can continue in operational

existence for a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements. The Directors have assessed

the period to the end of March 2027.

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are

set out in the Interim Executive Chair’s Statement on pages 2 to 5. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity

position and borrowing facilities are described in the Financial Review on pages 22 to 25. In addition, note 24 to the financial

statements includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk management

objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk.

The Group meets its day-to-day working capital requirements through its banking facilities. At the end of the year, the Group

had total banking facilities available of £72.3 million (31 December 2024: £99.3 million), of which £61.0 million (31 December 2024:

£81.5 million) was committed. The committed facility comprised a revolving credit facility (‘RCF’) with three lenders that was

due to expire in October 2027. The Group also had a £7.5 million uncommitted overdraft. In January 2026, the RCF and the

uncommitted overdraft were replaced by an asset-based lending facility (‘ABL’) of up to £85.0 million with two lenders. The

available amount of the ABL depends on the amount of relevant assets (property, receivables and inventory) against which the

Group can borrow. It is also subject to a requirement to hold a minimum amount of headroom on the facility, by way of liquidity

headroom covenants together with a quarterly EBITDA covenant and operational covenants including inventory stock turn

and debtor days. The quarterly EBITDA covenant applies until 31 December 2027 after which it is superseded by a fixed charge

cover covenant. The previous RCF in place at the year-end included liquidity headroom and quarterly EBITDA covenants. All such

covenants were met during the year.

As previously announced, the Group is implementing a transformation plan to return the Group to profit. This transformation

plan is expected to be net cash generative, resulting in lower Net Debt at the end of 2026 and 2027 than at the end of 2025. The

cash inflow from the transformation plan represents the net impact of a) cash inflows from property disposals, b) cash inflows

from a reduction in working capital, offset somewhat by; c) the cash outflow impact of the losses in the business until it returns

to profit, and d) the cash costs of executing the transformation plan.

As at 31 December 2025, the Group owned freehold and long leasehold property in the UK valued at c.£75 million. Of this,

property valued at c.£54 million is included in the ABL at an initial 60% loan-to-value, amortising over 15 years. The remaining

properties (valued at c.£21 million) are outside the ABL and unencumbered; three of these properties, representing the significant

majority of the value, are currently on the market for sale, are under offer, and are expected to complete in the next few months.

Furthermore, the Group anticipates further properties will become surplus to requirements over the next 18 months as part of

the Group’s transformation plan. To the extent that any of these properties are assets included in the ABL facility, they can be

sold subject to lender consent. The Group would retain the cash proceeds of any such sale(s), but the corresponding element of

the ABL facility would be reduced. For example, if a property were sold for £10 million and the amortised element of the facility in

relation to that property is £6 million, then the available ABL facility would reduce by £6 million and the Group would improve its

liquidity headroom by £4 million from such property sale.

140140

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Over the last two years the Group has averaged a net positive working capital balance of over £70 million; this means that

the Group has had over £70 million of cash tied up in funding its working capital. As the Group implements its transformation

plan it expects to be able to release working capital and manage the re-shaped business with a lower overall working capital

requirement. This, combined with further opportunity for inventory efficiency, means that the Group anticipates a significant

double-digit £million working capital inflow over 2026 and 2027.

The Group has prepared a base case and a severe but plausible downside scenario for the period through to the end of

March 2027.

The base case scenario represents the Group’s estimate of the expected revenue and margin profile, as well as the cost and

margin improvement initiatives identified. These are set out in more detail in the Interim Executive Chair’s Review and include:

• Reducing low-margin revenue.

• Focusing on the more profitable categories and actively deprioritising low gross margin categories.

• Reducing our trade counter network whilst migrating some profitable category sales to adjacent trade counters or switching

this revenue from ‘collection sales’ to ‘delivered sales’.

• The combination of the above enables us to reduce our fixed costs and infrastructure requirements, such as distribution

centres and vehicles.

• Repositioning the role and organisational structure of the trade counters.

• Benefits through supplier sourcing strategy and consolidation of volume.

• Optimising our approach to pricing and discounting.

Some of these initiatives are already complete (including a reduction in annual payroll costs of over £10 million), some are in-

flight and some are due for implementation later in 2026 or in 2027.

The downside scenario assumes the following key changes compared to the base case over the same period:

• Revenue: in the base case, revenue is projected to decline year-on-year at a double-digit percentage over the assessment

period, as a consequence of the transformation plan actions. In the downside scenario a further mid-to-high single digit

percentage revenue decline is applied on top, reflecting market headwinds and/or greater disruption to the Group’s revenue

performance from the implementation of the transformation plan.

• Gross margin: a lower margin percentage is assumed in the downside scenario, reflecting a lower achievement of margin

improvements from the transformation plan.

• Cost mitigations: lower cost savings achieved than in the base case.

In both the base case and downside scenarios, the Group is compliant with the covenants in the ABL over the going concern

assessment period, on the basis that it delivers the cash inflows from property disposals and working capital reduction included

in the projections. We have also considered whether there are any significant factors in the period shortly beyond March 2027

which might impact our going concern assessment and are satisfied there are no such matters. This is on the basis of the

assumptions underpinning the Group’s longer term projections, as set out in the viability assessment within the annual report.

There are also additional mitigations available to the Group that have not been included in either the base case or in the

downside scenario projections. The additional mitigations that are within the Group’s control are

• further working capital optimisation (recognising that the Group has assumed a lower stock turn than is generally achieved

by other market participants);

• increasing the amount of borrowing capacity in the ABL through meeting certain operational KPIs; and,

• additional cost mitigations.

The additional mitigations that are not wholly in the Group’s control include:

• additional property sales;

• the sale and leaseback of properties (recognising that the Group has a successful track record of implementing both short

and long term leasebacks);

• utilising unencumbered properties for additional borrowing capacity; and

• faster conversion of rebates into cash (e.g. shorter collection cycles or converting rebates into net pricing).

After due consideration of the factors above, the Directors believe that it remains appropriate to prepare the financial

statements on a going concern basis. In doing so, it is recognised that, whilst the transformation plan, which is underway, is

expected to be net cash positive, there are elements of the cash inflows that are not wholly within the Group’s or the Directors’

control. The Group would have other mitigating options as set out above; some of which are and some of which are not wholly

within the Group’s control.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

141

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

141

Financial Statements

Whilst the Directors are confident that the plan, or sufficient mitigating actions, can be executed, in the event that both a) the

property sales are delayed and b) sufficient mitigating options are unable to be implemented, the Group would need to seek

amendments to its liquidity covenants in the ABL which, given previous strong support from its prior lender group, the Directors

believe would be achievable as required. Given that neither such completion of property transactions nor further mitigations are

wholly within the Group’s control this, in the Directors’ view, is considered to constitute the existence of a material uncertainty

that casts significant doubt over the Group and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern and realise its assets and

discharge its liabilities in the normal course of business. The financial statements do not include any adjustments that would

arise from the basis of preparation being inappropriate.

In preparing the Financial Statements the Directors have considered the potential impact of climate change, particularly in the

context of the Task Force for Climate-related Financial Disclosures (‘TCFD’) included in the Strategic Report. It is the Directors’

opinion that the potential impact of climate change, after mitigating actions, is unlikely to be material.

(b) Use of accounting estimates and judgements

Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with UK adopted International Accounting Standards requires the use of

estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements

and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting year. Although these estimates are based on

management’s best knowledge of the amounts, events or actions, actual results ultimately may differ from those estimates.

The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised

in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future

periods if the revision affects both current and future periods.

The key sources of estimation uncertainty at the Statement of Financial Position date that have significant risk of material

adjustment to the carrying value of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are as follows:

Legal provision

The legal provision recognised is the Group’s best estimate of the level of fine that may be imposed in relation to the prosecution

of one of the Group companies by a local authority relating to an alleged health and safety offense. Further details can be

found in note 20.

Deferred tax

The deferred tax asset recognised includes amounts relating to carried-forward losses in the UK. The Group has concluded that

the deferred tax assets recognised will be recoverable within the foreseeable future using the estimated future taxable income

based on the approved business plan over the next five years. A period beyond five years has not been considered due to the

uncertainty of cash flows. Should the estimate be extended to include taxable income for another two years, then an additional

deferred tax asset of £4.2 million would be recognised.

Judgements

Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies that have a significant effect on the

financial statements are as follows:

Supplier arrangements

The Group has a number of rebate agreements with suppliers. The majority of agreements are co-terminus with the financial

year, meaning that, although the calculation of the rebate does not rely on estimates of future purchases, there are significant

amounts of rebates receivable subject to recovery at the year-end. At 31 December 2025, rebates receivable are judged to be

fully recoverable.

1 Presentation of the Financial Statements and Accounting Policies continued

142142

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Non-underlying items

In order to illustrate the underlying trading performance of the Group, presentation has been made of performance measures

excluding those items which it is considered would distort the comparability of the Group’s results, which requires application

of judgement. These non-underlying items are defined as those items that are associated with the acquisition of businesses or

other items which by virtue of their nature, size and expected frequency, require adjustment to show the performance of the

Group in a consistent manner which is comparable year-on-year, see note 3.

The following are the principal items classed as non-underlying:

• Amortisation of acquired intangibles as they relate to the acquisition of businesses;

• Impairment of intangibles, property, plant and equipment and right of use assets as, in totality, they are significant, non-

recurring items relating to the decision to close certain sites;

• Impairment of inventories and receivables relating to a specific Larger Customer which entered administration in 2024, as

they are specific, significant, non-recurring items;

• Cloud-based ERP system development costs as they are significant, non-recurring items;

• Business restructuring and change-related costs which is a significant item in 2024 and 2025. Such costs are expected to

continue into 2026 and 2027 as the transformation plan is executed. See note 3 for further details; and

• Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment as these are non-recurring items.

Impairment of inventories and business restructuring costs relating to inventory provisions are recognised in cost of sales.

Impairment of receivables are recognised in net impairment (losses)/gains on trade receivables. Profit on sale of property, plant

and equipment is recognised in other operating income in the Consolidated Income Statement. All other non-underlying items

are recognised in distribution costs or administrative expenses in the Consolidated Income Statement.

Cash and cash equivalents

The banking arrangement in the UK is treated as a single unit of account. There is a single agreement with the bank where

there is no single account-holding entity but, rather, various group companies are all participants in the agreement. The parent

company is deemed to be the primary participant in the pooling arrangement and the amount recorded as cash and cash

equivalents in the Company’s financial statements is the net cash balance on the pooling arrangement.

(c) Impact of newly adopted accounting standards

There were no newly adopted accounting standards by the Group and Company in 2025.

(d) IFRS not yet applied

Certain new accounting standards and amendments to accounting standards have been published that are not mandatory for

31 December 2025 reporting periods and have not been early adopted by the Group.

IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements (effective for annual period beginning on or after 1 January 2027)

IFRS 18 will replace IAS 1 Presentation of financial statements, introducing new requirements that will help to achieve

comparability of the financial performance of similar entities and provide more relevant information and transparency to users.

The Group is currently considering the impact of IFRS 18 on its results and financial position.

Other standards and amendments to accounting standards that are relevant to the Group would not be expected to have a

material impact on the Group.

(e) Change in accounting policy

The Group accounting policy when there is a cash pooling arrangement in place, covered by one single bank contract, relating

to a single currency and subsidiaries operating in the same country, is that cash and cash equivalents and overdrafts are

considered to be a single unit of account and they are reported on an aggregated basis.

The Company has changed its accounting policy for cash and cash equivalents in order to provide reliable and more relevant

information in the financial statements.

The Company is now deemed to be the primary participant in the pooling arrangement and the amount recorded as cash

and cash equivalents in the Company’s financial statements is the net cash balance on the pooling arrangement rather than

its memo account balance, with the difference recorded as an intercompany balance. This change in accounting policy has

resulted in the restatement of the Company’s cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2024 period from £82.3 million to

£7.5 million with corresponding adjustments to trade and other receivables from £28.7 million to £128.6 million and trade and

other payables from £49.2 million to £74.3 million. The brought forward cash and cash equivalents balance as at 1 January 2024

has been restated from £63.2 million to £15.1 million.

There is no change to the Group’s cash and cash equivalents in the consolidated financial statements.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

143

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

143

Financial Statements

(f) Accounting policies

Basis of consolidation

The Group financial statements consolidate those of the Company and its subsidiaries which together are referred to as the

‘Group’. The Company’s financial statements present information about the Company as a separate entity and not about

its Group.

Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group has power over an entity, is exposed or has rights

to variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the

entity. In assessing control, potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible are taken into account.

The financial results of subsidiaries are included in the Group’s financial statements from the date that control commences until

the date that control ceases.

The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by the Group. The consideration

transferred in the acquisition is generally measured at fair value, as are the identifiable net assets acquired. Any goodwill

that arises is tested annually for impairment and any gain on a bargain purchase is recognised in the Consolidated Income

Statement immediately. Transaction costs are expensed as incurred, with the exception of costs that relate to the issue of debt

or equity securities.

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains and losses on transactions between Group companies are

eliminated in the Group’s financial statements.

Foreign currency

Functional and presentation currency

Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary

economic environment in which the entity operates (‘the functional currency’). The consolidated financial statements are

presented in UK sterling currency units (£), which is Headlam Group PLC’s functional and presentational currency.

Foreign currency transactions

Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. There are

no derivatives in the current or prior year. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the Statement of

Financial Position date are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date. Foreign exchange differences arising on

translation are recognised in the income statement. Non-monetary assets and liabilities that are measured in terms of historical

cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rate at the date of the transaction.

Financial statements of foreign operations

The assets and liabilities of foreign subsidiaries are translated at foreign exchange rates ruling at the Statement of Financial

Position date.

Foreign currency exposure

The revenues, expenses and cash flows of foreign subsidiaries are translated at an average rate for the period where this rate

approximates to the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions.

Exchange differences arising from this translation of foreign subsidiaries are taken directly to the translation reserve and

reflected as a movement in the statement of comprehensive income.

When a foreign subsidiary is disposed of in its entirety or partially such that control, significant influence or joint control is lost,

the cumulative amount in the translation reserve related to that foreign operation is reclassified to profit or loss as part of the

gain or loss of disposal.

Note 24 contains information about the foreign currency exposure of the Group and risks in relation to foreign exchange

movements.

1 Presentation of the Financial Statements and Accounting Policies continued

144144

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses.

Where parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as separate items of

property, plant and equipment.

Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis in order to depreciate assets to their residual value

over their useful economic lives. Assets begin to be depreciated from the date they become available for use. The annual rates

applicable are:

Land and buildings

Freehold and long leasehold properties – 2%

Plant and equipment

Motor and commercial vehicles – 10% – 25%

Office and computer equipment – 10% – 33%

Warehouse and production equipment – 10% – 20%

Solar panels – 4%

Land is not depreciated.

The residual balances are reviewed annually.

Gains and losses on disposal of an item of property, plant and equipment are determined by comparing the proceeds from

disposal with the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment and are recognised in the income statement.

Assets under construction are reported within property, plant and equipment. These assets are stated at cost and are not

depreciated until they are complete and utilised by the Group. The cost of self-constructed assets includes the cost of materials,

direct labour and any other costs directly attributable to bringing the asset to a working condition for its intended use.

Investment properties

Investment properties are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses.

Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis in order to depreciate assets to their residual value

over their useful economic lives. The annual rate applicable is:

Freehold and long leasehold properties – 2%

The residual balances are reviewed annually.

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill

All business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. Goodwill arises on the acquisition of

subsidiaries and represents the excess of the fair value of the consideration of the business combination over the fair value

of the Group’s share of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired. Transaction costs associated with

acquisitions and movements in contingent consideration are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement.

Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units and is not

amortised but tested annually for impairment, or more frequently when there is an indicator that the unit may be impaired.

In respect of acquisitions prior to 1 January 2004, goodwill is included on the basis of its deemed cost, which represents the

amount recorded under UK GAAP which was broadly comparable save that only separable intangibles were recognised and

goodwill was amortised. This is in accordance with IFRS 1.

Other intangible assets

Other intangible assets that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment

losses. Intangible assets recognised as a result of a business combination are stated at fair value at the date of acquisition less

cumulative amortisation and impairment losses. Other intangible assets are amortised from the date they are available for use.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

145

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

145

Financial Statements

Amortisation

Amortisation is charged to the income statement and is split over the estimated useful lives of each separately identifiable

intangible asset unless such lives are indefinite. Amortisation occurs on brand names, order book, non-compete agreements,

customer relationships, supply agreements and software development and is charged to administrative expenses in the income

statement. The estimated useful lives are assessed to be:

Order book – 1–36 months

Customer relationships – 5–10 years

Brand names – 10–15 years

Non-compete agreements – 1–3 years

Supply agreements – 1–5 years

Software development – 5–10 years

Software-as-a-Service (‘SaaS’) arrangements

SaaS arrangements are service contracts providing the Group with the right to access the cloud provider’s application software

over the contract period. Costs incurred to configure or customise are expensed to the Consolidated Income Statement and are

classed as non-underlying when they are judged to be significant, non-recurring items. The ongoing fees to obtain access to the

cloud provider’s application software, are recognised as operating expenses when the services are received.

Financial assets

At initial recognition, the Group measures a financial asset (unless it is a trade receivable without a significant financing

component) at its fair value plus, in the case of a financial asset not at fair value through profit or loss, transaction costs that are

directly attributable to the acquisition of the financial asset. Transaction costs of financial assets carried at fair value through

profit or loss are expensed in profit or loss. A trade receivable without a significant financing component is initially measured at

the transaction price. Financial assets with embedded derivatives are considered in their entirety when determining whether

their cash flows are solely payment of principal and interest.

There are three measurement categories under IFRS 9 into which debt instruments may be classified, these are:

• Amortised cost;

• Fair value through other comprehensive income;

• Fair value through profit and loss

All material financial assets of the Group are held at amortised cost. Financial assets that are held for collection of contractual

cash flows where those cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest are measured at amortised cost. Interest

income from these financial assets is included in finance income using the effective interest rate method. Any gain or loss arising

on derecognition is recognised directly in profit or loss.

Financial assets are no longer recognised when the rights to receive cash flows from the financial assets have expired or have

been transferred and the Group has transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership.

Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables are recognised at the transaction price if the trade receivables do not contain a significant financing

component. Other receivables are measured at fair value on initial recognition.

The Group assesses, on a forward-looking basis, the expected credit losses associated with its trade and other receivables. The

impairment methodology applied depends on whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk. For trade receivables,

the Group applies the simplified approach permitted by IFRS 9, which requires expected lifetime losses to be recognised from

initial recognition of the receivables, see note 24.

Inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is based on the first-in first-out principle and includes

expenditure incurred in acquiring the inventories and bringing them to their existing location and condition. This includes

management’s best estimate of overheads to be absorbed in the cost of inventory and rebates to be received from suppliers.

Net realisable value represents the estimated selling price less all estimated costs of completion and costs to be incurred in

marketing, selling and distribution.

Provisions to write down inventory to its net realisable value are calculated by reference to each individual product, based on

the ageing profile, consideration of inventory sold for less than its carrying value, and consideration for discontinued items.

1 Presentation of the Financial Statements and Accounting Policies continued

146146

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents are carried in the Statement of Financial Position at amortised cost. Where there is a pooling

arrangement in place covered by one single bank contract, relating to a single currency and subsidiaries operating in the

same country, cash and cash equivalents and overdrafts are considered to be a single unit of account and they are reported

on an aggregated basis. The parent company is deemed to be the primary participant in the pooling arrangement and the

amount recorded as cash and cash equivalents in the Company’s financial statements is the net cash balance on the pooling

arrangement (together with any other cash and cash equivalent balances held outside of the pooling arrangement), rather

than its memo account balance, with the difference recorded as an intercompany balance.

Cash and cash equivalents relate to cash balances held. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on demand and form an integral

part of cash management of both the Company and Group are included as a component of cash and cash equivalents for the

purpose only of the Cash Flow Statement.

Assets or disposal groups held for sale and discontinued operations

Non-current assets or disposal groups are classified as held for sale if their carrying amount will be recovered principally through

a sale transaction rather than through continuing use and a sale is considered highly probable. They are measured at the lower

of their carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.

An impairment loss is recognised for any initial or subsequent write-down of the asset or disposal group to fair value less costs

to sell. A gain is recognised for any subsequent increases in fair value less costs to sell of an asset or disposal group only to the

extent of any cumulative impairment loss previously recognised. A gain or loss not previously recognised by the date of the sale

of the non-current asset or disposal group is recognised at the date of derecognition.

Non-current assets classified as held for sale are not depreciated or amortised and are presented separately from other assets

in the balance sheet. Interest and other expenses attributable to the liabilities of a disposal group classified as held for sale

continue to be recognised.

Non-current assets classified as held for sale and the assets of a disposal group classified as held for sale are presented

separately from the other assets in the statement of financial position. The liabilities of a disposal group classified as held for sale

are presented separately from other liabilities in the statement of financial position.

A discontinued operation is a component of the group that has been disposed of or is classified as held for sale and that

represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations, is part of a single coordinated plan to

dispose of such a line of business or area of operations. The results of discontinued operations are presented separately in the

consolidated income statement.

Impairment

The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets, other than financial assets, inventories and deferred tax assets, are reviewed at

each Statement of Financial Position date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication

exists, the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. Financial assets are assessed using an expected credit loss model.

Intangible assets with an indefinite useful life and goodwill are systematically tested for impairment annually.

For the purposes of impairment testing, assets are grouped together into cash generating units, being the smallest group of

assets that generates cash flows from continuing use that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other groups of

assets. Each trading legal entity reviewed is considered to be the smallest group of assets generating independent cash flows.

An impairment loss is recognised in the income statement whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit

exceeds its recoverable amount.

Impairment losses recognised in respect of cash-generating units are allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any

goodwill allocated to cash-generating units and then to reduce the carrying amount of the other assets in the unit on a pro

rata basis.

Calculation of recoverable amount

The recoverable amount of assets, with the exception of the Group’s receivables, is the greater of their fair value less costs of

disposal and value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a

pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

147

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

147

Financial Statements

Reversals of impairment

An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed.

In respect of other assets, an impairment loss is reversed when there is an indication that the impairment loss may no longer exist

and there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. An impairment loss is reversed only

to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of

depreciation or amortisation, if no impairment loss had been recognised.

Trade payables

Trade payables are initially recognised at fair value and then are stated at amortised cost.

Interest-bearing borrowings

Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial

recognition, interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any difference between cost and redemption value

being recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings on an effective interest basis.

Provisions

Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is probable

that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated. Provisions are

made for property dilapidations for the estimated costs of the repairs over the period of the tenancy where a legal obligation

exists.

Employee benefits

The Company and the Group operate both defined benefit and defined contribution plans. The assets of the defined benefit

plans are held in independent trustee-administered funds. The pension cost is assessed in accordance with the advice of a

qualified actuary.

Defined contribution plans

Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans are recognised as an expense in the income statement as

incurred.

Defined benefit plans

The Group’s net obligation in respect of defined benefit pension plans is calculated by estimating the amount of future benefit

that employees have earned in return for their service in the current and prior periods. That benefit is discounted to determine

its present value, and the fair value of any plan assets is deducted. The liability discount rate is the yield at the Statement of

Financial Position date using AA rated corporate bonds that have maturity dates approximating to the terms of the Group’s

obligations. The calculation is performed by a qualified actuary using the projected unit credit method.

When the benefits of a plan are improved, the portion of the increased benefit relating to past service by employees is

recognised as an expense in the income statement immediately.

To the extent that any benefits vest immediately, the expense is recognised directly in the income statement.

The net interest cost is calculated by applying the discount rate to the net balance of the defined benefit obligation and the fair

value of plan assets. The cost is included in finance expenses in the income statement.

All actuarial gains and losses that arise in calculating the Group’s obligation in respect of a scheme are recognised immediately

in reserves and reported in the statement of comprehensive income.

Where the calculation results in a benefit to the Group, the asset recognised is limited to the present value of any future refunds

from the plan or reductions in future contributions to the plan. The Company does not have an unconditional right to a refund,

or reduction in future contribution, under IFRIC 14. Consequently, any surplus balance sheet position is restricted in recognition of

the asset ceiling.

The Group operates a UK defined benefit pension plan. There is no contractual agreement or stated Group policy for allocating

the net defined benefit liability between the participating subsidiaries and as such the full deficit is recognised by the Company,

which is the sponsoring employer.

The participating subsidiary companies have recognised a cost equal to contributions payable for the period as advised by a

professionally qualified actuary.

During the prior year the Group completed a buy-in arrangement in respect of the UK defined benefit pension plan. The buy-in

arrangement secures an insurance asset that matches the remaining net obligation.

1 Presentation of the Financial Statements and Accounting Policies continued

148148

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Share-based payment transactions

The Company and Group operate various equity-settled share option schemes under the approved and unapproved executive

schemes and savings-related schemes.

For executive share option schemes, the option price may not be less than the mid-market value of the Group’s shares at the

time when the options were granted or the nominal value.

Further details of the share plans are given in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 92 to 117.

The fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding increase in equity over the period

that the employees unconditionally become entitled to the award. The fair value is measured at grant date and spread over

the period during which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the options. The fair value of the options granted is

measured using an option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted.

The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect the number of awards for which the related service and non-market

performance conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised is based on the number of awards

that meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at the vesting date. For share-based payment awards

with non-vesting and market conditions, the grant-date fair value of the share-based payment is measured to reflect such

conditions and there is no true-up for differences between expected and actual outcomes.

When options are granted to employees of subsidiaries of the Company, the fair value of options granted is recognised as an

employee expense in the financial statements of the subsidiary undertaking together with the capital contribution received. In

the financial statements of the Company, the options granted are recognised as an investment in subsidiary undertakings with

a corresponding increase in equity.

The Company and Group also operate an Employee Long Service Award scheme whereby shares are issued to employees

meeting certain milestones of service for no cash consideration and vest immediately on the grant date. The market value of the

shares issued at grant date is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding increase in equity.

Repurchase of share capital

When share capital recognised as equity is repurchased, the amount of the consideration paid, net of any tax effects, is

recognised as a deduction from equity. Repurchased shares are classified as treasury shares and are presented as a deduction

from total equity. Where the Group has committed to buy back its own shares, but not yet repurchased them, the amount of

the commitment is recognised as a deduction from equity with a corresponding amount recognised as a liability. When treasury

shares are sold or reissued subsequently, the amount received is recognised as an increase in equity and the resulting surplus or

deficit on the transaction is transferred to or from retained earnings.

Own shares held by Employee Benefit Trust

Transactions of the Group sponsored Employee Benefit Trust are included in the Group financial statements. In particular, the

Trust’s purchases of shares in the Company are debited directly to equity.

Revenue

Revenue from the sale of floorcoverings is measured at the fair value of the consideration and excludes intra-group sales and

value added and similar taxes. The primary performance obligation is the transfer of goods to the customer. Revenue from

the sale of floorcoverings is recognised when control of the goods is transferred to the customer (which is typically the point

at which goods are received by the customer), at an amount that reflects the consideration to which an entity expects to be

entitled in exchange for those goods. Provisions for returns, discounts and other allowances are reflected in revenue at the point

of recognition.

Supplier arrangements

Rebates received from suppliers comprise volume related rebates on the purchase of inventories. Volume related rebates

are accrued as units are purchased based on the percentage rebate applicable to the forecast total purchases over the

rebate period, where it is probable the rebates will be received and the amounts can be estimated reliably. Rebates relating

to inventories purchased but still held at the balance sheet date are deducted from the carrying value so that the cost of

inventories is recorded net of applicable rebates. Rebates received for the financial year are deducted from cost of sales.

Rebates recoverable at the end of the financial year are accrued within other debtors.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

149

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

149

Financial Statements

Leases – Group as a lessee

At inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if the

contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration.

The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability at the lease commencement date, with the

exception of short-term leases (defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low-value assets,

comprising mainly of IT equipment.

The Group has elected to use a practical expedient as permitted by IFRS 16, not to separate non-lease components and instead

account for the lease and non-lease component as a single lease component.

Lease liability

Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured at the present value of the future lease payments, discounted

using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing rate.

Lease liabilities for the Group include the net present value of the following payments:

• fixed payments, less any lease incentives receivable;

• variable lease payment that are based on an index or a rate, initially measured using the index or rate as at the

commencement date;

• amounts expected to be payable by the Group under residual value guarantees;

• the exercise price of a purchase option if the Group is reasonably certain to exercise that option, and

• payments of penalties for terminating the lease, if the lease term reflects the Group exercising that option.

Lease payments to be made under reasonably certain extension options are also included in the measurement of the liability.

The lease liability is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, by increasing the carrying amount to

reflect interest in the lease liability and reducing the carrying amount to reflect the lease payments made. The lease liability is

subsequently remeasured when there is a change in future lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate, if there is

a change in the Group’s estimate of the amount expected to be payable under a residual guarantee, if the Group changes its

assessment of whether it will exercise a purchase, extension or termination option or if there is a revised in-substance fixed lease

payment. When the lease liability is remeasured, an equivalent adjustment is made to the right-of-use asset unless its carrying

amount is reduced to zero, in which case any remaining amount is recognised in the income statement.

The lease liability is presented separately in the Statement of Financial Position.

Right-of-use assets

Right-of-use assets are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses, comprising the following:

• the amount of the initial measurement of lease liability;

• any lease payments made at or before the commencement date less any lease incentives received;

• any initial direct costs; and

• restoration costs.

Right-of-use assets are depreciated over the shorter of the asset’s useful life (in line with property, plant and equipment) and

the lease term on a straight-line basis. In addition, right-of-use assets are periodically reduced by impairment losses, if any, and

adjusted for remeasurements of the corresponding lease liability.

The right-of-use assets are presented separately in the Statement of Financial Position.

Short-term and low-value assets

The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for leases of low-value assets and short-term

leases, including IT equipment. The Group recognises the lease payments associated with these leases as an expense on a

straight-line basis over the lease term.

Sale and leaseback of property, plant and equipment

In determining whether a transaction is a sale-and-leaseback, the Group first considers whether the initial transfer of the

underlying asset from the seller to the buyer is a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.

When a transaction meets the definition of a sale-and-leaseback, the Group derecognises the underlying asset and applies the

lessee accounting models as per IFRS 16. The Group records a right-of-use-asset at the retained portion of the previous carrying

amount, such that the amount of any gain or loss on sale recognised is only that related to the rights transferred to the lessor.

1 Presentation of the Financial Statements and Accounting Policies continued

150150

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Net financing costs

Net financing costs include interest receivable on funds invested, interest payable, interest on lease liabilities and net interest

expense on the net defined benefit liability.

Interest income and interest payable is recognised in the income statement as it accrues, using the effective interest method.

The Group determines the net interest expense on the net defined benefit liability for the period by applying the discount rate

used to measure the defined benefit obligation at the beginning of the annual period to the then net defined benefit liability,

taking into account any changes in the net defined benefit liability during the period as a result of contributions and benefit

payments.

Interest paid and interest received are classified as operating cash flows in the cash flow statement.

Dividends

Paid

Interim and final dividends are recognised when they are paid or when approved by the members in a general meeting. Final

dividends proposed by the Board and unpaid at the end of the year are not recognised in the financial statements.

Received

The Company receives dividends from its UK and Continental European subsidiaries. Dividends are recognised in the financial

statements when they have been received by the Company.

Taxation

Income tax comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to

items recognised directly in equity, in which case the related tax is also recognised in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at

the Statement of Financial Position date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting

purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. Deferred tax is not recognised for the following temporary differences:

the initial recognition of assets or liabilities in a transaction that is not a business combination and that affects neither

accounting nor taxable profit; and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that it is probable that they

will not reverse in the foreseeable future. In addition, deferred tax is not recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on

the initial recognition of goodwill.

The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of

assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the Statement of Financial Position date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which

the asset can be utilised.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset where there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets and liabilities

and where the deferred tax balances relate to the same taxation authority. Current tax assets and tax liabilities are offset where

the entity has a legally enforceable right to offset and intends either to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the

liability simultaneously.

The Group has applied the temporary exception issued by the IASB in May 2023 from the accounting requirements for deferred

taxes in IAS 12. Accordingly, the Group neither recognises nor discloses information about deferred tax assets and liabilities

related to Pillar Two income taxes.

Non-underlying items

In order to illustrate the underlying trading performance of the Group, presentation has been made of performance measures

excluding those items which it is considered would distort the comparability of the Group’s results. These non-underlying items

are defined as those items that are associated with the acquisition of businesses or other items which by virtue of their nature,

size and expected frequency require adjustment to show the performance of the Group in a consistent manner which is

comparable year-on-year, see note 3. The principal items classed as non-underlying are described in the basis of preparation in

this note.

See pages 189 to 190 for details on alternative performance measures and pages 191 to 192 for adjusted results.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

151

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

151

Financial Statements

2 Segment reporting

As at 31 December 2025, the Group had four operating segments in the UK which are continuing operations. Each segment

represents an individual operation, and each operation is wholly aligned to the sales, marketing, supply and distribution of

floorcovering products. The operating results of each operation are regularly reviewed by the Chief Operating Decision Maker,

which is deemed to be the Executive Chair. Discrete financial information is available for each segment and used by the

Executive Chair to assess performance and decide on resource allocation.

The operating segments have been aggregated to the extent that they have similar economic characteristics. The

key economic indicators considered by management in assessing whether operating segments have similar economic

characteristics are the products supplied, the type and class of customer, method of sale and distribution and the regulatory

environment in which they operate.

As each operating segment within continuing operations in the UK is a trading operation wholly aligned to the sales, marketing,

supply and distribution of floorcovering products, management considers all segments have similar economic characteristics.

Accordingly the Group presents one reportable segment, being UK.

In the prior year, the Continental Europe segment was presented as a separate reportable segment, as it operated in a different

regulatory environment. At 31 December 2025, the Continental Europe segment has been identified as a disposal group held for

sale. Information about this discontinued segment is provided in note 25.

UK Total1Restated2025 2024 £M£MExternal revenues 498.7 525.7Underlying cost of sales (351.4) (369.7)Underlying gross profit 147.3 156.0Reportable segment underlying operating loss (26.8) (17.2)Reportable segment assets 306.4 353.1Reportable segment liabilities (229.6) (190.5)

1

See note 1 for details regarding the restatement.

During the year there were no inter-segment revenues for the reportable segments (2024: £nil).

Reconciliations of reportable segment profit, assets and liabilities and other material items:

Re-presented2025 2024 £M£MLoss for the yearTotal underlying operating loss for reportable segments (26.8) (17.2)Non-underlying items (30.1) (6.4)Unallocated expense (6.6) (7.7)Operating loss (63.5) (31.3)Finance income 0.6 0.1Finance expense (6.7) (6.9)Loss before taxation (69.6) (38.1)Taxation 4.8 17.0Loss for the year from continuing operations (64.8) (21.1)Loss from discontinued operations (17.1) (3.9)Total loss for the year (81.9) (25.0)

152152

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Restated2025 2024 £M£MAssetsTotal assets for reportable segments 306.4 353.1Unallocated assets:Intangible assets 0.1 0.1Income tax receivable – 3.6Deferred tax assets 8.2 3.9Cash and cash equivalents 25.5 7.5Assets allocated to discontinued operations 14.5 29.5Total assets 354.7 397.7LiabilitiesTotal liabilities for reportable segments (229.6) (190.5)Unallocated liabilities:Income tax payable (0.4) –Liabilities allocated to discontinued operations (14.7) (16.2)Total liabilities (244.7) (206.7)Reportable segment Consolidated total Unallocated total Continuing operations£M£M£MOther material items 2025Acquisition of property, plant and equipment 4.2 – 4.2Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 7.4 – 7.4Depreciation of right of use assets 13.4 – 13.4Impairment of intangible assets 4.8 – 4.8Non-underlying items (excluding impairment) 18.7 5.4 24.1Other material items 2024Acquisition of property, plant and equipment 10.4 – 10.4Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 8.0 – 8.0Depreciation of right of use assets 12.0 – 12.0Impairment of property, plant and equipment 0.7 – 0.7Impairment of right of use assets 0.3 – 0.3Non-underlying items (excluding impairment) 4.6 0.8 5.4

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

153

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

153

Financial Statements

3 Loss before tax

The following material items are included in loss before tax:

Re-presented2025 2024 Continuing operations£M£MUnderlying items:Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (7.4) (8.0)Depreciation of right of use assets (13.4) (12.0)Increase in impairment loss allowance (0.6) (1.3)Non-underlying items:Amortisation of acquired intangibles (1.1) (1.2)Impairment of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets and right of use assets (4.8) (1.1)Impairment of inventories and receivables – (2.9)Cloud-based ERP system development costs (5.6) (2.6)Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment 6.2 21.1Provision relating to legal claim (see note 20) (1.6) –Business restructuring and change-related costs (23.2) (19.7)(30.1) (6.4)Taxation on non-underlying items 0.7 10.2(29.4) 3.8Discontinued operationsNon-underlying items:Amortisation of acquired intangibles (0.1) (0.1)Impairment of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets and right of use assets – (0.7)Impairment on classification of disposal group as held for sale (12.6) –Business restructuring and change-related costs (0.1) –(12.8) (0.8)Taxation on non-underlying items 0.1 0.1(12.7) (0.7)

Amortisation of acquired intangibles is a non-cash item relating to the amortisation of intangibles acquired as part of business

combinations.

Included within impairment is £3.2 million relating to the impairment of goodwill and £1.6 million impairment of intangible assets

allocated to the Melrose cash generating unit following an impairment review. In the prior year, impairment included £0.4 million

impairment of goodwill, £0.1 million impairment of intangible assets, £0.7 million impairment of property, plant and equipment

and £0.6 million impairment of right of use assets. The impairment charges relate to a combination of the write down of assets

related to the transformation plan and the annual review of impairment as disclosed in note 10. All impairment charges are non-

cash items.

Impairment of inventories and receivables relating to a specific Larger Customer which entered administration in 2024, as they

are specific, significant, non-recurring items. These are non-cash in nature.

Cloud-based ERP system development costs relates to the development costs to replace the current ERP system with a cloud-

based software-as-a-service arrangement and are all cash costs.

Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment relates to the sale of one site which has resulted in £21.2 million of cash proceeds

in the year. In the prior year this related to the sale of five properties in the year as part of the Group’s continued progress against

its transformation plan. This resulted in £61.3 million of cash proceeds in the prior year.

Business restructuring and change-related costs relate to the transformation plan, including severance costs and advisory fees.

The costs comprise £19.8 million (2024: £10.2 million) cash costs and £3.4 million (2024: £9.5 million) non-cash costs. The non-cash

costs principally relate to inventory provisions.

Impairment costs on classification of disposal group as held for sale are all non-cash in nature.

See pages 189 to 190 for details on alternative performance measures.

154154

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Auditors’ remuneration:

2025 2024 £M£MAudit of these financial statements 0.4 0.2Amounts received by the Auditors and their associates in respect of:Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries of the Company 0.4 0.40.8 0.6

4 Staff numbers and costs

The monthly average number of people employed, including Executive Directors, during the year, analysed by category, was as

follows:

Number of employeesGroup Company2025 2024 2025 2024By sector:Floorcoverings 2,190 2,351 – –Central operations 25 26 25 262,215 2,377 25 26By function:Sales and distribution 1,988 2,136 – –Administration 227 241 25 262,215 2,377 25 26

The aggregate payroll costs were as follows:

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MWages and salaries 86.0 88.7 2.8 3.0Equity settled share-based payment expense (note 22) 0.7 1.0 0.3 0.3Social security costs 12.2 11.2 0.4 0.4Other pension costs (note 21) 4.5 4.9 0.2 0.6103.4 105.8 3.7 4.3

The table above excludes non-underlying staff costs which total £6.5 million (2024: £5.6 million).

5 Emoluments of key management personnel

Executive and Non-Executive Directors are considered to be the key management personnel of the Group.

2025 2024 £M£MShort-term employee benefits 1.3 1.3Equity settled share-based payment expense 0.1 0.31.4 1.6

Short-term employee benefits comprise salary and benefits earned during the year and bonuses awarded for the year. Further

details on Directors’ remuneration, share options and long-term incentive schemes are disclosed in the Remuneration Report on

pages 92 to 117.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

155

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

155

Financial Statements

6 Finance income and expenses

Re-presented 2025 2024 £M£MInterest income:Bank interest 0.6 0.1Finance income 0.6 0.1Interest expenses:Bank loans, overdrafts and other financial expenses (3.1) (4.5)Interest on lease liability (3.5) (2.3)Net interest on defined benefit plan obligations (note 21) (0.1) (0.1)Finance expenses (6.7) (6.9)

7 Taxation

Recognised in the income statement

2025 2024 £M£MCurrent tax charge/(credit):Current year – 0.1Adjustments in respect of prior years 0.1 (0.5)0.1 (0.4)Deferred tax credit:Origination and reversal of temporary differences (4.3) (16.7)Adjustments in respect of prior years – 0.6(4.3) (16.1)Total tax (4.2) (16.5)Income tax credit attributable to continuing operations (4.8) (17.0)Income tax charge attributable to discontinued operations 0.6 0.52025 2024 £M£MTax relating to items credited to equityDeferred tax on other comprehensive income/(expense):Defined benefit plans – (0.1)Total tax reported directly in reserves – (0.1)

156156

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Factors that may affect future current and total tax charges

The UK headline corporation tax rate for the year was 25.0% (2024: 25.0%). UK deferred tax assets and liabilities have been

calculated at a rate of 25.0% (2024: 25.0%).

The Group is within the scope of the OECD Pillar Two model rules. The Pillar Two legislation was enacted on 11 July 2023. The

Group will take advantage of temporary ‘safe harbour’ provisions available in the initial years. The Group does not expect the

Pillar Two legislation to have any material impact.

Reconciliation of tax credit

2025 2024 £M£MLoss from continuing operations before tax (69.6) (38.1)Loss from discontinued operations before tax (16.5) (3.4)Loss before tax (86.1) (41.5)Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 25.0% (2024: 25.0%) (21.5) (10.4)Non-deductible expense/(non-taxable income) 3.4 (7.6)Impact of losses not recognised 13.8 1.4Adjustments in respect of prior years 0.1 0.1Total tax in income statement (4.2) (16.5)Add back tax on non-underlying items 0.8 10.3Total tax credit excluding non-underlying items (3.4) (6.2)Loss before tax before non-underlying items (43.2) (34.3)Adjusted effective tax rate excluding non-underlying items 7.9% 18.1%Total effective tax rate 4.9% 39.7%

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

157

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

157

Financial Statements

8 Loss per share

Re-presented2025 2024 £M£MLoss from continuing operations for basic and diluted loss per share (64.8) (21.1)Loss from discontinued operations for basic and diluted loss per share (17.1) (3.9)Total Loss for basic and diluted loss per share (81.9) (25.0)Loss from continuing operations for underlying basic and underlying diluted loss per share (35.4) (24.9)Loss from discontinued operations for underlying basic and underlying diluted loss per share (4.4) (3.2)Loss for underlying basic and underlying diluted loss per share (39.8) (28.1)2025 2024Number of sharesWeighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of basic loss per share 80,268,993 80,204,515Effect of diluted potential ordinary shares:Weighted average number of ordinary shares at 31 December 80,268,993 80,204,515Dilutive effect of share options – –Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted loss per share 80,268,993 80,204,515Continuing operations loss per shareBasic (80.7)p (26.3)pDiluted (80.7)p (26.3)pUnderlying basic (44.1)p (31.0)pUnderlying diluted (44.1)p (31.0)pDiscontinued operations loss per shareBasic (21.3)p (4.9)pDiluted (21.3)p (4.9)pUnderlying basic (5.5)p (4.0)pUnderlying diluted (5.5)p (4.0)pTotal loss per shareBasic (102.0)p (31.2)pDiluted (102.0)p (31.2)pUnderlying basic (49.6)p (35.0)pUnderlying diluted (49.6)p (35.0)p

At 31 December 2025, the Company held 5,356,544 shares (2024: 5,393,392) in relation to treasury stock and shares held in trust

for satisfying options and awards under employee share schemes. These shares have been disclosed in the treasury reserve and

are excluded from the calculation of earnings per share.

158158

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

9 Property, plant and equipment

Group property, plant and equipment

Land and Plant and Under buildings equipment construction Total £M£M£M£MCostBalance at 1 January 2024 137.1 50.6 1.8 189.5Additions 4.2 4.6 1.7 10.5Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (52.1) (6.0) (0.1) (58.2)Transfers 0.4 1.1 (1.5) –Effect of movements in foreign exchange (0.3) (0.3) – (0.6)Balance at 31 December 2024 89.3 50.0 1.9 141.2Balance at 1 January 2025 89.3 50.0 1.9 141.2Additions 2.2 2.0 0.2 4.4Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (25.0) (9.4) – (34.4)Transfers 1.9 0.2 (2.1) –Effect of movements in foreign exchange 0.3 0.4 – 0.7Balance at 31 December 2025 68.7 43.2 – 111.9Accumulated depreciation and impairmentBalance at 1 January 2024 36.4 25.5 – 61.9Depreciation charge for the year 3.6 4.8 – 8.4Impairment charge – 0.7 – 0.7Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (12.2) (4.0) – (16.2)Effect of movements in foreign exchange (0.2) (0.3) – (0.5)Balance at 31 December 2024 27.6 26.7 – 54.3Balance at 1 January 2025 27.6 26.7 – 54.3Depreciation charge for the year 3.2 4.6 – 7.8Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (11.6) (7.9) – (19.5)Effect of movements in foreign exchange 0.2 0.3 – 0.5Balance at 31 December 2025 19.4 23.7 – 43.1Net book valueAt 1 January 2024 100.7 25.1 1.8 127.6At 31 December 2024 61.7 23.3 1.9 86.9At 31 December 2025 49.3 19.5 – 68.8

The £0.7 million impairment charge in the prior year relates to the impairment of specific assets following the decision to close

certain sites. These impairment charges are reported in non-underlying administrative expenses in the Consolidated Income

Statement.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

159

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

159

Financial Statements

Company investment properties and plant and equipment

Plant and equipment Plant and Investment Plant and under equipment properties equipment construction total £M£M£M£MCostBalance at 1 January 2024 116.8 3.0 0.3 3.3Additions – 0.8 – 0.8Transfers – 0.3 (0.3) –Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (51.3) (1.7) – (1.7)Balance at 31 December 2024 65.5 2.4 – 2.4Balance at 1 January 2025 65.5 2.4 – 2.4Additions – – – –Transfers – – – –Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (17.8) (0.4) – (0.4)Balance at 31 December 2025 47.7 2.0 – 2.0Accumulated depreciationBalance at 1 January 2024 29.1 0.1 – 0.1Depreciation charge for the year 1.6 0.2 – 0.2Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (11.3) (0.1) – (0.1)Balance at 31 December 2024 19.4 0.2 – 0.2Balance at 1 January 2025 19.4 0.2 – 0.2Depreciation charge for the year 0.8 0.1 – 0.1Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (6.2) (0.1) – (0.1)Balance at 31 December 2025 14.0 0.2 – 0.2Net book valueAt 1 January 2024 87.7 2.9 0.3 3.2At 31 December 2024 46.1 2.2 – 2.2At 31 December 2025 33.7 1.8 – 1.8

The Company holds investment properties which are predominantly freehold distribution centres, occupied by its UK subsidiary

companies for trading purposes. Investment properties were valued by an independent professional valuer during the year at a

valuation of £55.6 million (2024: £83.6 million). The Company holds investment property at cost.

The valuation of the properties is categorised as level 3 as prescribed in the fair value hierarchy in IFRS 13 as there are no directly

comparable market observable inputs. The valuations are based on the external valuer’s objective opinion of market value in

accordance with the definition and supporting commentary as set out in the RICS Valuation – Global Standards. Market value is

defined as the estimated amount for which an asset or liability should exchange between a willing buyer and a willing seller in an

arm’s length transaction after proper marketing and where the parties had each acted knowledgeably, prudently and without

compulsion. The valuations do not include either the costs of realisation or for taxation which might arise on a disposal but do

include standard purchaser’s costs. The highest and best use of the investment properties do not differ from its current use.

9 Property, plant and equipment continued

160160

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

10 Intangible assets

Order Customer Brand Non-Supply Software Goodwill book relationships names compete agreements development Total Group£M£M£M£M£M£M£M£MCostBalance at 1 January 2024 41.5 6.5 7.9 9.3 0.1 0.2 0.5 66.0Additions – – – – – – 0.1 0.1Balance at 31 December 2024 41.5 6.5 7.9 9.3 0.1 0.2 0.6 66.1Balance at 1 January 2025 41.5 6.5 7.9 9.3 0.1 0.2 0.6 66.1Additions – – – – – – 0.2 0.2Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (2.6) – (0.5) (0.8) – – (0.4) (4.3)Balance at 31 December 2025 38.9 6.5 7.4 8.5 0.1 0.2 0.4 62.0Accumulated impairment and amortisationBalance at 1 January 2024 30.3 6.5 5.1 4.2 0.1 0.1 0.3 46.6Amortisation charge for the year – – 0.6 0.7 – – 0.1 1.4Impairment charge 0.4 – – 0.1 – – – 0.5Balance at 31 December 2024 30.7 6.5 5.7 5.0 0.1 0.1 0.4 48.5Balance at 1 January 2025 30.7 6.5 5.7 5.0 0.1 0.1 0.4 48.5Amortisation charge for the year – – 0.6 0.5 – 0.1 0.1 1.3Impairment charge 3.2 – 0.4 1.2 – – – 4.8Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (2.6) – (0.4) (0.5) – – (0.4) (3.9)Balance at 31 December 2025 31.3 6.5 6.3 6.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 50.7Net book valueAt 31 December 2024 10.8 – 2.2 4.3 – 0.1 0.2 17.6At 31 December 2025 7.6 – 1.1 2.3 – – 0.3 11.3

The £4.8 million impairment charge relates to the Melrose cash-generating unit. The impairment charge is reported in non-

underlying administrative expenses in the Consolidated Income Statement.

The remaining useful economic lives of intangible assets is as follows: customer relationships is two years and brand names is

seven years.

Amortisation charged during the year of £1.3 million (2024: £1.4 million) is presented within administration expenses in the

Consolidated Income Statement with the exception of £0.1 million which is presented within discontinued operations.

Cumulative impairment losses recognised in relation to goodwill is £33.9 million (2024: £30.7 million).

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

161

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

161

Financial Statements

Software development Company£MCostBalance at 1 January 2024 and 31 December 2024 0.1Balance at 1 January 2025 and 31 December 2025 0.1Accumulated impairment and amortisationBalance at 1 January 2024 and 31 December 2024 –Balance at 1 January 2025 and 31 December 2025 –Net book valueNet book value at 31 December 2024 0.1Net book value at 31 December 2025 0.1

Software development is internally generated.

Impairment tests for cash-generating units (‘CGU’) containing goodwill

Goodwill is attributed to the operations identified below for the purpose of testing impairment. These businesses are the lowest

level at which goodwill is monitored and represent operating segments and CGUs. The aggregate carrying amounts of goodwill

allocated to each CGU are as follows:

Reported 2025 2024 segment£M£MUK Distribution UK 7.6 7.6Melrose UK – 3.27.6 10.8

Impairment of intangibles

Each year, or whenever events or a change in the economic environment or performance indicates a risk of impairment, the

Group reviews the value of goodwill and other assets allocated to its CGU.

An impairment test is a comparison of the carrying value of the assets of an operation or CGU to their recoverable amount. The

recoverable amount represents the higher of the CGU’s fair value less costs of disposal and value in use. Where the recoverable

amount is less than the carrying value, an impairment results. For UK Distribution, the recoverable amount has been determined

based on value in use and for Melrose, the recoverable amount has been determined based on fair value less costs of disposal.

An impairment of £4.8 million has been recognised for the Melrose CGU as a result of impairment testing in the current year with

£3.2 million recognised against goodwill and £1.6 million recognised against other intangible assets. This is included within non-

underlying administrative expenses in the Consolidated Income Statement. The recoverable amount of Melrose is £2.6 million

and is categorised as level 3 as prescribed in the fair value hierarchy in IFRS 13.

10 Intangible assets continued

162162

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Key assumptions – value in use

Cash flows were projected based on actual operating results, the approved 2026 business plan and management’s assessment

of planned performance in the period to 2029. For the purpose of impairment testing, where there was goodwill allocated

to CGUs, the cash flows were assumed to grow into perpetuity at a rate of 2.0% beyond 2029. For CGUs with no associated

goodwill, revenue and central costs were assumed to grow at a rate of 2.0% for each year after 2029 up to the end of the

deemed useful life of the assets being assessed for impairment.

The main assumptions within the operating cash flows used for 2026 include the achievement of future sales volumes and prices,

gross margin and discount rate. The sales increase assumptions are made up of underlying growth and improvement initiatives

identified as explained in note 1 and the Executive Chair’s review. The gross margin assumptions include control of purchase

prices, achievement of budgeted operating costs and the impact of network optimisation. These assumptions have been

reviewed in light of the current economic environment.

The Directors have estimated the discount rate by reference to an industry average weighted average cost of capital. This has

been adjusted to include an appropriate risk factor to reflect current economic circumstances and the risk profile of the CGUs.

As the CGUs in the UK have similar characteristics and risk profiles, a single discount rate has been applied: a pre-tax weighted

average cost of capital of 14.7% (2024: 13.1%).

Climate-related risks have been considered in relation to the impairment testing, assuming that a transition scenario is most

likely, including Extended Producer Responsibility (‘EPR’) for bulky waste and reduced demand for current product offering. As

noted in the TCFD disclosure, the Group could mitigate the EPR risk in the long term by rolling out the take back scheme.

There is a high degree of uncertainty in the cost estimates for a zero emission HGV fleet. It has been assumed, for this

impairment modelling, that the cost of operating a zero emission HGV fleet is broadly comparable to that of operating a diesel

fleet. This assumption is consistent with the TCFD disclosure and is on the basis that there is a very large global market for HGVs,

which provides commercial incentive for companies to develop a viable, cost-effective zero emission solution for HGVs.

Key assumptions – fair value less costs of disposal

The most significant component of the fair value less costs of disposal of the Melrose CGU relates to the right of use assets. The

recoverable amount of Melrose is £2.6 million.

Sensitivity analysis

The Group has applied sensitivities to assess whether any reasonably possible changes in these key assumptions could cause

a further impairment to goodwill and subsequently intangible assets, property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets

that would be material to these Consolidated Financial Statements. The impairment that would result from a change in the

assumptions of the value in use calculation for UK Distribution is limited to the difference between the value in use and fair value

less costs of disposal. There continues to be headroom under the fair value less costs of disposal assessment. The most significant

component of the fair value less costs of disposal figures for the UKD CGU relates to freehold and long lease properties. The

fair values have been calculated with reference to the independent valuation of properties during the year. The valuation is

considered to be level 3 in the fair value hierarchy due to unobservable inputs used in the valuation. No CGUs are materially

sensitive to changes in key assumptions.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

163

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

163

Financial Statements

11 Investments in subsidiary undertakings

Company

Summary information on investments in subsidiary undertakings is as follows:

£MCostBalance at 1 January 2024 118.3Share options granted to employees of subsidiary undertakings 0.7Balance at 31 December 2024 119.0Balance at 1 January 2025 119.0Share options granted to employees of subsidiary undertakings 0.4Assets classified as held for sale and other disposals (6.4)Balance at 31 December 2025 113.0ImpairmentBalance at 31 December 2024 and 1 January 2025 (16.6)Impairment charge (83.8)Balance at 31 December 2025 (100.4)Carrying valueAt 1 January 2024 101.7At 31 December 2024 102.4At 31 December 2025 12.6

A full list of the Group’s subsidiaries is listed on page 188.

The Company determines annually whether there are any indications that its investment in its subsidiaries may be impaired. The

Company then assesses whether there is an impairment in this investment by comparing the carrying value of the investment

with the recoverable amount of the relevant subsidiaries. Where the recoverable amount is less than the carrying value, an

impairment results.

During the year the investment in HFD Limited was tested for impairment following a review of performance of the subsidiary

which indicated a risk of impairment. Estimations are required of the value in use of the subsidiaries in which the investments are

held. An impairment of £83.8 million was identified as result of the impairment testing. This was driven by an increase in debt in

HFD Limited and the reduced value in use of cash flow projections as a result of the Group’s transformation plan, which, whilst

providing a clear line of sight to return to profitability, is based on a smaller business and hence the absolute profit in the long

term projections has changed compared to previous impairment assessments. The recoverable amount for the investment in

HFD Limited was £nil, assessing the higher of value in use and fair value less costs of disposal.

The assumptions for sales growth and gross margin used in the value in use calculations are the same as for UK distribution in the

Group goodwill impairment workings as disclosed in note 10. The cash flows were assumed to grow into perpetuity at a rate of

2.0% beyond 2030.

The Directors have estimated the discount rate by reference to an industry average weighted average cost of capital. This has

been adjusted to include an appropriate risk factor to reflect current economic circumstances. A pre-tax weighted average cost

of capital of 17.2% has been applied to the value in use calculation.

164164

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

12 Deferred tax assets and liabilities

Group

Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

Assets Liabilities Net2025 2024 2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£M£M£MProperty, plant and equipment – – (6.3) (7.8) (6.3) (7.8)Intangible assets – – (1.3) (2.0) (1.3) (2.0)Leases 21.1 23.7 (22.1) (24.4) (1.0) (0.7)Employee benefits 0.6 0.5 – – 0.6 0.5Tax losses 15.9 13.6 – – 15.9 13.6Other items 0.3 0.3 – – 0.3 0.3Tax assets/(liabilities) 37.9 38.1 (29.7) (34.2) 8.2 3.9Set-off of tax (29.7) (34.2) 29.7 34.2 – –8.2 3.9 – – 8.2 3.9

A deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of certain tax losses in the year. The Group has assessed future trading

forecasts and has concluded that the deferred tax assets recognised will be recoverable using estimated future taxable income

over a five year period to 2030 based on approved business plans for the Group up to 2029 with 2030 assumed to be in line with

  1. The Directors have not deemed it appropriate to estimate future taxable income past 2030 given the unreliability of using

estimating data past this point. The losses can be carried forward indefinitely and have no expiry date.

Movement in net deferred tax during the current year

1 January Recognised Recognised 31 December 2025 in income in equity 2025 £M£M£M£MProperty, plant and equipment (7.8) 1.5 – (6.3)Intangible assets (2.0) 0.7 – (1.3)Leases (0.7) (0.3) – (1.0)Employee benefits 0.5 0.1 – 0.6Tax losses 13.6 2.3 – 15.9Other items 0.3 – – 0.33.9 4.3 – 8.2

Movement in net deferred tax during the prior year

1 January Recognised Recognised 31 December 2024 in income in equity 2024 £M£M£M£MProperty, plant and equipment (11.9) 4.1 – (7.8)Intangible assets (2.4) 0.4 – (2.0)Leases (0.4) (0.3) – (0.7)Employee benefits 1.0 (0.6) 0.1 0.5Tax losses 1.1 12.5 – 13.6Other items 0.3 – – 0.3(12.3) 16.1 0.1 3.9

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

165

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

165

Financial Statements

Company

Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

Assets Liabilities Net2025 2024 2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£M£M£MProperty, plant and equipment – – (3.1) (4.4) (3.1) (4.4)Employee benefits 0.5 0.5 – – 0.5 0.5Tax assets/(liabilities) 0.5 0.5 (3.1) (4.4) (2.6) (3.9)Set-off of tax (0.5) (0.5) 0.5 0.5 – – – – (2.6) (3.9) (2.6) (3.9)

Movement in net deferred tax during the current year

1 January Recognised Recognised 31 December 2025 in income in equity 2025 £M£M£M£MProperty, plant and equipment (4.4) 1.3 – (3.1)Employee benefits 0.5 – – 0.5(3.9) 1.3 – (2.6)

Movement in net deferred tax during the prior year

1 January Recognised Recognised 31 December 2024 in income in equity 2024 £M£M£M£MProperty, plant and equipment (8.5) 4.1 – (4.4)Employee benefits 0.8 (0.4) 0.1 0.5(7.7) 3.7 0.1 (3.9)

Unrecognised deferred tax assets and liabilities – Group and Company

At 31 December 2025, the Group and Company has unused capital losses of £nil (2024: £nil) available for offset against future

chargeable gains. In addition, the Group has an unrecognised deferred tax asset in respect of tax losses in the UK of £9.4 million

(2024: £nil) equating to gross losses of £37.8 million (2024: £nil). The Group has an unrecognised deferred tax asset in respect of

tax losses in France of £2.2 million (2024: £1.5 million) equating to gross losses of £8.8 million (2024: £6.0 million). The Directors have

considered the probability that the deferred tax asset will be recoverable within the foreseeable future and concluded that only

part of deferred tax asset relating to the UK should be recognised at 31 December 2025 and no deferred tax asset relating to

France should be recognised at 31 December 2025.

The Group also has a UK interest restriction balance carried forward of £8.3 million (equating to a net amount of £2.1 million)

which could be utilised in the future if certain criteria are met. No deferred tax asset has been recognised on this amount as its

future utilisation is uncertain.

13 Inventories

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 Goods for resale£M£M£M£MBalance as at 31 December 77.4 102.8 – –

During the period, inventories of £355.0 million (2024 re-presented: £380.3 million) were recognised as an expense and included

in cost of sales in the Consolidated Income Statement. Included within this expense is a £11.5 million charge (2024: £18.5 million

charge) for write-downs of inventory to net realisable value.

12 Deferred tax assets and liabilities continued

166166

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

14 Trade and other receivables

Group CompanyRestated2025 2024 2025 2024 Current£M£M£M£MTrade receivables 60.2 75.7 – –Prepayments and accrued income 5.7 9.9 1.5 1.3Other receivables 20.7 25.4 1.7 1.8Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings – – 57.3 17.786.6 111.0 60.5 20.8Group CompanyRestated2025 2024 2025 2024 Non-current£M£M£M£MAmounts due from subsidiary undertakings – – 105.2 107.8

Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings are unsecured, non-interest bearing and are repayable on demand.

£0.6 million (2024 re-presented: £2.6 million increase) was recognised as an increase in the impairment loss allowance in the

Consolidated Income Statement in respect of trade receivables.

Further details on the impairment of trade receivables is provided in note 24.

15 Cash and cash equivalents

Group CompanyRestated2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MCash 26.1 12.0 25.5 7.5Cash and cash equivalents per Statement of Financial Position 26.1 12.0 25.5 7.5

Cash and cash equivalents of £26.1 million (2024: £12.0 million) are treated as a single unit of account where there is a pooling

arrangement under a single bank contract, in a single currency, for subsidiaries operating in the same country. The parent

company is deemed to be the primary participant in the pooling arrangement (see page 143).

Reconciliation to cash flow statement

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MCash and cash equivalents per Statement of Financial Position 26.1 12.0 25.5 7.5Bank overdraft per Statement of Financial Position – (1.1) – –Cash and cash equivalents classified as held for sale 1.6 – – –Bank overdraft classified as held for sale (0.1) – – –Cash and cash equivalents per Cash Flow Statement 27.6 10.9 25.5 7.5

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

167

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

167

Financial Statements

16 Assets classified as held for sale

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MNon-current assets held for sale 8.2 4.8 8.1 4.8Total assets of disposal group held for sale (note 25) 14.5 – – –Assets classified as held for sale 22.7 4.8 8.1 4.8

As part of the transformative strategy, certain UK non-core property is expected to be sold in 2026. The non-current assets held

for sale are presented within total reportable segments assets of the UK.

17 Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings

This note provides information about the contractual terms of the Group’s and Company’s interest-bearing loans and

borrowings.

At 31 December 2025, the Group had a committed sterling revolving credit facility agreement with Barclays Bank PLC, The

Bank of Ireland and Credit Industriel Et Commercial (London Branch) for £61.0 million and also had short term uncommitted

facilities of £7.5 million in the UK and €4.6 million facility in Continental Europe. In January 2026 the Group refinanced its revolving

credit facility and £7.5 million uncommitted facility into an £85.0 million asset-based lending facility, leveraging its inventory,

receivables and properties. The new facility matures in January 2029, with two extension options, each for an additional year.

Facilities

31 December

2025

£M

31 December

2024

£M

Sterling RCF 61.0 81.5

Sterling uncommitted facilities UK 7.5 15.0

Euro uncommitted facilities Continental Europe 4.0 3.9

72.5 100.4

For more information about the Group’s and Company’s exposure to interest rate and foreign currency risk, see note 24.

Group Company

2025

£M

2024

£M

2025

£M

2024

£M

Current liabilities

Bank overdraft – 1.1 – –

Interest-bearing loan 59.0 – 59.0 –

59.0 1.1 59.0 –

The Group has undrawn borrowing facilities at 31 December 2025, which amounted to £12.0 million (2024: £99.3 million). The

facility conditions for drawdown had been met during the period. There is a cross guarantee in place between the Company

and its UK, French and Dutch subsidiaries.

168168

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

The undrawn borrowing facilities are as follows:

Interest rate

%

2025

£M

Interest rate

%

2024

£M

UK 6.0 9.5 7.0 96.5

Netherlands 5.2 1.2 6.0 0.9

France 4.3 1.3 4.2 1.9

12.0 99.3

The undrawn borrowing facilities consisted of £2.0 million committed and £10.0 million uncommitted facilities (2024: £81.5 million

committed and £17.8 million uncommitted).

All the borrowing facilities above bear interest at floating rates.

Changes in net cash/(debt)

At 1

January

2025

£M

Non-cash

items

£M

Cash flows

£M

Foreign

exchange

movements

£M

Transfer

to held

for sale

£M

At 1

December

2025

£M

Cash at bank and in hand 12.0 – 15.6 0.1 (1.6) 26.1

Bank overdraft (1.1) – 1.0 – 0.1 –

Debt due within one year – – (59.0) – – (59.0)

Lease liabilities (61.2) (25.7) 17.4 (0.2) 3.0 (66.7)

Liabilities from financing activities (62.3) (25.7) (40.6) (0.2) 3.1 (125.7)

Net cash/(debt) 10.9 – (42.4) 0.1 (1.5) (32.9)

Net debt including lease liabilities (50.3) (25.7) (25.0) (0.1) 1.5 (99.6)

At

1 January

2024

£M

Non-cash

items

£M

Cash flows

£M

Foreign

exchange

movements

£M

At

1 December

2024

£M

Cash at bank and in hand 21.1 – (9.0) (0.1) 12.0

Bank overdraft (0.7) – (0.4) – (1.1)

Debt due within one year (50.0) – 50.0 – –

Lease liabilities (43.4) (33.4) 15.4 0.2 (61.2)

Liabilities from financing activities (94.1) (33.4) 65.0 0.2 (62.3)

Net (debt)/cash (29.6) – 40.6 (0.1) 10.9

Net debt including lease liabilities (73.0) (33.4) 56.0 0.1 (50.3)

Non-cash items relate to lease additions, modifications and interest.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

169

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

169

Financial Statements

18 Leases

The Group leases various properties, commercial vehicles and cars. Rental contracts are typically made for fixed periods of five

to ten years on properties and three to seven years on commercial vehicles and cars, but might have extension options. Lease

terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a wide range of different terms and conditions. The lease agreements

do not impose any covenants, but leased assets cannot be used as security for borrowing purposes.

Information about leases for which the Group is a lessee is presented below.

Right-of-use assets

Group CompanyNon-Properties property Total Properties £M£M£M£MNet book value at 1 January 2024 18.7 22.9 41.6 0.8Additions 23.7 4.8 28.5 2.5Contract modifications/terminations 0.6 (0.9) (0.3) –Depreciation (4.8) (9.1) (13.9) (0.1)Impairment (0.3) (0.3) (0.6) –Effect of movements in foreign exchange (0.1) (0.1) (0.2) –Net book value at 31 December 2024 37.8 17.3 55.1 3.2Net book value at 1 January 2025 37.8 17.3 55.1 3.2Additions 8.7 7.0 15.7 4.3Contract modifications/terminations 0.1 – 0.1 –Depreciation (7.1) (7.8) (14.9) (1.1) –Effect of movements in foreign exchange 0.1 0.1 0.2Assets transferred to held for sale (1.1) (1.5) (2.6) –Net book value at 31 December 2025 38.5 15.1 53.6 6.4

The right-of-use assets are shown as non-current assets in the balance sheet. The non-property right-of-use assets relate

mainly to commercial and motor vehicles.

Lease liabilities

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MCurrent 12.6 13.8 2.7 1.8Non-current 54.1 47.4 12.1 4.666.7 61.2 14.8 6.4

170170

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Amounts recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement

GroupRe-presented2025 2024 Continuing£M£MInterest on lease liabilities 3.5 2.3Expenses relating to leases of low-value assets – 0.1

The total cash outflow for leases during the year ended 31 December 2025 was £17.4 million (2024: £15.5 million) for the Group and

£2.8 million (2024: £0.1 million) for the Company.

Extension and termination options

Extension and termination options are included in a number of property and equipment leases across the Group. These terms

are used to maximise operational flexibility in terms of managing contracts. The majority of extension and termination options

held, are exercisable only by the Group and not by the respective lessor.

Sale and leaseback transactions

During the period the Group entered into a sale and leaseback transaction for one property. The proceeds were used to

reduce the Group’s net debt. The property was sold for proceeds of £21.7 million and completed on 18 July 2025. The lease is at

market rate and the aggregate annual lease cost of the properties is £1.5 million. The total gain recognised due to the sale and

leaseback transaction is £6.2 million and is included within profit on disposal of property plant and equipment in non underlying

items. The lease commenced on the transaction date and is for a term of ten years.

19 Trade and other payables

Group CompanyRestated2025 2024 2025 2024 Current£M£M£M£MTrade payables 67.1 95.4 0.8 3.2Taxation and social security 9.5 26.0 0.8 13.4Non-trade payables and accrued expenses 20.6 17.8 4.4 1.4Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings – – 60.2 56.397.2 139.2 66.2 74.3

Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings are unsecured, interest free and are repayable on demand.

The Group’s exposure to currency and liquidity risk related to trade and other payables is disclosed in note 24.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

171

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

171

Financial Statements

20 Provisions

Property – non-current Legal claims – current2025 2024 2025 2024 Group£M£M£M£MBalance at 1 January 3.1 2.6 – –Utilisation of provisions – (0.2) – –Charged/(credited) to the income statement:Additional provisions 0.6 0.7 1.6 –Unused amounts reversed (0.4) – – –Balance at 31 December 3.3 3.1 1.6 –Property – non-current2025 2024 Company£M£MBalance at 1 January – –Charged to the income statement:Additional provisions 0.1 –Balance at 31 December 0.1 –

The property provisions relate to property dilapidations. Dilapidation provisions are expected to be utilised between 1 and 111

years as the individual lease term comes to an end.

The legal claims provision relates to one of the Company’s subsidiaries, MCD Group Limited, which is being prosecuted by a local

authority for a health and safety offence relating to an accident at one of the Group’s sites, previously disclosed in our 2022

Annual Report. MCD Group Limited has pleaded guilty to the offence and awaits sentencing. There is significant uncertainty in

estimating the level of fine that may be imposed. The starting point in the sentencing guidelines is £2.4 million. Applying a one

third discount for a guilty plea, as allowed under the guidelines, would result in a total of £1.6 million. This is the level of provision

that has been recorded by the Group, being the best estimate at the current time. The sentencing guidelines would, however,

allow a fine between £0.1 million to £6.0 million to be imposed.

21 Employee benefits

During the year, the Group operated a UK defined benefit plan and defined contribution plans in the UK, France and the

Netherlands.

UK defined benefit plan

The Headlam Group PLC Staff Retirement Benefits Scheme (the ‘plan’) is the defined benefit plan operated by the Company

which provides pensions in retirement and death benefits to members. The majority of members are entitled to receive pensions

from age 65, equal to either 1/50 or 1/60 of final salary for each year of service that the employee provided, depending on which

section of the plan the member is part of. The plan is closed to new members and from 31 March 2020 was closed to future

accrual of benefits.

The plan is a registered scheme under UK legislation and is contracted out of the State Second Pension. The plan is legally

separated from the Company and assets are held independently of the Company’s finances. The plan is subject to the scheme

funding requirements outlined in UK legislation.

The Company has a right to a refund of any surplus in the plan if the plan winds up, after payment of expenses, members

benefits and any enhancements to the members’ benefits as the Trustee sees fit. In addition, if the assets of the plan exceed

the estimate by the actuary of the cost of buying out the benefits of all beneficiaries with an insurance company, including

the associated expenses, and the plan is not being wound up, then the Company may request a payment of the excess funds

though does not have an unconditional right to a refund. There have been no payments made to the Company out of the plan’s

assets over the year.

The plan was established from 11 February 1983 under trust and is governed by the plan’s Trust Deed and Rules dated

26 March 2015. The Trustee of the plan comprises one sole corporate trustee. The Trustee of the plan is required by law to act in

the best interests of the plan participants. The Trustee is responsible for the operation and the governance of the plan, including

making decisions regarding the plan’s funding and investment strategy in conjunction with the Company.

172172

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

There have been no curtailments or settlements made to the plan over 2025. On 31 March 2020, the plan closed to future accrual

which would typically be treated as a curtailment event. Historically the future salary increase assumption used to calculate the

Scheme’s IAS 19 liabilities has been set equal to the assumption for expected future RPI inflation (the rate of increase applied to

pensions in deferment) and therefore there was no impact on the reported liabilities in respect of this event.

The plan’s current investment strategy is to hold 100% annuity policies, following a buy-in transaction in March 2024.

The last scheme funding valuation of the plan was as at 31 March 2023 and revealed a fully funded position.

The main annual rate assumptions used by the actuary were, increase of pensions in payment 3.24%, discount rate before

retirement 3.68%, discount rate after retirement 3.68% and inflation 3.24%. Assets were taken at their audited market value at the

valuation date.

The schedule of contributions was agreed between the Company and Trustee in June 2024. No regular contributions are required

to be paid by the Company into the scheme.

The liabilities of the plan are based on the current value of expected benefit payment cash flows to members of the plan over

the next 65 years or more. The average duration of the liabilities is approximately 11 years.

Defined benefit obligation

In the UK there is no contractual agreement or stated Group policy for allocating the net defined benefit liability between the

participating subsidiaries and as such the full deficit is recognised by the Company, which is the sponsoring employer.

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MPresent value of funded defined benefit obligations (58.9) (62.2) (58.9) (62.2)Fair value of plan assets 57.1 60.7 57.1 60.7Deficit in funded scheme (1.8) (1.5) (1.8) (1.5)Other long-term employee benefits – (0.6) – –Total employee benefits (1.8) (2.1) (1.8) (1.5)Analysed as:Current liabilities – – – –Non-current liabilities (1.8) (2.1) (1.8) (1.5)Total employee benefits (1.8) (2.1) (1.8) (1.5)

Movements in present value of defined benefit obligation

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MAt 1 January 62.2 69.2 62.2 69.2Interest cost 3.3 3.0 3.3 3.0Net remeasurement gains – financial (1.4) (7.8) (1.4) (7.8)Net remeasurement losses/(gains) – demographic 0.5 (0.1) 0.5 (0.1)Net remeasurement losses/(gains) – experience 0.1 (0.4) 0.1 (0.4)Deferred buy-in premium (1.0) 2.1 (1.0) 2.1Benefits paid (4.8) (3.8) (4.8) (3.8)At 31 December 58.9 62.2 58.9 62.2

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

173

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

173

Financial Statements

21 Employee benefits continued

Movements in fair value of plan assets

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MAt 1 January 60.7 73.6 60.7 73.6Interest income on plan assets 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2Return on assets, excluding interest income (1.7) (13.7) (1.7) (13.7)Contributions by employer:Past service deficit contributions – 1.7 – 1.7Benefits paid (4.8) (3.8) (4.8) (3.8)Administration expenses (0.3) (0.3) (0.3) (0.3)At 31 December 57.1 60.7 57.1 60.7

The fair value of the plan assets were as follows:

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MEquities* – 1.3 – 1.3Cash and other 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2Insured annuities 56.9 59.2 56.9 59.257.1 60.7 57.1 60.7

* These assets are held within pooled investment vehicles that are unquoted. The fair value of the underlying assets within these funds have a quoted market price in an

active market.

As at 31 December 2025 the total asset value of £57.1 million is unquoted.

Movements in the effect of the asset ceiling

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MAt 1 January – 6.7 – 6.7Interest cost on the asset ceiling – 0.3 – 0.3Changes in the effect of the asset ceiling excluding interest cost – (7.0) – (7.0)At 31 December – – – –

Expense recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement relating to defined benefit obligation

Group2025 2024 £M£MNet interest expense on the net defined benefit liability (note 6) 0.1 0.1Administration expenses 0.3 0.3Total 0.4 0.4

Net interest is charged to net finance costs, administration expenses are charged to administrative expenses.

174174

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Remeasurement of the net defined benefit liability in the Statement of Comprehensive Income

Group2025 2024 £M£MReturn on assets, excluding interest income 1.7 13.7Net remeasurement – financial (1.4) (7.8)Net remeasurement – demographic 0.5 (0.1)Net remeasurement – experience 0.1 (0.4)Deferred buy-in-premium (1.0) 2.1Adjustment in respect of asset ceiling and minimum funding requirement – (7.0)(0.1) 0.5

Principal actuarial assumptions

2025 % 2024 %Discount rate (net of management fees) 5.6 5.5Revaluation of deferred benefits in excess of GMPs 3.1 3.3Inflation-linked pension increases 3.1 3.3Price inflation (RPI) 3.1 3.385% of members assumed to 85% of members assumed to take maximum tax-free cash take maximum tax-free cash using the Scheme’s current using the Scheme’s current Commutation of pension at retirementcommutation termscommutation termsMortality table assumptions:UK pre-retirement AC00 (Ultimate) table AC00 (Ultimate) table98%(M)/107%(F) of the S3PA 98%(M)/107%(F) of the S3PA tables with future improvements tables with future improvements from 2013 in line with the CMI from 2013 in line with the CMI 2023 projections model with 2024 projections model with the initial addition to mortality the initial addition to mortality improvements parameter of improvements parameter of 0.5% and a long term rate of 0.5% and a long term rate of improvement of 1.5% per annum, improvement of 1.5% per annum, 2020/2021 weighting parameters and the Core half-life parameter of 0% and 2022/2023 weighting UK post-retirement – future pensionersof 1 year (H=1)parameters of 15%98%(M)/107%(F) of the S3PA 98%(M)/107%(F) of the S3PA tables with future improvements tables with future improvements from 2013 in line with the CMI from 2013 in line with the CMI 2023 projections model with 2024 projections model with the initial addition to mortality the initial addition to mortality improvements parameter of improvements parameter of 0.5% and a long term rate of 0.5% and a long term rate of improvement of 1.5% per annum, improvement of 1.5% per annum, 2020/2021 weighting parameters and the Core half-life parameter of 0% and 2022/2023 weighting UK post-retirement – current pensionersof 1 year (H=1)parameter of 15%

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

175

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

175

Financial Statements

The mortality assumption implies the expected future lifetime from age 65 is as follows:

Group2025 2024 YearsYearsNon-pensioner male 24.2 23.8Pensioner male 22.6 22.2Non-pensioner female 25.9 25.8Pensioner female 24.2 24.1

Company

The principal actuarial assumptions for the Company are the same as those disclosed for the UK above.

Sensitivity analysis

The table below shows the impact on the defined benefit obligation of changing each of the most significant assumptions in

isolation.

Impact on scheme Impact on scheme liabilities 2025liabilities 2024Effect in £M Change in assumptionIncrease Decrease Increase DecreaseDiscount rate 1.0% movement (5.5) 6.7 (6.0) 7.2Rate of inflation (RPI)* 0.25% movement 1.0 (1.0) 1.1 (1.1)Assumed life expectancy One-year movement 1.7 (1.8) 1.8 (1.7)

* With corresponding changes to the salary and pension increase assumptions.

The figures in the table as at 31 December 2025 have been calculated using the same valuation method that was used to

calculate the defined benefit obligation at the same date. The figures in the table as at 31 December 2024 have been calculated

by applying the same percentage increase or decrease as at 31 December 2025.

Extrapolation of the sensitivity analysis beyond the ranges shown may not be appropriate.

The plan exposes the Group to risk of life expectancy changes which can affect the value of the liabilities.

Total Group pension costs

Included within the total staff costs as disclosed in note 4 are costs relating to the Group’s defined contribution plans. The

pension cost for the year represents contributions payable by the Group to the plans and amounted to £4.2 million (2024:

£4.9 million). Contributions amounting to £0.5 million (2024: £nil) in respect of the December 2024 payroll were paid in

January 2025.

22 Share-based payments

Group and Company

Executive Directors and executive management currently participate in executive share option schemes. The Group operates

the Headlam Group Performance Share Plan 2017 and Deferred Bonus Plan 2017. Further details of these schemes and plans are

given in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 92 to 117.

The Group operates the Headlam Management Incentive Plan which was approved by shareholders at the 2023 Annual General

Meeting. The plan enables the grant of market value options to senior managers below the Executive Team. The options are

intended to focus and incentivise senior managers for multi-year strategy delivery. Options granted will vest three years after the

date of grant and remain exercisable up until the tenth anniversary of their grant date.

Additionally, the Group operates a savings-related share option scheme (‘Sharesave scheme’) which is open to employees

subject to eligibility criteria determined by the Directors prior to each option grant. The most recent grant was on

17 October 2025 when employees with over one month’s service were invited to participate.

The Group also operates an Employee Long Service Award Scheme to recognise the long service of employees across the Group.

Employees are awarded ordinary shares for no cash consideration after certain milestones of service. There were two share

grants during the year, 6,700 shares were granted on 8 April 2025 with a fair value of 84.4p and 5,400 shares were granted on

5 September 2025 with a fair value of 68.0p. The fair value of the services received in return for the shares issued is measured at

the closing share price on the grant date.

21 Employee benefits continued

176176

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

The terms and conditions of the grants are as follows, whereby all options are settled by physical delivery of shares:

Number of instrumentsContractual life of Grant date/employees entitledVesting conditionsoptions2025 2024Headlam Group Performance Share Plan 2017 granted to key management 15 July 2017 – 767 Exercisable 06/07/17 – 06/07/27Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other employees 5 October 2020 – 792 Continuous service 01/11/20 – 30/04/24Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other employees 6 October 2021 – 42,165 Continuous service 01/11/21 – 30/04/25Awards will vest between 25% Headlam Group Performance Share and 100% for performance Plan 2017 granted to key management between ‘threshold’ performance 18 April 2022 – 167,114and ‘maximum’ performance 09/04/22 – 08/04/32Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other employees 16 September 2022 73,164 134,830 Continuous service 01/11/22 – 30/04/26Awards will vest between 25% Headlam Group Performance Share and 100% for performance Plan 2017 granted to key management between ‘threshold’ performance 7 October 2022 – 36,976and ‘maximum’ performance 08/10/22 – 07/10/32Deferred Bonus Plan granted to Executive 1Directors 13 April 2023 – 22,563 Continuous service 14/04/23 – 13/04/33Awards will vest between 25% Headlam Group Performance Share and 100% for performance Plan 2017 granted to key management between ‘threshold’ performance 129 June 2023516,320 627,142and ‘maximum’ performance 30/06/23 – 29/06/33Management Incentive Plan granted to senior management 29 June 2023 180,284 407,345 Continuous service 30/06/23 – 29/06/33Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other employees 6 October 2023 173,482 411,980 Continuous service 01/11/23 – 01/05/27Awards will vest between 25% Headlam Group Performance Share and 100% for performance Plan 2017 granted to key management between ‘threshold’ performance 118 March 2024603,082 935,334and ‘maximum’ performance 19/03/24 - 18/03/34Deferred Bonus Plan granted to Executive 1Directors 18 March 202494,191 94,191 Continuous service 19/03/24 – 18/03/34Management Incentive Plan granted to senior management 18 April 2024 457,583 854,309 Continuous service 19/04/24 – 18/04/34Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other employees 16 October 2024 314,873 1,174,783 Continuous service 01/11/24 – 01/05/28Management Incentive Plan granted to senior management 28 October 2024 1,223,270 2,031,254 Continuous service 29/10/24 – 28/10/34Deferred Bonus Plan granted to Executive 1Directors 17 April 202555,000 – Continuous service 18/04/25 – 17/04/35Awards will vest between 25% Headlam Group Performance Share and 100% for performance Plan 2017 granted to key management between ‘threshold’ performance 117 April 2025924,374 –and ‘maximum’ performance 18/04/25 – 17/04/35Management Incentive Plan granted to senior management 17 April 2025 1,375,501 – Continuous service 18/04/25 – 17/04/35Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other employees 17 October 2025 1,133,434 – Continuous service 01/11/25 – 01/05/29Total share options 7,124,558 6,941,545

1 Further details are provided on pages 92 to 117 of the Directors’ Remuneration Report.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

177

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

177

Financial Statements

The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options are as follows:

Weighted Weighted average average exercise exercise price Number price Number (pence) of options (pence) of options 2025202520242024Outstanding at the beginning of the year 111.1 6,941,545 163.0 3,923,736Exercised during the year – (22,563) – –Granted during the year 48.3 5,499,838 110.3 5,426,098Lapsed during the year 261.1 (100,038) 230.2 (703,366)Forfeited during the year 76.3 (4,080,327) 165.7 (878,664)Cancelled during the year 126.2 (1,113,897) 193.2 (826,259)Outstanding at the end of the year 78.3 7,124,558 111.1 6,941,545Exercisable at the end of the year 159.6 419,467 389.8 43,724

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for options exercised during the year was 81.6p (2024: £nil).

The options outstanding at the year-end have an exercise price in the range of 0p to 257p and a weighted average remaining

contractual life of 7.3 years (2024: 7.6 years).

The fair value of services received in return for share options granted are measured by reference to the fair value of share options

granted. In order to estimate the fair value of the services received the Group uses an appropriate option pricing model, either

the Black–Scholes or the Monte Carlo option pricing model.

It is expected that the options will be exercised as soon as they reach maturity.

The expected volatility is based on historic volatility calculated over the weighted average remaining life of the share options.

Details of share options granted during 2025 are shown below:

Management Performance Deferred Incentive Share Plan Bonus Plan Plan Sharesave 2025201720172023schemeNumber of options granted 2,153,533 55,000 2,092,020 1,199,285Grant date 17 April 2025 17 April 2025 17 April 2025 17 October 2025Fair value at measurement date:No performance conditions (p) – 73.26 9.01 9.43Performance conditions (p) EPS 70% &ESG 10% 69.0 – – –Performance conditions (p) TSR 20% 22.0 – – –Share price at grant date (p) 82.6 82.6 82.6 50.80Exercise price (p) – – 100.0 47.0Expected volatility 30% 30% 30% 32%Option life Three years Two years Three years Three yearsDividend yield 6.0% 6.0% 6.0% 6.0%Risk-free rate of interest 3.83% 3.83% 3.83% 3.73%

The total expenses recognised for the year arising from share-based payments are as follows:

Group Company Subsidiaries2025 2024 2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£M £M£M Options issued 0.7 1.0 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.7Shares issued – – – – – –Total expense recognised 0.7 1.0 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.7

22 Share-based payments continued

178178

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

23 Capital and reserves

Share capital

Ordinary Shares

2025 2024

Number of shares

Authorised

In issue at 1 January and 31 December 107,840,000 107,840,000

Fully paid

In issue at 1 January and 31 December 85,639,209 85,639,209

2025

£M

2024

£M

Allotted, called up and fully paid

Ordinary shares of 5p each 4.3 4.3

Shares classified in shareholders’ funds 4.3 4.3

At 31 December 2025, the Company held 5,356,544 shares (2024: 5,393,392) in relation to treasury stock and shares held in trust

for satisfying options and awards under employee share schemes. These shares have been disclosed in the treasury reserve.

Dividends are not payable on these shares and they are excluded from the calculation of earnings per share. The shares held

in treasury and trust represented 6.3% (2024: 6.3%) of the issued share capital as at 31 December 2025 with a nominal value of

£0.3 million (2024: £0.3 million).

Ordinary Shares

The holders of Ordinary Shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled to one vote per

share at meetings of the Company.

Dividends

2025 2024 £M£MFinal dividend for 2023 of 6.0p paid 7 June 2024 – 4.8

The total value of dividends proposed or declared but not recognised at 31 December 2025 is £nil (2024: £nil).

Reserves

Other reserves

Other reserves as disclosed on the Statement of Financial Position comprise the capital redemption reserve, translation reserve,

treasury reserve and special reserve.

Capital redemption reserve

The capital redemption reserve represents the nominal value of shares repurchased and cancelled during 2007.

Translation reserve

The translation reserve comprises all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of

foreign subsidiaries.

Treasury reserve

The treasury reserve comprises the cost of the Company’s shares held by the Group.

Special reserve

The special reserve (merger reserve) arose on the issuance of shares in connection with acquisitions made by the Company.

At 31 December 2025, this reserve was £1.5 million and there were no changes to this special reserve during the current or

previous year.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

179

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

179

Financial Statements

24 Financial instruments

The main financial risks arising in the normal course of the Group’s business are credit risk, liquidity risk, and market risks arising

from interest rate risk and foreign currency risk. This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to each of the above

risks, the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for measuring and managing risks and the Group’s management of capital.

Further quantitative disclosures are included throughout these financial statements.

Credit risk and credit quality

Credit risk arises from cash and cash equivalents, contractual cash flows of debt investments carried at amortised cost

and deposits with banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to wholesale and retail customers, including

outstanding receivables.

For Headlam Group PLC credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument

fails to meet its contractual obligations and arises principally from the Group’s trade receivables.

The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying amount of each financial asset and, as at the Statement of

Financial Position date, in the Directors’ opinion, there were no significant concentrations of credit risk likely to cause financial

loss to the Group.

The Group has a credit policy in place and the exposure to credit risk is monitored on an ongoing basis. Credit evaluations are

performed on all new customers requiring credit and these are frequently reviewed by management to limit exposure. Businesses

must obtain central approval from Executive Directors or senior executive management for credit limits in excess of £10,000. The

Group does not require collateral in respect of financial assets.

The credit control procedures described above, coupled with the diversified nature of the Group’s trade receivables, lead the

Directors to believe that there is limited credit risk exposure and that the credit quality of these assets is robust.

Other receivables comprise amounts due to the Group which historically have been received within three months of the year-

end. The Directors have considered the inherent risk profile of other receivables at the year-end and are of the view that this

historical experience will prevail for the foreseeable future and accordingly consider the credit quality of these assets to be

robust.

Cash and cash equivalents represent deposits with reputable financial institutions in the UK and Continental Europe and hence,

the Directors consider the credit quality of cash and cash equivalents to be robust.

Impairment of financial assets

The Group has trade receivables for sales of inventory as financial assets that are subject to the expected credit loss model.

Whilst cash and cash equivalents are also subject to the impairment requirements of IFRS 9, the identified impairment loss was

immaterial.

The carrying amount of financial assets at the Statement of Financial Position date was:

Group CompanyRestated2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MTrade and other receivables (note 14) 80.9 101.1 164.2 127.3Cash and cash equivalents (note 15) 26.1 12.0 25.5 7.5107.0 113.1 189.7 134.8

The fair values of the above financial assets at both 31 December 2025 and 2024, are deemed to approximate to carrying value

due to the short-term maturity of the instruments.

All other receivables are not past due (2024: not past due).

The Company had trade receivables of £nil (2024: £nil).

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected loss

allowance for all trade receivables.

The expected loss rates are based on the payment profiles of sales over a period of 36 months before 31 December 2025 or

31 December 2024 respectively and the corresponding historical credit losses experienced within this period. The historical loss

rates are adjusted to reflect current and forward-looking information on macroeconomic factors, including gross domestic

product growth, affecting the ability of the customers to settle the receivables.

180180

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

To measure the expected credit losses, trade receivables have been grouped based on shared credit risk characteristics and

ageing based on invoice date. The loss allowance provision as at 31 December 2025 is determined as follows;

Current < 30–60 60–90 Over 90 Ageing based on invoice date30 daysdaysdaysdays Total31 December 2025Expected loss rate 0.3% 0.4% 1.6% 35.7%Gross carrying amount – trade receivables (£millions) 36.1 19.7 7.9 6.6 70.3Loss allowance (£millions) 0.1 0.1 0.1 2.4 2.7

This provision excludes a specific trade receivable which has been provided for in full and as at 31 December 2025 totalled:

£1.3 million (2024: £1.3 million).

Current < 30–60 60–90 Over 90 Ageing based on invoice date30 daysdaysdaysdays Total31 December 2024Expected loss rate 0.3% 0.3% 1.2% 56.7%Gross carrying amount – trade receivables (£millions) 34.3 26.1 13.7 4.6 78.7Loss allowance (£millions) 0.1 0.1 0.2 2.6 3.0

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the Statement of Financial Position date by geographic region was:

Group Company2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MUK 60.2 69.0 – –

During the year the Group’s impairment charge as a percentage of revenue amounted to 0.2% (2024: charge 0.5%).

The loss allowances for trade receivables as at 31 December reconcile to the opening loss allowances as follows:

Company trade Group trade receivablesreceivables2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MOpening loss allowance at 1 January 4.3 1.9 – –Increase in loan loss allowance recognised in profit or loss during the year 1.0 2.9 – –Receivables written off during the year as uncollectible (1.3) (0.5) – –Loss allowances transferred to assets held for sale (0.5) – – –Closing loss allowance at 31 December 3.5 4.3 – –

Trade receivables are written off where there is no reasonable expectation of recovery. It is the Group’s policy wherever possible

to engage the debtor in a repayment plan to reduce the exposure to credit losses.

Impairment losses on trade receivables are presented as net impairment losses within operating profit. Subsequent recoveries of

amounts previously written off are credited against the same line item.

The Company assesses the expected credit loss associated with amounts due from subsidiary undertakings on a forward-

looking basis, relying upon cash flow forecasts of the subsidiary to determine expected recoverability. The Company has loss

allowances against amounts due from subsidiary undertakings of £32.3 million (2024: £10.0 million). The increase in the loss

allowance in the year is driven by the fair value less costs to dispose of the European subsidiaries which are held as a disposal

group held for sale (see note 25).

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

181

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

181

Financial Statements

24 Financial instruments continued

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s approach to

managing liquidity is to ensure, as far as possible, that it will always have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities when due, with

sufficient headroom to cope with abnormal market conditions. Details of the total facilities that the Group has access to are

given in note 18.

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities:

Carrying Contractual 1 year 5 years amount cash flows or less 1–2 years 2–5 years or more 31 December 2025 Group£M£M£M£M£M£MNon-derivative financial liabilitiesBank loans 59.0 (59.0) (59.0) – – –Trade and other payables 87.7 (87.7) (87.7) – – –Lease liabilities 66.7 (76.9) (17.0) (14.4) (25.1) (20.4)213.4 (223.6) (163.7) (14.4) (25.1) (20.4)Carrying Contractual 1 year 5 years amount cash flows or less 1–2 years 2–5 years or more 31 December 2024 Group£M£M£M£M£M£MNon-derivative financial liabilitiesOverdraft 1.1 (1.1) (1.1) – – –Trade and other payables 113.2 (113.2) (113.2) – – –Lease liabilities 61.2 (76.8) (16.3) (15.3) (24.4) (20.8)175.5 (191.1) (130.6) (15.3) (24.4) (20.8)Carrying Contractual 1 year 5 years amount cash flows or less 1–2 years 2–5 years or more 31 December 2025 Company£M£M£M£M£M£MNon-derivative financial liabilitiesTrade and other payables 65.4 (65.4) (65.4) – – –Lease liabilities 14.8 (13.5) (3.7) (3.7) (4.6) (1.5)80.2 (78.9) (69.1) (3.7) (4.6) (1.5)Carrying Contractual 1 year 5 years amount cash flows or less 1–2 years 2–5 years or more 31 December 2024 Company£M£M£M£M£M£MNon-derivative financial liabilitiesTrade and other payables 60.9 (60.9) (60.9) – – –Lease liabilities 6.4 (8.2) (2.2) (2.2) (2.2) (1.6)67.3 (69.1) (63.1) (2.2) (2.2) (1.6)

The value of the Group’s and Company’s financial liabilities as detailed above at 31 December 2025 and 2024 were not

materially different to the carrying value. Fair values were calculated using market rates, where available. Where market values

are not available, fair values have been estimated by discounting expected future cash flows using prevailing interest rate

curves. Amounts denominated in foreign currencies are valued at the exchange rate prevailing at the Statement of Financial

Position date.

All financial assets and liabilities for the Group and Company are recognised at amortised cost.

182182

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Interest rate risk

The Company and Group are exposed to interest rate fluctuations on their borrowings and cash deposits. Borrowings are

principally held in sterling at floating rates. Deposits are in sterling, euros and US dollars and are at floating rates.

Floating rate borrowings are linked to the Sterling Overnight Index Average. The Group adopts a policy of reviewing its floating

rate exposure to ensure that if interest rates rise the effect on the Group’s income statement is manageable.

At the reporting date the interest rate profile of the Group’s interest-bearing financial instruments was:

Company carrying Group carrying amountamountRestated 2025 2024 2025 2024 £M£M£M£MVariable rate instrumentsFinancial assets 26.1 12.0 25.5 7.5Financial liabilities (59.0) (1.1) (59.0) –(32.9) 10.9 (33.5) 7.5

Sensitivity analysis

A change of 100 basis points in the interest rates at the reporting date would have increased/(decreased) equity and profit

or loss by the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remain

constant. The analysis is performed on the same basis for 2024.

Group CompanyProfit or loss Equity Profit or loss Equity100bp 100bp 100bp 100bp 100bp 100bp 100bp 100bp increase decrease increase decrease increase decrease increase decrease £M£M£M£M£M£M£M£M31 December 2025Variable rate instruments (0.3) 0.3 – – (0.3) 0.3 – –31 December 2024Variable rate instruments 0.1 (0.1) – – 0.1 (0.1) – –

Foreign currency risk

The Group and Company do not have a material foreign currency risk.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

183

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

183

Financial Statements

Fair values hierarchy

The financial instruments carried at fair value are categorised according to their valuation method. The different levels have

been defined below:

• Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

• Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly, as

prices or indirectly, derived from prices.

• Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

Fair values

The carrying amounts shown in the Statement of Financial Position for financial instruments are a reasonable approximation of

fair value.

Trade receivables, trade payables and cash and cash equivalents

Fair values are assumed to approximate to cost due to the short-term maturity of the instrument.

Borrowings, other financial assets and other financial liabilities

Amounts denominated in foreign currencies are valued at the exchange rate prevailing at the Statement of Financial

Position date.

Capital management

The Group views its finance capital resources as primarily comprising share capital, bank loans and operating cash flow.

The Board’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base so as to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to sustain

future development of the business. The Board closely monitors its shareholder base, dividend yield and earnings per share. In

the medium term the Group aims to maintain a dividend cover of 2.0 times.

The Board encourages employees of the Group to hold the Company’s ordinary shares. The Group operates a number of

employee share option schemes.

Certain subsidiaries of the Company are required to maintain issued share capital at levels to support capital adequacy

requirements prevailing in the legislative environment in which they operate.

In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of dividends made payable to

shareholders, return capital to shareholders, issue new shares or sell assets to reduce debt.

At 31 December 2025, the Group had a committed sterling revolving credit facility agreement with Barclays Bank PLC, The Bank

of Ireland and Credit Industriel Et Commercial (London Branch) for £61.0 million and also had short term uncommitted facilities

of £7.5 million in the UK and €4.6 million facility in Continental Europe. The total banking facilities available to the Group at

31 December 2025 were £72.5 million (2024: £100.4 million).

In January 2026 the Group refinanced its revolving credit facility and £7.5 million uncommitted facility into an £85.0 million asset-

based lending facility, leveraging its inventory, receivables and properties. The new facility matures in January 2029, with two

extension options, each for an additional year. It contains financial covenants on minimum liquidity headroom and minimum

EBITDA through to December 2027 and a fixed charge cover ratio covenant thereafter.

No changes were made to the objectives, policies or processes during the years ended 31 December 2025 and

31 December 2024.

Covenants

The Group was subject to financial covenants in relation to its £61.0 million revolving credit facility agreement, being a monthly

minimum liquidity test and a quarterly minimum EBITDA test apply. Liquidity is the total amount available committed facilities

and the minimum EBITDA is calculated using EBITDA, adjusted to exclude the impact of IFRS 16. The Group met these covenants

during the year.

The new asset-based lending facility contains the following financial covenants: minimum liquidity headroom (both month

end and all-times) and minimum EBITDA through to December 2027 and a fixed charge cover ratio covenant thereafter. It also

contains operational covenants debt turn, dilution levels, gross margin and inventory days.

24 Financial instruments continued

184184

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

25 Discontinued operations

As at 31 December 2025 the subsidiaries in Continental Europe have been classified as a disposal group held for sale. The

European subsidiaries had been actively marketed for sale as a package and offers were received from several interested

parties. The Group is proceeding with the disposal with the preferred bidder. The sale of these subsidiaries are expected to take

place H1 2026.

Financial performance of discontinued operation

Period ended 31 December 2025 Period ended 31 December 2024Non-Non-underlying underlying Underlying (note 3) Total Underlying (note 3) Total 2025 2025 2025 2024 2024 2024 £M£M£M£M£M£MRevenue 66.9 – 66.9 67.4 – 67.4Expenses (70.6) (0.2) (70.8) (70.0) (0.8) (70.8)Loss on measurement to fair value less costs to sell – (12.6) (12.6) – – –Loss before taxation (3.7) (12.8) (16.5) (2.6) (0.8) (3.4)Taxation (0.7) 0.1 (0.6) (0.6) 0.1 (0.5)Loss after taxation from discontinued operations (4.4) (12.7) (17.1) (3.2) (0.7) (3.9)Exchange differences on translation of discontinued operations 0.1 (0.2)Other comprehensive loss from discontinued operations (17.0) (4.1)

Impairment – discontinued operations

As a result of the classification of the European subsidiaries to a disposal group held for sale, an impairment charge of

£12.6 million has been recognised within non-underlying expenses for discontinued operations. The recoverable amount has

been determined based on fair value less costs of disposal. The impairment charge has been recognised as follows: £2.7 million

against property, plant and equipment; £2.6 million against right of use assets; £0.4 million against other intangibles; £6.4 million

against inventories and £0.5 million against prepayments and accrued income.

The Company has recognised an impairment of £6.4 million against its investments in European subsidiary undertakings. The

recoverable amount has been determined based on fair value less costs of disposal for the disposal group.

For the European subsidiaries classified as a disposal group held for sale, the fair value less costs of disposal considers the offer

price received for the sale less known and estimated costs associated with the sale.

Cash flows from discontinued operations:

Period ended Period ended 31 December 202531 December 2024Total Total £M£MNet cash inflow from operating activities 1.0 0.3Net cash outflow from investing activities (0.2) (0.1)Net cash outflow from financing activities (1.5) (1.5)Net decrease in cash generated by discontinued operations (0.7) (1.3)

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

185

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

185

Financial Statements

Assets and liabilities of disposal group classified as held for sale:

The following assets and liabilities were reclassified as held for sale in relation to discontinued operations as at

31 December 2025, following an impairment of £12.6 million in relation to the assets:

Period ended 31 December 2025Total Assets classified as held for sale£MInventories 3.4Trade and other receivables 9.5Cash and cash equivalents 1.6Total assets of disposal group held for sale 14.5Period ended 31 December 2025Total Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale£MBank overdrafts (0.1)Lease liabilities (3.0)Trade and other payables (11.0)Employee benefits (0.6)Total liabilities of disposal group held for sale (14.7)

The cumulative foreign exchange income recognised in other comprehensive income in relation to discontinued operations as

at 31 December 2025 is £1.8 million (31 December 2024: £1.7 million).

Company only

The investments held in European subsidiaries have been impaired by £6.4 million to reflect the fair value less costs to dispose of

these entities as a result of the expected sale of the European subsidiaries.

26 Capital commitments

Group

As at 31 December 2025, the Group entered into commitments to purchase property, plant and equipment for £nil million

(2024: £nil million).

Company

At 31 December 2025, the Company had commitments to purchase property, plant and equipment for £nil million

(2024: £nil million).

25 Discontinued operations continued

186186

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

27 Related parties

Group and Company

Identity of related parties

The Group has a related party relationship with its subsidiaries and with its Directors and executive officers.

Transactions with key management personnel

The Group annually re-evaluates its interpretation of key management personnel and considers that this relates to the Executive

and Non-Executive Directors of the Group as identified on pages 60 and 61.

As at 31 December 2025, Directors of the Company and their immediate relatives controlled 0.2% of the total voting rights of the

Company (2024: 0.2%).

Non-Executive Directors receive a fee for their services to the Board.

Other than as disclosed in the Remuneration Report, there were no other transactions with key management personnel in either

the current or preceding year. The cost charged to administrative expenses relating to share plans of key personnel amounted to

£nil (2024: £nil).

Company only

In addition to the transactions with key personnel, the Company has the following transactions:

Transactions with other Group companies

Restated Balance at Balance at 31 December 2025 31 December 2024 £M£MAmounts due from subsidiaries 125.5 100.4Amounts due to subsidiaries (23.2) (31.2)

Transactions with Group companies typically comprise management, rent and interest charges during the period.

Related party transactions reported in the income statement

For year ended For year ended 31 December 2025 31 December 2024 £M£MRental income 8.6 10.2Recharge of operating expenses 3.2 2.6Interest income 10.0 11.0

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

187

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

187

Financial Statements

28 Group subsidiaries

Company Holding Type Place of incorporation

HFD Limited Direct Trading UK*

MCD Group Limited Direct Trading UK*

CECO (Flooring) Limited Indirect Trading UK*****

Domus Tiles Limited Indirect Trading UK*

Headlam BV Indirect Trading The Netherlands**

Dersimo BV Indirect Trading The Netherlands****

LMS SA Indirect Trading France***

Melrose Interiors Limited Indirect Trading UK*

Modern Style Rugs Limited Indirect Trading UK*

Birch Close Trading Limited Indirect Holding Company UK*

Headlam (European) Limited Direct Holding Company UK*

Betu Holdings Limited Indirect Holding Company UK*****

Headlam Holdings BV Direct Holding Company The Netherlands**

Headlam SAS Indirect Holding Company France***

Domus Group of Companies Limited Direct Holding Company UK*

Tileco (2012) Bidco Limited (dissolved 28 February 2025) Indirect Holding Company UK*******

Tileco Group (2007) Limited (dissolved 28 February 2025) Indirect Holding Company UK*******

Tileco Group Limited (dissolved 28 February 2025) Indirect Holding Company UK*******

Yourfloors Limited Direct Dormant UK*

Crossforge Limited Indirect Dormant UK*

Headlam Group Employee Trust Company Limited Direct Dormant UK*

Headlam Group Pension Trustees Limited Direct Dormant UK*

Headlam Ireland Limited Indirect Dormant Ireland******

Tileco Limited (dissolved 28 February 2025 ) Indirect Dormant UK*******

Surface Tiles Limited (dissolved 28 February 2025) Indirect Dormant UK*******

Gorsey Twenty One Limited Indirect Dormant UK*

Gorsey Twenty Two Limited (in liquidation) Indirect Dormant UK*******

Gorsey Twenty Three Limited (in liquidation) Indirect Dormant UK*******

The ordinary share capital of all of these subsidiaries are wholly owned. The principal activities of the trading companies are

wholly aligned to the sales, marketing, supply and distribution of floorcoverings and certain other ancillary products.

* Registered address for UK subsidiaries: Gorsey Lane, Coleshill, Birmingham, B46 1JU, UK.

** Registered address for these Dutch subsidiaries: Bettinkhorst 4, 7207 BP Zutphen, the Netherlands.

*** Registered address for French subsidiaries: 9-11 Rue de la Litte, 92390, Villeneuve-la-Garenne, France.

**** Registered address for this Dutch subsidiary: Noordzee 12, 3144 DB, Maassluis, the Netherlands.

***** Registered address for these UK subsidiaries: Unit 5 Carryduff Business Park, Comber Road, Carryduff, Belfast, County Down, BT8 8AN, UK.

****** Registered address for Irish subsidiary: 3rd Floor Kilmore House, Park Lane, Spencer Dock, Dublin 1, Ireland.

******* Registered address for these UK subsidiaries: 8th Floor Temple Point 1, Temple Row, Birmingham, B2 5LG, UK.

Domus Tiles Limited (company number: 00812533) is exempt from the requirement of the Companies Act 2006 relating to the

audit of accounts under section 479A of the Companies Act 2006.

188188

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

Glossary of Alternative

Performance Measures

Closest equivalent

statutory measure Definition and purpose

Underlying gross profit Gross profit Calculated as gross profit before non-underlying items

Underlying operating costs Administrative

expenses

Calculated as administrative expenses, distribution costs,

net impairment losses on trade receivables, net of any

other operating income and before non-underlying items.

Underlying operating profit Operating profit Calculated as operating profit before non-

underlying items

Underlying operating profit margin None Calculated as underlying operating profit divided by

revenue. This measure is used to assess how effective

the Group is at converting revenue into underlying

operating profit

Underlying profit before tax Profit before tax Calculated as profit before tax before non-underlying

items. Underlying profit before tax is used in the

determination of Executive Directors’ annual bonuses

Underlying profit after tax Profit after tax Calculated as profit after tax before non-underlying items

Underlying basic earnings

per share

Basic earnings

per share

Calculated as basic earnings per share before non-

underlying items

Underlying diluted earnings

per share

Diluted earnings

per share

Calculated as diluted earnings per share before non-

underlying items

Non-underlying items None Items which by virtue of their nature, size and expected

frequency require adjustment to show the performance

of the Group in a consistent manner which is comparable

year-on-year. These comprise: amortisation of acquired

intangibles; impairment of assets; business restructuring

and change-related costs; profit on sale of property, plant

and equipment; ERP system development; and insurance

proceeds

EBIT None Calculated as underlying operating profit or loss adjusted

to exclude the impact of IFRS 16 and share-based

payments

EBITDA None Calculated as underlying operating profit or loss excluding

the impact of depreciation and amortisation

Covenant EBITDA None Calculated as underlying operating profit or loss adjusted

to exclude the impact of IFRS 16 and share-based

payments and excluding the impact of depreciation and

amortisation

Underlying operating cash flow None Calculated as shown in the table in the Financial Review.

This metric is used to assess underlying cash generation

Net debt including lease liabilities None Calculated as cash and cash equivalents less other

interest-bearing loans and borrowings and less lease

liabilities

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

189

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

189

Financial Statements

ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES

‘APM

s’

Glossary of Alternative

Performance Measures

Closest equivalent

statutory measure Definition and purpose

Net debt/cash None Calculated as cash and cash equivalents less other

interest-bearing loans and borrowings

This is provided for use by investors, who used this metric

before the adoption of IFRS16 and continue to do so

Like for like revenue growth None Calculated as year-on-year revenue growth, expressed as

a percentage and adjusted to normalise currency and for

consistent working days, for businesses making a full year’s

contribution. This allows a consistent measure of year-on-

year performance

Underlying operating costs ratio None Calculated as underlying operating costs divided by

revenue. This measure shows how effective the Group is at

converting gross profit into underlying operating profit

Return on capital employed None Calculated as underlying operating profit measured as

a percentage of average capital employed, being total

equity less non-current other interest-bearing loans and

borrowings less cash and cash equivalents

This demonstrates the relative level of profit generated by

the capital employed

Adjusted effective tax rate

excluding non-underlying items

None Calculated as tax credit excluding non-underlying items

divided by underlying profit before tax

Cash conversion None Calculated as underlying operating cash flow divided

by underlying operating profit or loss and expressed as a

percentage

This cash conversion measure demonstrates the success

of the Group in converting profit to cash, which underpins

the quality of earnings and reflects the effectiveness of

working capital management

190190

ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES

‘APM

s’ CONTINUED

Total

Results

£M

Amortisation

of acquired

intangibles

and other

acquisition-

related costs

£M

Impairment

of property,

plant and

equipment,

intangible

assets and

right of use

assets

£M

Cloud-based

ERP system

development

costs

£M

Provision

for legal

claims

£M

Profit on

sale of

property,

plant and

equipment

£M

Business re-

structuring

and change-

related costs

£M

Impairment

of disposal

group held

for sale

£M

Adjusted

Results

(under-

lying)

£M

Revenue 498.7 – – – – – – – 498.7

Cost of sales (355.0) – – – – – 3.6 – (351.4)

Gross profit 143.7 – – – – – 3.6 – 147.3

Distribution costs (131.2) – – – – – 10.0 – (121.2)

Administrative expenses (81.6) 1.1 4.8 5.6 1.6 – 9.6 – (58.9)

Net impairment losses on

trade receivables (0.6) – – – – – – – (0.6)

Other operating income 6.2 – – – – (6.2) – – –

Operating (loss)/profit (63.5) 1.1 4.8 5.6 1.6 (6.2) 23.2 – (33.4)

Finance income 0.6 – – – – – – – 0.6

Finance expenses (6.7) – – – – – – – (6.7)

Net finance costs (6.1) – – – – – – – (6.1)

(Loss)/profit before tax (69.6) 1.1 4.8 5.6 1.6 (6.2) 23.2 – (39.5)

Taxation 4.8 (0.3) (0.4) – – – – – 4.1

Loss for the year from

continuing operations (64.8) 0.8 4.4 5.6 1.6 (6.2) 23.2 – (35.4)

Loss for the year from

discontinued operations (17.1) 0.1 – – – – 0.1 12.5 (4.4)

(Loss)/profit for the year

attributable to the equity

shareholders (81.9) 0.9 4.4 5.6 1.6 (6.2) 23.3 12.5 (39.8)

Total (loss)/earnings

per share

Basic (102.0)p 1.1p 5.5p 7.0p 2.0 (7.7)p 29.0p 15.5p (49.6)p

Diluted (102.0)p 1.1p 5.5p 7.0p 2.0 (7.7)p 29.0p 15.5p (49.6)p

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

191

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

191

Financial Statements

ADJUSTED RESULTS RECONCILIATION

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2025

Total

Results

£M

Amortisation

of acquired

intangibles

and other

acquisition-

related costs

£M

Impairment

of property,

plant and

equipment,

intangible

assets and

right of use

assets

£M

Cloud-based

ERP system

development

costs

£M

Impairment

of

inventories

and

receivables

£M

Profit on

sale of

property,

plant and

equipment

£M

Business re-

structuring

and change-

related costs

£M

Adjusted

Results

(under-

lying)

£M

Revenue 525.7 – – – – – – 525.7

Cost of sales (380.3) – – – 1.6 – 9.0 (369.7)

Gross profit 145.4 – – – 1.6 – 9.0 156.0

Distribution costs (124.2) – – – – – 4.4 (119.8)

Administrative expenses (71.0) 1.2 1.1 2.6 – – 6.3 (59.8)

Net impairment losses on

trade receivables (2.6) – – – 1.3 – – (1.3)

Other operating income 21.1 – – – – (21.1) – –

Operating (loss)/profit (31.3) 1.2 1.1 2.6 2.9 (21.1) 19.7 (24.9)

Finance income 0.1 – – – – – – 0.1

Finance expenses (6.9) – – – – – – (6.9)

Net finance costs (6.8) – – – – – – (6.8)

(Loss)/profit before tax (38.1) 1.2 1.1 2.6 2.9 (21.1) 19.7 (31.7)

Taxation 17.0 (0.4) (0.2) (0.6) (0.7) (3.5) (4.8) 6.8

(Loss)/profit from

continuing operations (21.1) 0.8 0.9 2.0 2.2 (24.6) 14.9 (24.9)

Loss from discontinued

operations (3.9) 0.1 0.6 – – – – (3.2)

(Loss)/profit for the year

attributable to the equity

shareholders (25.0) 0.9 1.5 2.0 2.2 (24.6) 14.9 (28.1)

(Loss)/earnings per

share from continuing

operations

Basic (26.3)p 1.0p 1.1p 2.5p 2.7p (30.6)p 18.6p (31.0)p

Diluted (26.3)p 1.0p 1.1p 2.5p 2.7p (30.6)p 18.6p (31.0)p

(Loss)/earnings per

share from discontinued

operations

Basic (4.9)p 0.1p 0.8p – – – – (4.0)p

Diluted (4.9)p 0.1p 0.8p – – – – (4.0)p

Total (loss)/earnings

per share

Basic (31.2)p 1.1p 1.9p 2.5p 2.7p (30.6)p 18.6p (35.0)p

Diluted (31.2)p 1.1p 1.9p 2.5p 2.7p (30.6)p 18.6p (35.0)p

192192

ADJUSTED RESULTS RECONCILIATION CONTINUED

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2024

2025

£M

Re-presented

2024

£M

2023

£M

2022

£M

2021

£M

Trading results (Continuing operations)

Revenue 498.7 525.7 656.5 663.6 667.2

Underlying gross profit 147.3 156.0 207.8 219.5 220.5

Overheads (180.7) (180.9) (191.7) (180.3) (183.2)

Underlying (loss)/profit before net financing costs (33.4) (24.9) 16.1 39.2 37.3

Net financing costs (6.1) (6.8) (5.1) (2.1) (1.5)

Underlying (loss)/profit on ordinary activities

before tax (39.5) (31.7) 11.0 37.1 35.8

Taxation 4.1 6.8 (2.2) (7.4) (9.2)

Underlying (loss)/profit on ordinary activities after

taxation – continued operations (35.4) (24.9) 8.8 29.7 26.6

Underlying (loss)/profit on ordinary activities after

taxation – discontinued operations (4.4) (3.2) – – 0.1

(Loss)/profit for the year attributable to the equity

shareholders (39.8) (28.1) 7.1 41.8 27.6

Shareholder value

(Loss)/earnings per share for profit from continuing

operations (80.7)p (26.3)p 9.6p 40.1p 23.5p

Underlying (loss)/earnings per share for profit from

continuing operations (44.1)p (31.0)p 11.0p 35.5p 31.5p

(Loss)/earnings per share for (loss)/profit from

discontinued operations (21.3)p (4.9)p – – 5.3p

Paid interim and final dividend per share – 6.0p 15.2p 14.8p 5.8p

Paid special dividend per share – – – 17.7p –

Proposed special dividend per share – – – – 17.7p

Proposed dividend per share – – 6.0p 11.2p 8.6p

Declared dividend per share – – – – –

The results for 2021–2023 within the financial record have not been re-presented to reflect the discontinued activity that

occurred in 2025, they remain the historical results reported for the Group.

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

193

Headlam Group PLC Annual Report & Accounts 2025

193

Financial Statements

FINANCIAL RECORD

2025

£M

Restated

2024

£M

2023

£M

2022

£M

2021

£M

Net assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment 68.8 86.9 127.6 119.9 113.3

Right of use assets 53.6 55.1 41.6 36.7 35.0

Intangible assets 11.3 17.6 19.4 17.8 18.1

Deferred tax assets 8.2 3.9 0.9 – –

141.9 163.5 189.5 174.4 166.4

Current assets

Inventories 77.4 102.8 131.5 139.8 130.9

Trade and other receivables 86.6 111.0 117.1 119.1 114.0

Income tax receivable – 3.6 3.1 – –

Cash and cash equivalents 26.1 12.0 21.1 2.1 61.2

Assets classified as held for sale 22.7 4.8 – – –

212.8 234.2 272.8 261.0 306.1

Total assets 354.7 397.7 462.3 435.4 472.5

Current liabilities

Bank overdraft – (1.1) (0.7) – –

Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings (59.0) – (50.0) (0.3) (0.6)

Lease liabilities (12.6) (13.8) (11.9) (11.4) (10.5)

Trade and other payables (97.2) (139.2) (129.1) (153.2) (178.0)

Employee benefits – – (1.1) (1.0) (1.0)

Income tax payable (0.4) – – (1.9) (1.0)

Provisions (1.6) – – – –

Liabilities relating to assets held for sale (14.7) – – – –

(185.5) (154.1) (192.8) (167.8) (191.1)

Non-current liabilities

Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings – – – – (6.9)

Lease liabilities (54.1) (47.4) (31.5) (26.3) (25.5)

Provisions (3.3) (3.1) (2.6) (1.7) (2.7)

Deferred tax liabilities – – (13.2) (12.1) (10.3)

Employee benefits (1.8) (2.1) (1.8) (2.7) (3.9)

(59.2) (52.6) (49.1) (42.8) (49.3)

Total liabilities (244.7) (206.7) (241.9) (210.6) (240.4)

Net assets 110.0 191.0 220.4 224.8 232.1

194194

FINANCIAL RECORD CONTINUED

The production of this report supports the work of the

Woodland Trust, the UK’s leading woodland conservation

charity. Each tree planted will grow into a vital carbon stor

e,

helping to reduce environmental impact as well as cr

eating

natural havens for wildlife and people.

ADVISERS

Auditors

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

One Chamberlain Square

Birmingham

B3 3AX

Taxation advisers

Deloitte LLP

Four Brindleyplace

Birmingham

B1 2HZ

Solicitors

Pinsent Masons LLP

55 Colmore Row

Birmingham

B3 2FG

Principal bankers

Barclays Bank PLC

PO Box 3333

One Snowhill

Snow Hill

Queensway

Birmingham B3 2WN

Wells Fargo Capital Finance Limited

8th Floor

33 King William Street

London

EC4R 9AT

Stockbroker

Panmure Liberum

Level 12 Ropemaker Place

25 Ropemaker Street

London EC2Y 9LY

Registrar

MUFG Corporate Markets

Central Square

29 Wellington Street

Leeds

LS1 4DL

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

HEADLAM GROUP PLC

Gorsey Lane

Coleshill

Birmingham

B46 1JU

UK

T: 01675 433 000

E: headlamgr[email protected]

S N: B46 1JU

Company number: 00460129

Visit us online at:

headlam.com

213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31HEA:UnderlyingMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31HEA:NonUnderlyingMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31HEA:UnderlyingMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31HEA:NonUnderlyingMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31HEA:SpecialReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31HEA:SpecialReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31HEA:SpecialReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902023-12-31213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31HEA:SpecialReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31HEA:SpecialReserveMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800I4AZZUJEYX9O902025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMemberiso4217:GBPiso4217:GBPxbrli:shares